Horizon Service Manual

Artwork consists of:
 Five Hundred Fifty-four (554) 8½ x 5½ inch pages
REV AUTHORED BY DATE Osteoporosis Assessment

DRICCI 9/28/17 LORAD© Breast Cancer Detection
REV DRAFTED BY DATE DirectRay© Digital Imaging
DRICCI 9/28/17 FLUOROSCAN© C-arm Imaging
PROPRIETARY: This document contains TITLE DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
proprietary data of Hologic, Inc. No
disclosure, reproduction or use of any
part thereof may be made except by HORIZON SERVICE MANUAL AW-10553 004
written permission from Hologic.
REV. RELEASE DATE: 02/21/18 ARTWORK SIZE A SHEET 1 OF 1
Form ENG-0034-T03, Rev. 002
Bone Densitometry System
Service Manual
MAN-03310 Revision 004
Horizon™
Bone Densitometry System
Service Manual
Part Number: MAN-03310
Revision 004
Customer Support
Toll Free in USA: +1.800.321.4659
Email: SkeletalHealth.Support@hologic.com
In Europe, South America, or Asia, contact your local dealer or distributor.
© 2017 Hologic, Inc. Printed in the USA. This manual was originally written in English.
Hologic, APEX, Discovery, Horizon, QDR, and associated logos are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Hologic, Inc. and/or
its subsidiaries in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks, registered trademarks, and product names are the property of
their respective owners.
This product may be protected by one or more U.S. or foreign patents as identified at www.Hologic.com/patents.
Horizon Service Manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 System Overview...............................................................................................................................................1
1.1.1 Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................1
1.1.2 Operation...................................................................................................................................................3
Patient Positioning and Scanning..............................................................................................................3
Technique Factors........................................................................................................................................3
1.1.3 BMC Results ..............................................................................................................................................4
1.1.4 Shielding ....................................................................................................................................................4
1.1.5 Automatic Internal Reference System for Daily Calibration .............................................................4
1.1.6 X-ray Scans ................................................................................................................................................4
1.2 X-ray Scanning Principles ................................................................................................................................4
1.2.1 Mounting ...................................................................................................................................................4
1.2.2 Beam Filter.................................................................................................................................................4
1.2.3 Program .....................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 Functional Overview ........................................................................................................................................5
1.3.1 Operator Console .....................................................................................................................................6
1.3.2 Distribution Board....................................................................................................................................7
Interface.........................................................................................................................................................7
Motor Control Subsystem ..........................................................................................................................8
Routing..........................................................................................................................................................8
C-arm Interface Board.................................................................................................................................8
C-arm Subsystem.........................................................................................................................................9
Detector Board ...........................................................................................................................................10
Control Panel Board ..................................................................................................................................10
1.4 Leakage Technique Factors............................................................................................................................15
1.4.1 Beam Filtration........................................................................................................................................16
1.4.2 Beam Quality...........................................................................................................................................16
1.4.3 Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current .........................................................................................16
1.4.4 Maximum Deviation from Indicated Values......................................................................................16
1.4.5 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors.....................................................................................16
2 Functional Description ..........................................................................................................18

2.1 Computer..........................................................................................................................................................18
2.2 PCIe Communications Controller Board .....................................................................................................18
2.2.1 Connectors and Pin Assignments ........................................................................................................18
2.3 Distribution Board...........................................................................................................................................20
2.3.1 Power ....................................................................................................................................................20
MAN-03310 Revision 004 i

Table of Contents
2.3.2 Interface Connections ............................................................................................................................20

2.4 Motor Controller Board ..................................................................................................................................21
2.4.1 Power ....................................................................................................................................................22
2.5 TZ Control Board (A Only) ............................................................................................................................23
2.5.1 Service Switches......................................................................................................................................23
2.5.2 Power ....................................................................................................................................................24
Power Supply Cable DIN Rail Connections ..........................................................................................26
Wiring Harness to Power Supply Connections 1 to 6 ..........................................................................26
Wiring Harness to Power Supply Connections 7 to 9 ..........................................................................26
Indicators ....................................................................................................................................................28
Jumpers .......................................................................................................................................................29
2.6 Control Panel Controller Board.....................................................................................................................29
2.6.1 Power ....................................................................................................................................................30
2.7 C-arm Interface Board ....................................................................................................................................32
2.7.1 Continuity Daisy Chain.........................................................................................................................33
2.7.2 Power ....................................................................................................................................................33
2.7.4 X-ray Source Assembly..........................................................................................................................35
2.7.5 Interface ...................................................................................................................................................35
C-arm Connectors......................................................................................................................................36
2.8 X-ray Source Assembly...................................................................................................................................38
2.9 Data Acquisition System (C/Ci and W/Wi) ................................................................................................38
2.9.1 Solid State Detector ................................................................................................................................38
2.9.2 Integrator/Multiplexor Subsection.......................................................................................................38
2.9.3 ADC Board Power..................................................................................................................................39
2.9.4 Analog To Digital Subsection ...............................................................................................................39
2.9.5 Detector Assembly Power.....................................................................................................................39
2.10 Data Acquisition System (A Model only) ....................................................................................................41
2.10.1 Solid State Detector .............................................................................................................................41
2.10.2 Power ....................................................................................................................................................41
2.11 Integrator/Multiplexor Board ........................................................................................................................42
2.11.1 Power ....................................................................................................................................................43
2.11.2 Interface Connections ..........................................................................................................................43
ii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
2.12 Analog To Digital Board (A Model Only) ...................................................................................................45

2.12.1 Interface Connections ..........................................................................................................................45
2.13 Toroid Power Module and DIN Rail ............................................................................................................46
2.14 Filter Drum Assembly ....................................................................................................................................47
3 System Installation .................................................................................................................48

3.1 Preparing for an Installation..........................................................................................................................48
3.1.1 Site Considerations.................................................................................................................................48
3.1.2 Tool Kit ....................................................................................................................................................48
3.1.3 Required Documentation ......................................................................................................................48
3.1.4 Minimum Room and Doorway Size....................................................................................................49
3.1.5 Arrange For Help ...................................................................................................................................56
3.2 Hardware Installation.....................................................................................................................................56
3.2.1 Inspect the System..................................................................................................................................56
Inspect for Shipping Damage ..................................................................................................................56
3.2.2 Uncrate the Unit .....................................................................................................................................57
3.2.3 Inspect for Hidden Shipping Damage.................................................................................................57
3.2.4 Take Inventory........................................................................................................................................57
3.2.5 Measure Path to Final Destination.......................................................................................................58
Short Doorway ...........................................................................................................................................58
Narrow Hallway ........................................................................................................................................58
3.2.6 Remove Tabletop (If Necessary) ..........................................................................................................58
3.2.7 Remove Horizon A Lower C-arm Assembly (If Necessary)............................................................59
3.2.8 Prepare the Horizon System for Moving (A, W, Wi) ........................................................................61
3.2.9 Move the Horizon System to Destination (All Models) ...................................................................61
Remove System from the Shipping Pallet..............................................................................................61
Stand System on Foot End to Move in a Narrow
Environment (A, W, Wi)...........................................................................................................................64
3.2.10 Set the System in Place ........................................................................................................................65
Set the System Down.................................................................................................................................65
Install the C-Arm Assembly.....................................................................................................................66
3.2.11 Level the Base Frame ...........................................................................................................................71
Level the System Left-to Right to 0.0 Degrees.......................................................................................71
Level Cross-Frame to 0 Degrees ..............................................................................................................71
3.2.12 Level the Table......................................................................................................................................72
Level the Table Left to Right to 0.0 Degrees ..........................................................................................72
Level Cross-Table to 0 Degrees................................................................................................................72
3.3 Horizon Toroid A/C Input Wiring................................................................................................................73
3.3.1 Check Power Line Voltage....................................................................................................................73
Power Requirements .................................................................................................................................73
MAN-03310 Revision 004 iii

Table of Contents
Measure Line Voltage ...............................................................................................................................73

3.3.2 Install A/C Input Power Connections .................................................................................................76
3.3.3 Install Power Connection Jumpers with InRush Limiter .................................................................77
3.4 Assemble the Horizon™ Control Desk.........................................................................................................86
3.4.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................86
3.4.2 Intended Audience.................................................................................................................................87
3.4.3 Preliminary Steps ...................................................................................................................................87
3.4.4 Hardware.................................................................................................................................................89
3.4.5 Assembly .................................................................................................................................................90
Base ..............................................................................................................................................................90
Monitor Shelf..............................................................................................................................................92
Rear Brace ...................................................................................................................................................93
Printer Shelf ................................................................................................................................................94
Attach Casters ............................................................................................................................................95
Insert the End Caps ...................................................................................................................................96
Attach Power Strip to Rear of Control Desk..........................................................................................96
Place Hardware and Dress Cables to Console ......................................................................................99
3.4.6 Input A/C Line Checks ........................................................................................................................100
3.5 System Alignment and Calibration ............................................................................................................102
3.5.1 Summary of Procedure........................................................................................................................102
3.5.2 Verify Table Alignments .....................................................................................................................102
Start APEX Software in Service Mode ..................................................................................................102
Check Table Alignment ..........................................................................................................................103
Perform C-arm Parallelism Adjustment (Horizon A Systems Only)...............................................106
3.5.3 Belt Tension ...........................................................................................................................................106
Check Belt Tension ..................................................................................................................................106
Adjust Belts (if necessary) ......................................................................................................................106
3.5.4 Motor Calibration .................................................................................................................................107
Determine the Calibration Sequence ....................................................................................................107
Perform the Calibration ..........................................................................................................................108
Calibrate TZ..............................................................................................................................................108
Calibrate AY (Horizon A, W).................................................................................................................110
Calibrate TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi) ............................................................................................113
Calibrate TX..............................................................................................................................................115
Calibrate AR (Horizon A).......................................................................................................................117
3.6 Perform Initial Leakage Survey...................................................................................................................122
3.7 Perform X-Ray Beam Alignment ................................................................................................................122
3.7.1 X-axis (Side-to-Side) Beam Alignment Setup...................................................................................122
3.7.2 Perform Y-axis (Side-to-Side) Aperture Beam Alignment .............................................................127
3.7.3 Perform Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment.....................................................................................128
iv MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
3.7.4 Perform X-axis (Front-to-Back) X-ray Beam Alignment.................................................................130

Check Detector Signal Levels.................................................................................................................130
Balance the Detectors ..............................................................................................................................132
3.7.5 Aperture Calibration............................................................................................................................134
Slope Value ...............................................................................................................................................135
Turn off the Table and Restart ...............................................................................................................137
3.8 Check HVPS/S (Tank) For Radiation Leakage ..........................................................................................137
3.8.1 Principles ...............................................................................................................................................138
3.8.2 Perform the Leakage Test Procedure ................................................................................................138
3.8.3 Check Laser Positioning Offset Using the Spine Phantom ............................................................138
3.8.4 Re-check the Laser Position ................................................................................................................141
3.8.5 A/D Gain Control Adjustment ...........................................................................................................141
3.8.6 Verify and Adjust the A/D Gain.........................................................................................................141
3.9 Detector Flattening........................................................................................................................................142
3.10 Perform Lateral Alignment and Flatness Test (Horizon A)....................................................................144
3.11 Perform Field Service Calibrations .............................................................................................................157
3.11.1 Summary of Field Service Calibrations Procedure........................................................................157
3.11.2 Check Phantom Values......................................................................................................................158
3.11.3 Perform BCA Calibration Scans and Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (A, W and Wi) ....158
3.11.4 Scan Thickness Measurement and Calibration
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................159
3.11.5 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A) ...........................................................................160
DXA Quality Control Phantom Procedure ..........................................................................................160
3.11.6 Calibration of Area and BMC for Array Scan Modes ...................................................................162
3.11.7 Calibration (Area, BMD, and BMC) with ACF and BCF Correction Factors ............................162
3.11.8 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database.........................................................163
3.12 Install Software Options ...............................................................................................................................164
3.13 Test Scan Modes ............................................................................................................................................164
3.14 Performing the IVA Scan QC Procedure ...................................................................................................164
3.15 Finish Assembling Unit ................................................................................................................................165
3.16 Measure X-ray Dose To Patient...................................................................................................................165
3.17 Measure X-Ray Scatter From Phantom ......................................................................................................166
3.18 Perform QC ....................................................................................................................................................166
3.18.1 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA) ................................................................166
3.18.2 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis .............................................................................166
3.19 Complete the Radiation Measurement Report .........................................................................................167
3.20 Perform a System Backup of the Installed Calibrated System ...............................................................167
MAN-03310 Revision 004 v

Table of Contents
3.21 Perform Fan-Beam Cross Calibration if Required....................................................................................168

3.21.1 Application..........................................................................................................................................168
3.21.2 Cross-Calibration Overview .............................................................................................................168
Cross-Calibration Process.......................................................................................................................168
Before Performing the Procedure..........................................................................................................168
Cross-Calibration Calculator .................................................................................................................168
3.21.3 Steps Required When an Old System is Being Replaced .............................................................169
Preliminary Steps for System Replacement.........................................................................................169
Determine BMC, BMD, AND AREA Gold Standard System Averages..........................................169
Verify Correct System Operation ..........................................................................................................170
3.21.4 Cross Calibrate New or Additional System ...................................................................................173
Installation of the System being Cross-Calibrated..............................................................................173
Scan the Gold Standard Phantom .........................................................................................................174
Determine if a Recalibration is Required .............................................................................................178
Calibrate System to Gold Standard Phantom Averages....................................................................178
Recalibrate New System With Gold Standard Spine Phantom ........................................................183
Determine New Spine Phantom Values...............................................................................................187
Reset System Values For Monitoring And Future Calibrations .......................................................190
Reset Field Service Application for Future Calibrations ...................................................................192
3.21.5 System Backup of Cross-Calibrated System...................................................................................194
3.21.6 Print Reports of Scans ........................................................................................................................194
3.21.7 Typical Cross-Calibration Calculator Output ................................................................................196
3.22 Complete Installation Report.......................................................................................................................197
3.22.1 Sample Install Reports .......................................................................................................................197
4 Corrective Service Procedures ............................................................................................198

4.1 PC Re-image or Replacement ......................................................................................................................198
4.1.1 Summary of Re-image or Replacement Procedure .........................................................................198
4.1.2 Additional Considerations Prior to PC Re-Image or Replacement ..............................................199
4.1.3 Checklist to Replace DXA CPU before Software Upgrade or Reload ..........................................199
4.1.4 System Backup......................................................................................................................................204
4.1.5 Restoring Windows® 7 (ASY-08135).................................................................................................204
Boot PC with ASY-Image Disk ..............................................................................................................205
Start Disk Restore ....................................................................................................................................205
Set Up Windows ......................................................................................................................................205
Re-Install Applications ...........................................................................................................................205
4.1.6 Install Replacement PC Assembly and Configure the Network ...................................................206
PC Replacement .......................................................................................................................................206
4.2 Network Configuration ................................................................................................................................213
4.2.1 DICOM Configuration and Testing...................................................................................................213
DICOM Configuration............................................................................................................................213
vi MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
DICOM Host Configuration ..................................................................................................................213

Worklist Provider Configuration ..........................................................................................................214
DICOM Store (Send) Configuration .....................................................................................................215
DICOM Query Retrieve Configuration................................................................................................216
IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuration.......................................................................................217
DICOM Testing........................................................................................................................................218
Local Test Network and PACS Setup ...................................................................................................219
Worklist Provider Test............................................................................................................................220
4.3 FRU Remove and Replace Procedures.......................................................................................................226
4.3.1 Recommended Tools............................................................................................................................226
4.3.2 Electronics Tray FRUs..........................................................................................................................226
4.3.3 Electronics Tray Printed Circuit Boards............................................................................................226
4.3.4 C-arm Y Belt ..........................................................................................................................................228
4.3.5 C-arm Y Motor or Gear Case ..............................................................................................................229
4.3.6 C-arm Y Encoder ..................................................................................................................................229
4.3.7 Table Y FRUs (A, W and Wi Only) ....................................................................................................230
4.3.8 Control Panel (All models) .................................................................................................................230
4.3.9 PCBs Under Right-Side of the Table..................................................................................................231
4.3.10 Table Y Belt..........................................................................................................................................231
4.3.11 Table Y Motor or Gearcase................................................................................................................232
4.3.12 Table Y Encoder..................................................................................................................................232
4.3.13 Table X FRUs.......................................................................................................................................233
Table X Motor Controller PCB...............................................................................................................233
Table X Belt...............................................................................................................................................233
Table X Motor or Gearcase .....................................................................................................................234
Table X Encoder .......................................................................................................................................234
4.3.14 Table Z FRUs (Horizon A Only) ......................................................................................................235
TZ Pedestal ...............................................................................................................................................236
4.3.15 Linear Rotary String Encoder ...........................................................................................................237
Installation ................................................................................................................................................237
Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................................238
4.3.16 Lower C-arm FRUs ............................................................................................................................239
X-ray Source Assembly...........................................................................................................................240
Filter Drum/Aperture Removal and Replacement .............................................................................242
Filter Drum Control Board .....................................................................................................................243
Filter Drum Removal ..............................................................................................................................243
4.3.17 Single-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly
(Ci and Wi Systems) ..............................................................................................................247
Aperture Removal ...................................................................................................................................247
Aperture Replacement ............................................................................................................................247
4.3.18 Multi-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly
MAN-03310 Revision 004 vii

Table of Contents
(C, W and A Systems) ...........................................................................................................249

Position the Table and Remove Screws................................................................................................249
Disassembling the Aperture ..................................................................................................................250
Align the Segments..................................................................................................................................255
Installing a Replacement Aperture Assembly.....................................................................................256
4.3.19 Serial Numbers and Date of Manufacture......................................................................................258
Label Placement .......................................................................................................................................259
4.4 Upper C-arm FRUs .......................................................................................................................................259
4.4.1 Horizon A Detector Assembly Removal and Replacement ...........................................................259
Remove Covers ........................................................................................................................................260
Remove Cables.........................................................................................................................................263
Remove Detector Assembly ...................................................................................................................264
4.4.2 Remove and Replace the Laser Assembly ........................................................................................266
Access the Laser Assembly ....................................................................................................................266
Remove the Laser Assembly ..................................................................................................................267
Laser Assembly Installation ...................................................................................................................268
Mount Covers...........................................................................................................................................272
Adjustments after Installation ...............................................................................................................272
4.4.3 Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi Detector Assembly Replacement and Removal ........................................272
Removal ....................................................................................................................................................272
Installation ................................................................................................................................................273
Adjustments after Installation ...............................................................................................................273
4.4.4 Laser Assembly.....................................................................................................................................273
4.4.5 Analog to Digital Converter Board (A Model only)........................................................................274
4.4.6 Replacing EMI Cables..........................................................................................................................274
4.5 FRU Lists.........................................................................................................................................................275
5 Alignments and Calibrations After FRU Replacement or System Repair.................281

5.1 Determining Alignment and Calibration Requirements.........................................................................281
6 Calibrations after HVPS Assembly Replacement ..........................................................282

6.1.3 Perform Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment.....................................................................................287
6.1.4 Perform X-axis (Front-to-Back) X-ray Beam Alignment.................................................................289
Slope Value ...............................................................................................................................................294
viii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
6.1.6 A/D Gain Control Adjustment ...........................................................................................................296

6.2.1 Principles ...............................................................................................................................................298
6.2.2 Perform the Leakage Test Procedure ................................................................................................298
6.2.3 Detector Flattening...............................................................................................................................298
6.3 Field Service Calibrations.............................................................................................................................300
6.3.1 Summary of Field Service Calibrations Procedure..........................................................................300
6.3.2 Check Phantom Values........................................................................................................................300
6.3.3 Perform BCA Calibration Scans and Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (A, W and Wi) ......301
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................302
6.3.5 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A) .............................................................................302
6.3.6 Calibration of Area and BMC for Array Scan Modes .....................................................................305
6.3.7 Calibration (Area, BMD, and BMC) with ACF and BCF Correction Factors ..............................305
6.3.8 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database...........................................................306
7 Calibrations after Detector Assembly or Laser Assembly Replacement ...................307

7.1.3 Check Laser Positioning Offset ..........................................................................................................312
7.2 A/D Gain Control Adjustment ....................................................................................................................313
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................318
7.5 Test Scan Modes ............................................................................................................................................323
MAN-03310 Revision 004 ix

Table of Contents

7.10 Perform QC ....................................................................................................................................................325
7.10.1 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA) ................................................................325
7.10.2 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis .............................................................................325
8 Calibrations after Aperture Assembly Replacement .....................................................326

8.1 Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................326
Slope Value ...............................................................................................................................................327
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................333
8.4 Test Scan Modes ............................................................................................................................................338
8.9 Perform QC ....................................................................................................................................................340
8.9.1 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA) ..................................................................340
8.9.2 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis ...............................................................................340
x MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
8.12 Calibrations after Filter Drum Assembly Replacement...........................................................................341

8.13 Filter Drum Assembly Calibration .............................................................................................................341
8.14.1 X-axis (Side-to-Side) Beam Alignment Setup.................................................................................347
8.14.2 Perform Y-axis (Side-to-Side) Aperture Beam Alignment ...........................................................352
8.14.3 Perform Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment...................................................................................353
8.14.4 Perform X-axis (Front-to-Back) X-ray Beam Alignment...............................................................355
8.14.5 Aperture Calibration..........................................................................................................................359
Slope Value ...............................................................................................................................................360
8.14.6 A/D Gain Control Adjustment .........................................................................................................362
8.14.7 Verify and Adjust the A/D Gain.......................................................................................................363
8.15.1 Principles .............................................................................................................................................364
8.15.2 Perform the Leakage Test Procedure ..............................................................................................364
8.15.3 Detector Flattening.............................................................................................................................364
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................368
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................375
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xi

Table of Contents
9 Calibrations after Motor Replacement .............................................................................380

9.0.1 Motor Calibration .................................................................................................................................380
Determine the Calibration Sequence ....................................................................................................380
Perform the Calibration ..........................................................................................................................380
Calibrate MOTOR$TZ.............................................................................................................................381
Calibrate MOTOR$AY (A, W) ...............................................................................................................383
Calibrate MOTOR$TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi)...........................................................................386
Calibrate MOTOR$TX.............................................................................................................................389
Calibrate MOTOR$AR (Horizon A) .....................................................................................................390
10 Calibrations after Table TZ Pedestals Replacement....................................................394

10.0.1 Tz Motor Calibration .........................................................................................................................394
10.1 Perform Lateral Alignment and Flatness Test (Horizon A)....................................................................395
(C/Ci and W/Wi) ....................................................................................................................413
11 Software Installation and Upgrades ...............................................................................418

11.1 Microsoft Word Installation.........................................................................................................................418
11.1.1 Introduction.........................................................................................................................................418
Procedure:.................................................................................................................................................418
Network Setup .........................................................................................................................................418
11.1.2 APEX Reporting Engine ....................................................................................................................418
Prerequisites .............................................................................................................................................419
Install APEX Reporting Engine V2013 .................................................................................................419
Activate APEX Reporting Engine V2013..............................................................................................420
Change Word Account Settings ............................................................................................................420
11.2 APEX Installation ..........................................................................................................................................422
xii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
11.2.1 Install APEX 5.6.0.x or Later .............................................................................................................422

Set the DXA PC Name ............................................................................................................................423
Installation of SQL Server 2012 Express Software ..............................................................................423
Install Printer Driver if Required ..........................................................................................................423
Configure the Connection to the Network. .........................................................................................423
Install MS Word 2013 if necessary. .......................................................................................................423
Installation of APEX 5.6 software..........................................................................................................423
Restore the Scan Files from The Removable Drive and System Recovery......................................426
Perform System Backup..........................................................................................................................427
Optional Hologic Connect and APEX Log Collector Installations...................................................427
11.3 Physician’s Viewer Installation ...................................................................................................................427
11.3.1 Preliminary Steps for Physician’s Viewer Installation..................................................................427
11.3.2 Physician’s Viewer Setup ..................................................................................................................428
11.3.3 DNS Server Setup...............................................................................................................................433
11.3.4 Running Hologic Connect with APEX software............................................................................436
11.3.5 Optional APEX Enable Remote Desktop on System.....................................................................437
11.4 Central DICOM Server Installation ............................................................................................................439
11.4.1 Preliminary Steps to Central DICOM Server Installation ............................................................439
11.4.2 Central DICOM Server Setup ...........................................................................................................440
11.5 Configure the CentralDICOMServer..........................................................................................................444
11.5.1 Procedure.............................................................................................................................................445
11.6 Hologic Connect Installation and Configuration .....................................................................................446
11.6.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................................................446
11.6.2 Hologic Connect Installation ............................................................................................................447
11.6.3 Hologic Connect Service Verification..............................................................................................448
11.6.4 Hologic Connect Configuration .......................................................................................................449
12 Software Tools — System Diagnostics ...........................................................................451

12.1 SD Global Tab ................................................................................................................................................451
12.2 SD C-arm Tab.................................................................................................................................................452
12.3 SD TZ Motor Tab...........................................................................................................................................457
12.4 SD AR, AY, TX and TY Motor Tabs............................................................................................................459
12.5 SD Detectors Tab for X-Ray Survey............................................................................................................464
12.5.1 Invoking X-ray Survey from APEX .................................................................................................465
12.5.2 The Utility Window ...........................................................................................................................465
12.5.3 The Main Display ...............................................................................................................................465
12.5.4 The Display Controls .........................................................................................................................467
Controls Starting with X-rays ................................................................................................................467
X-rays (F2) button OFF/ON....................................................................................................................467
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xiii

Table of Contents
Filter Wheel button OFF/ON .................................................................................................................467

HI/LO buttons ..........................................................................................................................................467
Bone/Air/Tissue Buttons.........................................................................................................................467
0/1/2/3 buttons..........................................................................................................................................468
0/1 buttons ................................................................................................................................................468
12.5.5 Label Information...............................................................................................................................468
12.5.6 Controls starting with Test Signals..................................................................................................468
Test Signal button OFF/ON....................................................................................................................468
Pulse 0/1/2/3..............................................................................................................................................468
Drum Half 0/1 ..........................................................................................................................................468
Hi Gain ......................................................................................................................................................468
Lo Gain ......................................................................................................................................................469
Aperture....................................................................................................................................................470
Average Voltage ......................................................................................................................................470
12.5.7 Controls starting with Display .........................................................................................................470
12.5.8 Display .................................................................................................................................................470
12.5.9 Scale ..................................................................................................................................................470
Segment.....................................................................................................................................................471
Zoom In and Zoom Out..........................................................................................................................471
Data Current Settings..............................................................................................................................471
Subtract Dark Current OFF/ON ............................................................................................................471
Controls starting with Status Bits..........................................................................................................471
Status Bits..................................................................................................................................................471
Reset...........................................................................................................................................................471
Select Detector..........................................................................................................................................471
Show Details.............................................................................................................................................472
12.6 SD D.A.S. Tab.................................................................................................................................................472
12.7 SD Panel Tab ..................................................................................................................................................475
12.8 SD State Machine Tab ...................................................................................................................................477
12.9 Emergency Motion ........................................................................................................................................479
13 Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................................................480

13.1 Customer Preventive Maintenance.............................................................................................................480
13.2 Field Service Preventive Maintenance .......................................................................................................480
13.2.1 Preventive Maintenance Summary..................................................................................................480
System Backup and QC ..........................................................................................................................480
Disk Cleanup............................................................................................................................................480
Cleaning and Mechanical Checks .........................................................................................................480
Adjust Motor Drive Belts........................................................................................................................481
Perform Alignment Checks....................................................................................................................481
Obtaining kV and mA Readings on Horizon C-arm PCB .................................................................482
Virus Check ..............................................................................................................................................485
xiv MAN-03310 Revision 004

Table of Contents
13.2.2 Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance..............................................................................................485
14 PCB Summary Information...............................................................................................488
15 Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................492
15.1 Hardware and Software Issues ...................................................................................................................492
15.1.1 Motion Errors......................................................................................................................................492
15.2 System Index Errors ......................................................................................................................................500
15.2.1 How to Read QDR Error Messages .................................................................................................500
Log File Example .....................................................................................................................................500
Index Error 32, 40, 42, 50, or 605 ............................................................................................................500
Index Error 184.........................................................................................................................................501
Index Error 194 or 195 .............................................................................................................................501
Index Error 201 or 202 .............................................................................................................................501
Index Error 204.........................................................................................................................................501
Index Error 215.........................................................................................................................................501
Index Error 218.........................................................................................................................................501
Index Error 258, 297 or 418.....................................................................................................................501
Index Error 260.........................................................................................................................................501
Index Error 272 Can be caused by:........................................................................................................501
Index Error 275.........................................................................................................................................502
Index Error 278 can be caused by..........................................................................................................502
Index Error 294.........................................................................................................................................502
Index Error 298.........................................................................................................................................502
Index Error 307 or 309 .............................................................................................................................502
Index Error 313 on Whole Body Scans .................................................................................................502
Error Code Index 318 during QC. X-ray Hi/lo Does Not Match Filter Drum Position.................502
Index Error Code 347 or Code 184 during Hip Scans ........................................................................503
Index Error 358.........................................................................................................................................504
Index Error 360 Motor Reversed during Stepping .............................................................................504
Index Error 365 or 367 during QC.........................................................................................................504
Index Error 368.........................................................................................................................................504
Index Error Code 309 or 371...................................................................................................................504
Index Error 373.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 389 Motor at Limit..............................................................................................................505
Index Error 413.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 472.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 548.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 557.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 585.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 587.........................................................................................................................................505
Index Error 599 No Motion Detected during Stepping......................................................................505
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xv

List of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1: Horizon C/Ci System.......................................................................................................................... 1
Figure 2: Horizon W/Wi System ....................................................................................................................... 2
Figure 3: Horizon A System............................................................................................................................... 2
Figure 4: Q Scan Plot........................................................................................................................................... 5
Figure 5: Horizon System Block Diagram ....................................................................................................... 6
Figure 6: Horizon Operator Console Block Diagram..................................................................................... 7
Figure 7: Horizon C-arm Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 9
Figure 8: Horizon Distribution and Motor Control Block Diagram .......................................................... 10
Figure 9: PCIe Communication Controller Board/Distribution Board Interconnection Diagram ........ 19
Figure 10: Distribution Board High Level Interconnection Diagram.......................................................... 21
Figure 11: Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Diagram ................................... 22
Figure 12: Distribution Board/TZ Control Board Interconnection Diagram ............................................. 24
Figure 13: Control Panel Controller Interconnection Diagram .................................................................... 30
Figure 14: Distribution Board/C-arm Interface Board Interconnection Diagram...................................... 33
Figure 15: C-arm Interface Board High Level Interconnection Diagram.................................................... 35
Figure 16: C-arm Interface Board/X-ray Controller Assembly Interconnection Diagram........................ 36
Figure 17: C-arm Interface Board/ Detector Assembly Interconnection Diagram .................................... 40
Figure 18: Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Subsection
Interconnection Diagram................................................................................................................. 43
Figure 19: C-arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board Interconnection Diagram .............. 45
Figure 20: Horizon A Space Requirements ..................................................................................................... 49
Figure 21: Horizon A Space Requirements for an External Console........................................................... 50
Figure 22: Horizon C, Ci Space Requirements................................................................................................ 51
Figure 23: Horizon W, Wi Space Requirements ............................................................................................. 52
Figure 24: Horizon A Dimensions and Clearances ........................................................................................ 53
Figure 25: Horizon C, Ci Dimensions and Clearances .................................................................................. 54
Figure 26: Horizon W, Wi Dimensions and Clearances ................................................................................ 55
Figure 27: Crated Unit (Horizon A).................................................................................................................. 56
Figure 28: Crated Unit (Horizon C, Ci, W, and Wi) ....................................................................................... 57
Figure 29: Table X Drive..................................................................................................................................... 59
Figure 30: Shipping Bracket Location (Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi) ..................................................................... 60
Figure 31: Shipping Bracket Location (Horizon A) ........................................................................................ 60
Figure 32: Table End Stop (Horizon A, W, Wi)............................................................................................... 61
Figure 33: Shipping Bracket............................................................................................................................... 62
Figure 34: Re-tighten Caster Bar Screws .......................................................................................................... 62
Figure 35: Off-load Ramps (as packed)............................................................................................................ 63
xvi MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 36: Ramps Installed at End of Skid....................................................................................................... 63

Figure 37: Caster Bars Installed......................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 38: Tipping Unit on End ........................................................................................................................ 65
Figure 39: Unit in Vertical Position................................................................................................................... 65
Figure 40: C-arm Counterweights (Removed)................................................................................................ 66
Figure 41: Lower C-arm Counterweights ........................................................................................................ 67
Figure 42: Lower C-arm Counterweights behind A/D Converter ............................................................... 67
Figure 43: Upper C-arm weights — Front View............................................................................................. 68
Figure 44: Upper C-arm Weights —Side View ............................................................................................... 68
Figure 45: Horizon A C-arm Rear Cover ......................................................................................................... 69
Figure 46: Upper C-arm Cables......................................................................................................................... 70
Figure 47: Hardware that Holds Upper C-arm to Lower C-arm ................................................................. 70
Figure 48: Level the System Left-to-Right ....................................................................................................... 71
Figure 49: Level the System Front-to-Back ...................................................................................................... 72
Figure 50: Level the Table Left-to-Right .......................................................................................................... 72
Figure 51: Level the Table Front-to-Back ......................................................................................................... 73
Figure 52: Toroid Mounting Location .............................................................................................................. 74
Figure 53: Horizon A DIN Rail.......................................................................................................................... 74
Figure 54: Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi DIN Rail....................................................................................................... 75
Figure 55: Nylon Nuts ........................................................................................................................................ 76
Figure 56: Main Power Wiring Configuration ................................................................................................ 77
Figure 57: Strain Relief Panel............................................................................................................................. 78
Figure 58: Isolation Transformer Input Taps .................................................................................................. 80
Figure 59: Horizon C/Ci and W/Wi DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram ................................... 82
Figure 60: Horizon A DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram ........................................................... 83
Figure 61: PCIe ComCon.................................................................................................................................... 84
Figure 62: Umbilical Distribution Board Adapter.......................................................................................... 84
Figure 63: Umbilical Cable Connector ............................................................................................................. 84
Figure 64: Umbilical Cable Connector with Old Connector ........................................................................ 85
Figure 65: Umbilical Distribution Board Adapter Orientation and Umbilical Cable Routing ................ 85
Figure 66: Misaligned Umbilical Adapter on Signal Distribution Board ................................................... 86
Figure 67: Open Packaging ................................................................................................................................ 87
Figure 68: Arrange Components....................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 69: Mounting Screws .............................................................................................................................. 88
Figure 70: Horizon Control Desk Components .............................................................................................. 89
Figure 71: Base ..................................................................................................................................................... 91
Figure 72: Attaching the Base to the Left Frame............................................................................................. 91
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xvii

List of Figures
Figure 73: Attaching the Base to the Right Frame .......................................................................................... 92

Figure 74: Monitor Shelf..................................................................................................................................... 92
Figure 75: Monitor Shelf..................................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 76: Shelf Supports ................................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 77: Rear Brace .......................................................................................................................................... 94
Figure 78: Alignment Bolts ................................................................................................................................ 94
Figure 79: Printer Shelf ....................................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 80: Attach Casters ................................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 81: End Caps ............................................................................................................................................ 96
Figure 82: End Caps Installed............................................................................................................................ 96
Figure 83: Removing Plugs from the Power Strip.......................................................................................... 97
Figure 84: Power Strip ........................................................................................................................................ 97
Figure 85: Attaching Pan Screws ...................................................................................................................... 98
Figure 86: Plug in Printer and Monitor............................................................................................................ 98
Figure 87: Assembled Console .......................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 88: Wrap Cables ...................................................................................................................................... 99
Figure 89: Tie Communications Cables ......................................................................................................... 100
Figure 90: Input AC Power Checks Checks .................................................................................................. 101
Figure 91: Exit the Software ............................................................................................................................. 103
Figure 92: Table Alignment ............................................................................................................................. 104
Figure 93: Pedestal ............................................................................................................................................ 105
Figure 95: Click Cancel at Left Mechanical Stop .......................................................................................... 110
Figure 96: Calibrate ........................................................................................................................................... 111
Figure 97: Click OK at Right Mechanical Stop.............................................................................................. 111
Figure 98: AY Motor Calibration Scan ........................................................................................................... 112
Figure 99: Click Cancel when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop .................................................. 113
Figure 101: Click OK when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop ........................................................ 114
Figure 102: Right Mechanical Stop ................................................................................................................... 114
Figure 103: TY Calibration Plot ......................................................................................................................... 115
Figure 104: Motor$TX Calibration .................................................................................................................... 115
Figure 105: Move C-arm to 0 Degrees .............................................................................................................. 116
Figure 106: Outer Mechanical Limit ................................................................................................................. 116
Figure 107: TX Calibration Plot ......................................................................................................................... 117
Figure 108: Level Placement on X-ray Source Assembly .............................................................................. 118
Figure 109: AR Motor AP Mechanical Limit ................................................................................................... 118
Figure 110: Remove AR Motor Cover .............................................................................................................. 119
xviii MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 111: Table IN/OUT.................................................................................................................................. 119

Figure 112: Level the C-arm to 83°.................................................................................................................... 120
Figure 113: AR Calibration Parameter Display .............................................................................................. 121
Figure 114: X-ray Survey.................................................................................................................................... 123
Figure 115: X-Ray Survey Screen (X-rays OFF) .............................................................................................. 124
Figure 116: X-ray Survey Screen (X-rays ON)................................................................................................. 124
Figure 117: Remove Top Cover of C-arm ........................................................................................................ 125
Figure 118: Insert the X-ray Beam Alignment Tool........................................................................................ 125
Figure 119: Check Voltage Output ................................................................................................................... 126
Figure 120: Raise the Table ................................................................................................................................ 126
Figure 121: Pin and Block................................................................................................................................... 127
Figure 122: Pin Inserted in Block ...................................................................................................................... 127
Figure 123: Shuttle Assembly Shoulder Screws.............................................................................................. 128
Figure 124: Sled Adjustment Screws ................................................................................................................ 129
Figure 125: Filter Drum Assembly Left to Right Adjustment ...................................................................... 129
Figure 126: Voltage Amplitude on Device Control Screen ........................................................................... 130
Figure 127: Details Detector 44.......................................................................................................................... 131
Figure 128: Details Detector 171........................................................................................................................ 132
Figure 129: Detector Assembly Screw Locations............................................................................................ 133
Figure 130: Detector Assembly Board .............................................................................................................. 133
Figure 131: Select Calibrate Aperture............................................................................................................... 134
Figure 132: Aperture Calibration Screen ......................................................................................................... 135
Figure 133: Aperture Calibration Plot .............................................................................................................. 136
Figure 134: Aperture Calibration Peaks........................................................................................................... 136
Figure 135: Aperture Calibration Data............................................................................................................. 137
Figure 136: Leakage Test Shield (TLS-02693) .................................................................................................. 138
Figure 137: Leading Edge of L4 in the Scan Image Window ........................................................................ 139
Figure 138: Start Position ................................................................................................................................... 140
Figure 139: Repositioning .................................................................................................................................. 140
Figure 140: Horizon W Beam Alignment and A/D Gain............................................................................... 142
Figure 141: Correct Flattening Position............................................................................................................ 143
Figure 142: Flattening –Basic First .................................................................................................................... 143
Figure 143: Select Perform Exam ...................................................................................................................... 144
Figure 144: New Patient ..................................................................................................................................... 144
Figure 145: Patient Window .............................................................................................................................. 144
Figure 146: Patient Confirmation Window ..................................................................................................... 145
Figure 147: Select AP/Lateral............................................................................................................................. 145
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xix

List of Figures
Figure 148: Select Array (a)................................................................................................................................ 146

Figure 149: Select Fast Array (f) ........................................................................................................................ 146
Figure 150: Alignment Warning ....................................................................................................................... 146
Figure 151: Paper against Right Edges of Phantom ....................................................................................... 147
Figure 152: Scan Length ..................................................................................................................................... 147
Figure 153: Select Lumbar Spine ....................................................................................................................... 148
Figure 154: Global ROI Line Mode ................................................................................................................... 148
Figure 155: Global ROI Whole Mode ............................................................................................................... 149
Figure 156: Global ROI Toolbox........................................................................................................................ 149
Figure 157: Move Top Line of Global ROI to Vertebral Space ..................................................................... 150
Figure 158: Select Whole Mode ......................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 159: Bone Map ......................................................................................................................................... 151
Figure 160: Bone Map Vertebral Lines ........................................................................................................... 151
Figure 161: Bone Map Results........................................................................................................................... 152
Figure 162: Bone Map Start Position ................................................................................................................ 152
Figure 163: Paper Guides ................................................................................................................................... 153
Figure 164: Lateral Enable Switch..................................................................................................................... 153
Figure 165: Analyze Scan ................................................................................................................................... 154
Figure 166: Supine Lateral Analysis Method .................................................................................................. 154
Figure 167: Analysis Method............................................................................................................................. 155
Figure 168: Line Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 155
Figure 169: Whole Mode .................................................................................................................................... 156
Figure 170: Set the Height of the Table Top .................................................................................................... 157
Figure 171: Field Service Calibration Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 158
Figure 172: Bone Map Start Position ............................................................................................................... 161
Figure 173: Cross-Calibration Calculator Section 1........................................................................................ 169
Figure 174: Gold Standard Phantom Label (Clear) ........................................................................................ 170
Figure 175: EVA Phantom Label (White)......................................................................................................... 170
Figure 176: Selecting Outliers ............................................................................................................................ 171
Figure 177: Removing Outliers from the Scan Information Popup Window............................................. 171
Figure 178: Quality Control Plot Parameters .................................................................................................. 172
Figure 180: Sample Results for Scan Averaging ............................................................................................. 174
Figure 181: Select a Patient................................................................................................................................. 174
Figure 182: Select AP Lumbar ........................................................................................................................... 175
Figure 183: Select Array as the Scan Type ....................................................................................................... 175
xx MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 185: Conditions Range Diagram........................................................................................................... 177

Figure 186: Select Field Service Calibration .................................................................................................... 178
Figure 187: Click Number .................................................................................................................................. 179
Figure 188: Phantom Values .............................................................................................................................. 179
Figure 189: Confirm Changes ............................................................................................................................ 180
Figure 191: Phantom Information..................................................................................................................... 181
Figure 192: Area within Limits.......................................................................................................................... 181
Figure 193: Write ................................................................................................................................................. 182
Figure 194: Arrc File Location ........................................................................................................................... 182
Figure 195: Arrc File Details .............................................................................................................................. 183
Figure 196: Field Service Calibration ACF/BCF Button................................................................................. 183
Figure 197: Write Button .................................................................................................................................... 184
Figure 198: Successful Calculation of ACF and BCF...................................................................................... 184
Figure 199: Arrc Updated................................................................................................................................... 185
Figure 200: Scan Selection for Averaging ........................................................................................................ 186
Figure 201: Scan Averaging Results ................................................................................................................. 186
Figure 202: Select Scan Averaging .................................................................................................................... 188
Figure 203: Scan Averages ................................................................................................................................. 188
Figure 205: Utilities Service Log........................................................................................................................ 190
Figure 206: Setup Plot ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Figure 207: Scan Selection .................................................................................................................................. 191
Figure 208: Select Quality Control Scans ......................................................................................................... 191
Figure 209: Select Number ................................................................................................................................. 192
Figure 210: Area and BMC Values ................................................................................................................... 192
Figure 211: Click Write ....................................................................................................................................... 193
Figure 212: Sample Results from Arrc.txt........................................................................................................ 194
Figure 213: Typical Cross-Calibration Calculator Output ............................................................................ 196
Figure 214: Scan Averaging Report .................................................................................................................. 197
Figure 215: DX Report Tab................................................................................................................................. 206
Figure 216: Click Backup/Recover .................................................................................................................... 207
Figure 217: DXReport Backup Reporting Information .................................................................................. 208
Figure 218: InstallShield Wizard ...................................................................................................................... 209
Figure 219: Welcome Screen .............................................................................................................................. 210
Figure 220: License Agreement Screen ............................................................................................................ 210
Figure 221: Select Horizon Systems.................................................................................................................. 210
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxi

List of Figures
Figure 222: Select Horizon Machine Type ...................................................................................................... 211

Figure 223: Serial Number ................................................................................................................................. 211
Figure 224: Restart Computer............................................................................................................................ 211
Figure 225: About APEX .................................................................................................................................... 212
Figure 226: DICOM Configuration .................................................................................................................. 214
Figure 227: Worklist Provider ........................................................................................................................... 215
Figure 228: Deselect Unicode Checkbox .......................................................................................................... 216
Figure 229: DICOM Query/Retrieve Destinations.......................................................................................... 217
Figure 230: IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuration.............................................................................. 218
Figure 231: Known DICOM Providers............................................................................................................. 220
Figure 232: Select a Patient for this Exam ........................................................................................................ 221
Figure 233: Select Scan Type.............................................................................................................................. 222
Figure 234: Archive Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 222
Figure 235: Patient Configuration..................................................................................................................... 223
Figure 236: Select Scans ...................................................................................................................................... 224
Figure 237: Electronic Tray FRUs* .................................................................................................................... 227
Figure 238: Horizon A Electronics Tray FRUs (Right Rear) ......................................................................... 228
Figure 239: Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi Electronics Tray FRUs (Left Rear) ......................................................... 228
Figure 240: Table Y FRUs ................................................................................................................................... 230
Figure 241: Foot End Table Y FRUs .................................................................................................................. 231
Figure 242: Table X FRUs ................................................................................................................................... 233
Figure 243: Table Z FRU (for Horizon A only) ............................................................................................... 235
Figure 244: Installing the Rotary String Encoder............................................................................................ 236
Figure 245: Lower C-Arm FRUs (010-0575 tank shown) ............................................................................... 240
Figure 246: X-ray Source Assembly (Top View)............................................................................................. 241
Figure 247: Filter Drum Assembly.................................................................................................................... 241
Figure 248: Power Off ......................................................................................................................................... 243
Figure 249: C-arm Screws Horizon Service Manual ...................................................................................... 244
Figure 250: Remove Top Cover......................................................................................................................... 244
Figure 251: Lead Shield ...................................................................................................................................... 245
Figure 252: Removing Connectors.................................................................................................................... 245
Figure 253: Filter Drum Assembly Screws ...................................................................................................... 246
Figure 254: Filter Drum Assembly Removed.................................................................................................. 246
Figure 255: ASY-07159 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly Top View............................................................ 247
Figure 256: Aperture Offset ............................................................................................................................... 248
Figure 257: ASY-07116 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly Top View............................................................ 249
Figure 258: Circuit Breaker ................................................................................................................................ 250
xxii MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 259: Aperture Motor Jumper, J12 ........................................................................................................ 250

Figure 260: Aperture Position Connection, J2 ................................................................................................ 251
Figure 261: Aperture Motor Shaft Screws ....................................................................................................... 252
Figure 262: Aperture Assembly Screws ........................................................................................................... 253
Figure 263: Loosen all Clamps and Connectors.............................................................................................. 253
Figure 264: Lift the Plate Off.............................................................................................................................. 254
Figure 265: Set the Plate in a Safe Area ............................................................................................................ 254
Figure 266: Alignment Tool Placement............................................................................................................ 255
Figure 267: Marking Segment............................................................................................................................ 255
Figure 268: Drum Alignment Tool Placement for Installation ..................................................................... 256
Figure 269: Install Inner Segment ..................................................................................................................... 257
Figure 270: Install Outer Segment .................................................................................................................... 257
Figure 271: Filter Drum Assembly Base Plate Serial Number Location...................................................... 258
Figure 272: Single-Slot Label ............................................................................................................................. 258
Figure 273: Multi-Slot Label............................................................................................................................... 259
Figure 274: Remove Screws on Either Side of Detector Cover/Shield......................................................... 260
Figure 275: Remove Weight............................................................................................................................... 260
Figure 276: Remove the Detector Cover .......................................................................................................... 261
Figure 277: Detector Assembly (Upper C-arm Top Cover Removed) ........................................................ 262
Figure 278: Remove Upper C-arm Back Cover............................................................................................... 263
Figure 279: Detector Cables ............................................................................................................................... 263
Figure 280: Cable to AD Converter .................................................................................................................. 264
Figure 281: Mark the Edges of the Detector Assembly.................................................................................. 264
Figure 282: Loosen Detector Screws ................................................................................................................. 265
Figure 283: Use Pliers to Hold and Remove Screws from Detector............................................................. 265
Figure 284: Slide and Lift Detector Assembly................................................................................................. 266
Figure 285: Place the Detector Assembly Upside-down ............................................................................... 266
Figure 286: Remove Screws from the Detector Mounting Base Plate ......................................................... 267
Figure 287: Laser Assembly on Back of Cover................................................................................................ 267
Figure 288: Laser Assembly Adjustment Screws............................................................................................ 268
Figure 289: Laser Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 268
Figure 290: Position Base Plate over Laser Assembly.................................................................................... 269
Figure 291: Hand-tighten Laser Assembly Screws......................................................................................... 269
Figure 292: Align the Laser Detector Base Plate to the Detector Cover ...................................................... 270
Figure 293: Tighten Detector Base Plate Screws ............................................................................................. 270
Figure 294: Place the Detector Assembly in C-arm ........................................................................................ 271
Figure 295: Slide Detector Assembly Forward in C-arm............................................................................... 271
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxiii

List of Figures
Figure 296: Use Needle-nose Pliers to Start Screws ....................................................................................... 272

Figure 297: Laser Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 273
Figure 298: Rear C-arm FRUs ............................................................................................................................ 274
Figure 299: The EMI Compliance Cable .......................................................................................................... 275
xxiv MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures

Figure 351: Filter Drum Controller Board ....................................................................................................... 342
Figure 352: Drum Home Position ..................................................................................................................... 343
Figure 353: Alignment Tool Placement............................................................................................................ 344
Figure 354: Alignment Key ................................................................................................................................ 344
Figure 355: Key Placement................................................................................................................................. 345
Figure 356: LED Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 346
Figure 357: Home Position................................................................................................................................. 347
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxv

List of Figures

Figure 389: Remove AR Motor Cover .............................................................................................................. 383
Figure 390: Click Cancel at Left Mechanical Stop .......................................................................................... 383
Figure 392: Click OK at Right Mechanical Stop.............................................................................................. 384
Figure 393: AY Motor Calibration Scan ........................................................................................................... 385
Figure 394: Click Cancel when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop .................................................. 387
Figure 396: Click OK when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop ........................................................ 387
Figure 397: Right Mechanical Stop ................................................................................................................... 387
Figure 398: TY Calibration Plot ......................................................................................................................... 388
Figure 399: Motor$TX Calibration .................................................................................................................... 389
Figure 400: Outer Mechanical Limit ................................................................................................................. 389
Figure 401: TX Calibration Plot ......................................................................................................................... 390
Figure 402: Level Placement on X-ray Source Assembly .............................................................................. 391
Figure 403: AR Motor AP Mechanical Limit ................................................................................................... 391
Figure 404: Table IN/OUT.................................................................................................................................. 392
Figure 405: Level the C-arm to 83°.................................................................................................................... 392
Figure 406: AR Calibration Parameter Display .............................................................................................. 393
Figure 408: Select Perform Exam ...................................................................................................................... 395
xxvi MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 409: New Patient ..................................................................................................................................... 396

Figure 410: Patient Window .............................................................................................................................. 396
Figure 411: Patient Confirmation Window ..................................................................................................... 397
Figure 412: Select AP/Lateral............................................................................................................................. 397
Figure 413: Select Array (a)................................................................................................................................ 398
Figure 414: Select Fast Array (f) ........................................................................................................................ 398
Figure 415: Alignment Warning ....................................................................................................................... 398
Figure 416: Paper against Right Edges of Phantom ....................................................................................... 399
Figure 417: Scan Length ..................................................................................................................................... 399
Figure 418: Select Lumbar Spine ....................................................................................................................... 400
Figure 419: Global ROI Line Mode ................................................................................................................... 400
Figure 420: Global ROI Whole Mode ............................................................................................................... 401
Figure 421: Global ROI Toolbox........................................................................................................................ 401
Figure 422: Move Top Line of Global ROI to Vertebral Space ..................................................................... 402
Figure 423: Select Whole Mode ......................................................................................................................... 402
Figure 424: Bone Map ......................................................................................................................................... 403
Figure 425: Bone Map Vertebral Lines ........................................................................................................... 403
Figure 426: Bone Map Results........................................................................................................................... 404
Figure 428: Paper Guides ................................................................................................................................... 405
Figure 429: Lateral Enable Switch..................................................................................................................... 405
Figure 430: Analyze Scan ................................................................................................................................... 406
Figure 431: Supine Lateral Analysis Method .................................................................................................. 406
Figure 432: Analysis Method............................................................................................................................. 407
Figure 433: Line Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 407
Figure 434: Whole Mode .................................................................................................................................... 408
Figure 435: Set the Height of the Table Top .................................................................................................... 409
Figure 440: Account Information ...................................................................................................................... 421
Figure 441: Remove Account............................................................................................................................. 421
Figure 442: User Account Control .................................................................................................................... 422
Figure 443: InstallShield Wizard....................................................................................................................... 424
Figure 444: Welcome Screen .............................................................................................................................. 424
Figure 445: License Agreement Screen ............................................................................................................ 424
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxvii

Figure 446: APEX MachineType ....................................................................................................................... 425

Figure 447: Select Horizon Machine Type ...................................................................................................... 425
Figure 448: Serial Number Screen..................................................................................................................... 425
Figure 449: InstallShield Wizard Complete..................................................................................................... 426
Figure 450: About APEX .................................................................................................................................... 426
Figure 451: Install Program as Other User ...................................................................................................... 428
Figure 452: Preparing for Install ....................................................................................................................... 429
Figure 453: Welcome to InstallShield ............................................................................................................... 429
Figure 454: License Approval............................................................................................................................ 430
Figure 455: Physician’s Viewer Configuration ............................................................................................... 430
Figure 456: Ready to Install Program ............................................................................................................... 431
Figure 457: Installing Hologic Physician’s Viewer......................................................................................... 431
Figure 458: InstallShield Wizard Completed .................................................................................................. 432
Figure 459: Install Program as Other User ...................................................................................................... 440
Figure 460: Preparing to Install ......................................................................................................................... 441
Figure 461: Hologic DICOM Server Installer Information............................................................................ 441
Figure 462: Hologic DICOM Server InstallShield Wizard ............................................................................ 442
Figure 463: Hologic DICOM Server License Agreement............................................................................... 442
Figure 464: Hologic DICOM Server Configuration........................................................................................ 443
Figure 465: Hologic DICOM Server Ready to Install the Program.............................................................. 443
Figure 466: Installing Hologic Central DICOM Server.................................................................................. 444
Figure 467: Hologic Central DICOM Server InstallShield Wizard Completed ......................................... 444
Figure 468: Browse to Physician’s Viewer....................................................................................................... 445
Figure 469: Hologic DICOM Server Configuration........................................................................................ 446
Figure 470: SD Global Tab.................................................................................................................................. 451
Figure 471: SD C-arm Tab .................................................................................................................................. 453
Figure 472: SD TZ Motor Tab ............................................................................................................................ 457
Figure 473: SD AR Motor Tab ........................................................................................................................... 460
Figure 474: APEX Ver 3.2 (or higher) System Diagnostics Window ........................................................... 465
Figure 475: Main Display Controls................................................................................................................... 466
Figure 476: X-ray Data as a Bar Graph............................................................................................................. 466
Figure 477: X-ray Data as a Raw Data.............................................................................................................. 467
Figure 478: Controls Starting with X-ray ......................................................................................................... 467
Figure 479: Controls starting with Test Signals .............................................................................................. 468
Figure 480: Controls starting with Display ..................................................................................................... 470
Figure 481: Controls starting with Status Bits................................................................................................. 471
Figure 482: Moving the Detector....................................................................................................................... 472
xxviii MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Figures
Figure 483: Show Details Window ................................................................................................................... 472

Figure 484: SD D.A.S. Tab .................................................................................................................................. 473
Figure 485: SD Panel Tab ................................................................................................................................... 476
Figure 486: SD State Machine Tab .................................................................................................................... 478
Figure 487: Board Test Points ............................................................................................................................ 482
Figure 488: Test Points........................................................................................................................................ 483
Figure 489: Example: 7.7V /0.05625 = 136.9 kVP ............................................................................................. 484
Figure 490: Example: 2.3V /0.75 = 3.06 mA...................................................................................................... 484
Figure 491: Guide Bearing and Rail (AY) ........................................................................................................ 485
Figure 492: Guide Bearing and Rail (TX) ......................................................................................................... 486
Figure 493: Sample from scanprot.log.............................................................................................................. 500
Figure 494: Close Program................................................................................................................................. 503
Figure 495: System Configuration Utility ........................................................................................................ 504
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxix

List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1: Horizon Models ....................................................................................................................................1
Table 2: Horizon Models ....................................................................................................................................3
Table 3: Horizon Scan Options ..........................................................................................................................3
Table 4: Pentium PC Components ....................................................................................................................7
Table 5: System Circuit Board Function .........................................................................................................10
Table 6: Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................12
Table 7: System Operating Parameters...........................................................................................................13
Table 8: System Dimensions ............................................................................................................................13
Table 9: Exam Mode Performance ..................................................................................................................13
Table 10: Duty Cycle ...........................................................................................................................................15
Table 11: X-ray Beam Filtration .........................................................................................................................16
Table 12: Typical Measured Values for Half Value Layer in a Horizon System........................................16
Table 14: Maximum Deviation ..........................................................................................................................16
Table 15: Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors .................................................................................17
Table 16: PCIe Communications Controller Board/Distribution Board Interconnection Descriptions..18
Table 17: Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Descriptions...............................23
Table 18: Motor Controller Board/Stepper Motor and Position Encoder Interconnection Descriptions23
Table 19: TZ Drive Service Switches.................................................................................................................23
Table 20: Distribution Board/TZ Control Board Interconnection Descriptions .........................................25
Table 21: Motor Power Input .............................................................................................................................25
Table 22: Power Supply Cable DIN Rail Connections ...................................................................................26
Table 23: 24VDC Output Power Supply Connections, 1 to 6........................................................................26
Table 24: 120VAC Input to Power Supply Connections, 7 to 9.....................................................................26
Table 25: Right Position Potentiometer J9........................................................................................................26
Table 26: Left Position Potentiometer J7 ..........................................................................................................27
Table 27: Right Column Motor J5......................................................................................................................27
Table 28: Left Column Motor J3 ........................................................................................................................28
Table 29: Tz Drive Board LED Indicators ........................................................................................................28
Table 30: Jumpers ................................................................................................................................................29
Table 31: Distribution Board/Control Panel Controller Interconnection Descriptions .............................31
Table 32: Control Panel Controller/Control Panel Interconnection Descriptions ......................................31
Table 33: Distribution Board/C-arm Interface Board Interconnections.......................................................34
Table 34: C-arm Board Connectors ...................................................................................................................36
Table 35: C-arm Interface Board/ Detector Assembly
Interconnection Descriptions ............................................................................................................40
Table 36: Integrator/Multiplexor Board/Solid State Detector Boards Interconnection Descriptions ......42
xxx MAN-03310 Revision 004

List of Tables
Table 37: Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Subsection

Interconnection Diagram ...................................................................................................................44
Table 38: C-arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board Interconnection.................................46
Table 39: Switches................................................................................................................................................47
Table 40: Jumpers ................................................................................................................................................47
Table 41: Room Size.............................................................................................................................................49
Table 42: System Weights ...................................................................................................................................56
Table 43: Installation Inventory Check List .....................................................................................................57
Table 44: Power Requirements for all Horizon Models.................................................................................73
Table 45: Wire Connections from Toroid power Supply Assembly ............................................................75
Table 46: Circuit Breaker and Power Cables ...................................................................................................77
Table 47: 240 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................78
Table 48: 230 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................78
Table 49: 220 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................79
Table 50: 200 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................79
Table 51: 120 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................79
Table 52: 100 VAC 50/60 Hz...............................................................................................................................79
Table 53: Horizon Control Desk Parts List ......................................................................................................90
Table 54: Calibration Procedures ....................................................................................................................107
Table 55: Motor Position Range Specifications and Resolution..................................................................108
Table 56: Fan Beam Systems ............................................................................................................................168
Table 57: Sample Results for Scan Averaging ...............................................................................................172
Table 58: Cross-Calibration Criteria................................................................................................................178
Table 59: Connectivity Survey Form...............................................................................................................203
Table 60: PACS Vendor and Outbound reporting to RIS or EMR Provider Information.......................203
Table 61: Direct Connect, Physician Viewer Station.....................................................................................204
Table 62: Local network Sample......................................................................................................................213
Table 63: DICOM Service or Linked Device ..................................................................................................219
Table 64: Recommended Tools ........................................................................................................................226
Table 65: Encoder Parts.....................................................................................................................................237
Table 66: Recommended Tools ........................................................................................................................242
Table 67: Table Adjustments for Filter Drum Access...................................................................................243
Table 68: Single-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly ................................................................................247
Table 69: Aperture Plate Replacement Kit .....................................................................................................247
Table 70: Multi-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly .................................................................................249
Table 71: Field Replacement Kit for the Horizon Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly................................249
Table 72: Serial Number and Date of Manufacture ......................................................................................259
Table 73: Data Entered in Label Date of Manufacture Field .......................................................................259
MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxxi

List of Tables
Table 74: Electronics Tray FRUs ......................................................................................................................275

Table 75: Table TY FRUS ..................................................................................................................................276
Table 76: Table TX FRUs...................................................................................................................................276
Table 77: Lower C-arm FRUs...........................................................................................................................277
Table 78: Upper C-arm FRUs ...........................................................................................................................278
Table 79: Computer and Isolation Module ....................................................................................................278
Table 80: Computer Internal Assemblies .......................................................................................................278
Table 81: Cables .................................................................................................................................................279
Table 82: Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................................279
Table 83: Mobile.................................................................................................................................................280
Table 84: Special Tools ......................................................................................................................................280
Table 85: Calibration Requirements for Parts Replacement........................................................................281
Table 86: Calibration Procedures ....................................................................................................................380
Table 87: Motor Position Range Specifications and Resolution..................................................................380
Table 90: Hologic Servers .................................................................................................................................446
Table 91: SD Global Tab Controls ...................................................................................................................452
Table 92: SD C-arm Tab Controls ....................................................................................................................453
Table 93: SD TZ Motor Tab Controls ..............................................................................................................457
Table 94: SD AR (AY, TX, TY) Motor Tab Controls......................................................................................460
Table 95: Hi Gain Values ..................................................................................................................................469
Table 96: X-ray Modes ......................................................................................................................................469
Table 97: SD D.A.S. Tab Controls....................................................................................................................473
Table 98: SD Panel Tab Controls .....................................................................................................................476
Table 99: SD State Machine Tab Controls ......................................................................................................478
Table 100: Grease for Bearings...........................................................................................................................487
Table 101: Distribution Board PCB-01057 ........................................................................................................488
Table 102: PCIe Communications Command Board Communications Controller PCB-01009 ...............488
Table 103: Stepper Motor Controller PCB-00930 ............................................................................................489
Table 104: TZ Drive (A Only) PCB-00916.........................................................................................................489
Table 105: 64-Channel Detector Array Assembly (Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi) PCB-00889 .............................489
Table 106: 128-Channel Detector Assembly (Horizon C and W) PCB-00875 .............................................490
Table 107: 216-Channel Detector Array Assembly (Horizon A) PCB-01143 ..............................................490
Table 108: ADC (Horizon A) PCB-00941..........................................................................................................490
Table 109: C-arm Interface PCB-00940..............................................................................................................491
xxxii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Introduction
1 Introduction
1.1 System Overview
1.1.1 Purpose
The Hologic Horizon™ X-ray Bone Densitometer estimates the bone mineral content (BMC) and bone
mineral density (BMD) of:
• selected areas of the body, or
• the entire skeleton.
It does so using X-rays of two different energy levels. This dual-energy scheme scans and estimates bone
by eliminating soft tissue within the selected area from the scan.
Table 1 Horizon Models
Model Figure
Horizon C/Ci Figure 1: Horizon C/Ci System on page 1
Horizon W/Wi Figure 2: Horizon W/Wi System on page 2
Horizon A Figure 3: Horizon A System on page 2
Note In this manual, Horizon refers to all models in the Horizon series. Information
that applies to only one model or group of models will be clearly identified.
Figure 1 Horizon C/Ci System
Horizon C and Ci Table moves

• in and out
Horizon C and Ci Arm moves
• left and right
MAN-03310 Revision 004 1

Introduction
Figure 2 Horizon W/Wi System
Horizon W and Wi models have a larger table with greater extension than the Horizon C and Ci.
Horizon W and Wi Table moves:
• in and out
• left and right
Horizon W and Wi, Arm moves:
• left and right
Figure 3 Horizon A System
Horizon A Table moves:

• in and out
• left and right
• up and down
Horizon A Arm:
• moves left and right
• rotates
2 MAN-03310 Revision 004

Introduction
Table 2 Horizon Models
Model Scan Sites Motors Detectors Aperture

Ci S, H, F, DL, IVA-i AY, TX 64 (4 mm) Fixed
Wi S, H, F, DL, WB, IVA-i AY, TX, TY 64 (4 mm) Fixed
C S, H, F, DL, IVA AY, TX 128 (2 mm) Software selected
W S, H, F, DL, WB, IVA AY, TX, TY 128 (2 mm) Software selected
A S, H, F, WB, SL, IVA AY, TX, TY, AR, TZ 216 (2 mm) Software selected
Table 3 Horizon Scan Options
Scan A W Wi C Ci
AP Lumbar Spine     
Supine Lateral Spine 
Hip     
Dual Hip     
SE Femur     
Forearm     
Whole Body   
AP and Lateral Imaging 
Single Energy     
Dual Energy     
Visualization of Abdominal   
Aortic Calcification
1.1.2 Operation
Patient Positioning and Scanning
The patient lies face up on the table.
The operator:
1. Uses a cross-hair laser to position the scanning arm over the region of interest
2. Enters patient data
3. Selects the type and size of scan
4. Initiates the scan with a single keystroke.
Technique Factors
Technique factors, such as tube current and voltage, are preselected and fixed. Since testing is performed
by a fan beam method (in contrast to conventional radiography that floods the area), scanning time is a
function of the:
• dimensions of the area to be measured
• desired resolution
• desired precision

Introduction
1.1.3 BMC Results

BMC results are expressed in grams of calcium hydroxyapatite and BMD is reported in grams/cm2 of the
same compound.
1.1.4 Shielding
In most cases, no additional shielding is necessary for patient, operator, or room. The system can be placed
in any convenient non-shielded examination room. Contact your state regulatory agency for details about
any additional shielding requirements.
1.1.5 Automatic Internal Reference System for Daily Calibration

The system employs a patented Automatic Internal Reference System that continuously calibrates the
machine to eliminate the effects of variations in temperature, tube flux, etc. No daily calibration is
required, but daily scanning of a quality control phantom is required to assure that the system is
functioning correctly and to aid in the detection of any long-term drift.
1.1.6 X-ray Scans

The X-ray scans produced by the system, and displayed on the monitor, are intended only to locate
anatomical sites for measurement and to assure the operator that the machine is operating properly. They
are not intended as a substitute for conventional film-based diagnostic scans.
1.2 X-ray Scanning Principles

1.2.1 Mounting
An X-ray Source Assembly, consisting of a high frequency, high voltage generator, and an X-ray tube in a
common, shielded enclosure, is mounted beneath the patient on the C-arm. It generates a narrow, tightly
collimated, fan-shaped beam of X-rays which alternate, at power line frequency, between 100kVp and
140kVp. At the other end of the C-arm, above the patient, is a ceramic/solid state detector array. During a
scan, the C-arm and table move, under computer control, to guide the beam over the desired scan area.
1.2.2 Beam Filter

Before passing through the patient, the beam is filtered through a rotating drum in which alternating
segments that have radio-opacities equivalent to tissue, bone and air are located. When finally intercepted
by the detector, the beam contains information about the X-ray absorbing characteristics of both the
patient and the calibration materials in the filter drum. An A/D converter, fed by the detectors, supplies a
complex digital signal to the computer, which uses that signal both to construct the screen display, and as
the basis for its computations of BMC and BMD.
The computer algorithm is based on the principle that bone attenuates the X-ray beam differently at high
and low energies. The bone mineral content of any sample point can be computed from:
Q = L - kH
where L and H are the logarithms of the sample attenuation at high (140 kVp) and low (100 kVp) energies,
respectively. The constant k depends on the tissue attenuation characteristics of the beam. In the QDR
system, k is continuously measured using the tissue segment in the filter drum.
1.2.3 Program
The program works in the following manner:
1. Load preliminary scan and obtain regions of interest from operator.
2. Estimate k as an average value of:
k = [Ltissue - Lair] / [Htissue - Hair]
where Ltissue indicates a low-energy measurement with tissue-equivalent material interposed by the filter
drum, and Lair, Htissue and Hair are similarly defined.

Introduction
Note The subscript air designates the filter drum segment that is empty (i.e.,
contains neither bone, nor tissue-equivalent material).
3. Using this value of k, calculate Q for each point scanned using the formula given above (Q = L -
kH). This array of Q values constitutes a Q scan. Displays the Q scan.
4. Compile a histogram of the Q values.
Note Because a large portion of the scan contains soft tissue only, this histogram will
have a large peak.
Choose a threshold value just above this peak, and apply that value to
discriminate, point by point in the Q scan, between bone points (whose Q is
above the threshold) and non-bone points (whose Q is below the threshold).
Figure 4 Q Scan Plot
5. Use the non-bone points to calculate a baseline value for each scan line. Using these points, form a
new histogram and repeat steps 4 and 5 until the results converge.
6. Smooth the segment boundaries to eliminate isolated noise-generated bone points.
7. Display the bone and non-bone points for operator approval.
8. Determine the constant of proportionality (d0) that relates the Q values to actual BMC (grams). This
constant is determined by measuring how much Q shifts when bone-equivalent material is
interposed by the filter drum.
9. Calculate the total bone mineral values by adding up the Q values for all bone points in each region
of interest (e.g., each vertebra), and multiplying by d0.
10. Determine the bone areas by counting the number of bone points in each region of interest.
11. Calculate bone mineral density as:
BMD = BMC / area
12. Display the calculated results and print the report.
1.3 Functional Overview

This section provides block diagrams of the system along with a brief functional overview of each diagram
and block. A detailed functional description along with interconnection diagrams and interconnection
descriptions is provided in Section 2 of this manual.

Introduction
Figure 5 Horizon System Block Diagram
The system consists of essentially three conceptual subsystems:

• Operator’s Console
• Motor Control Subsystem
• C-arm Subsystem
1.3.1 Operator Console

The Operator’s Console is the input/output subsystem of the instrument and consists of a PC running the
system software under Windows 7® and the PCIe Communications Controller Board manufactured by
Hologic. The software communicates with the scanner and sends out arm and table motion commands, X-
ray commands, and X-ray detection commands. The software also checks to see that commands have been
completed and issues an appropriate error message when any command fails.

Introduction
Figure 6 Horizon Operator Console Block Diagram
• Console
The Horizon Operator’s Console consists of a Pentium PC on a convenient, roll-around computer cart
designed specifically for Horizon models. AC power from the scanner is fed to the Operator’s Console via
a power strip attached to the PC cart.
Table 4 Pentium PC Components
Component Function
Video Controller Chipset drives the monitor and the PCIe Communications Controller Board to
interface the PC to the Scanner
On-board Network Interface controls communications with the site’s network or a DICOM®
Card (NIC) network.
Mouse gives the operator easy control over the Windows 7-based software
Keyboard used for data input to the software
Color Inkjet Printer color printing
Optional Laser Printer substituted for the inkjet printer
1.3.2 Distribution Board

Interface
The heart of the Horizon Scanner is the Distribution Board. This board interfaces the PC to the different
subsections of the Scanner, distributes control signals to the table and C-arm, and distributes DC power
throughout the Scanner.

Introduction
The Distribution Board receives command inputs from the PCIe Communications Controller Board in the
PC and voltages from the DIN rail and Low Voltage Power Supply.
Commands and voltages dealing with the generation of X-rays or the acquisition of scan data are
transferred to the C-arm Interface Board, which controls both functions. The Distribution Board also
receives Table and C-arm motion commands from the PCIe Communications Controller Board in the PC.
Motor Control Subsystem

The Motor Control Subsystem of the scanner is controlled by the Distribution Board. All motor movement
commands are routed through the Distribution Board to the individual Motor Drivers.
Each motor has one Motor Driver for each motor:
• Arm Y direction (AY)
• Table X direction (TX)
• Table Y direction (TY), A and W models only
• Arm Rotation (AR), A model only
The Distribution Board also distributes the DC power throughout the scan. The r Driver can be found on
the Distribution Board.
Routing
When a motion command is received, the Distribution Board routes the command along with a board
address to the Motor Driver Boards.
The addressed Motor Driver Board converts these digital commands into analog signals that are strong
enough to drive the motors.
A Position Encoder attached to the idler pulley moved by the motor, senses changes in the position of the
arm or table. This device provides a voltage feedback to the Motor Driver Board that is translated into a
motor position, which in turn, is fed back to software in the Operator’s Console PC.
C-arm Interface Board

The C-arm subsystem controls the generation and detection of X-rays. It processes the commands received
from the Distribution Board and passes them to the X-ray Controller or the Detector Assembly. The X-ray
Controller, as its name implies, controls the generation of the X-rays by the X-ray Source Assembly (tank).
The X-ray Controller unit rather than individual components. The X-rays pass through the patient and are
sensed by the Detector Assembly.
The C-arm Interface Board, located on top of the X-ray Source Assembly, controls the C-arm Subsystem.
Commands to the subsystem arrive from the Distribution Board.
The commands processed by the C-arm Interface Board are sent to the Positioning Laser, the X-ray
Controller (XRC), the Aperture Motor, the Detector assembly, or the Filter Drum Assembly.
The commands sent to the Positioning Laser are simple on/off commands. Commands sent to the XRC tell
it when to produce X-rays, which power level of pulse to produce, and the pulse mode to be used.
These commands will subsequently control the way the X-ray Source Assembly (tank) is driven by the
XRC. Instructions to the Aperture Motor are for selecting the aperture to be used for the scan.
The commands to the Filter Drum Assembly turn the Filter Drum on or off and synchronize the filter
drum with the AC line waveform. The last set of command signals is sent to the Detector Assembly to
synchronize the acquisition of data with the production of the X-rays from the source X-ray Source
Assembly (tank).

Introduction
Figure 7 Horizon C-arm Block Diagram
The C-arm Interface Board collects data from most of the circuits mentioned above for transmission back
to the Distribution Board and, finally, the software.
The Aperture Motor Assembly sends back position information indicating which of the aperture slots is in
position.
The Filter Drum Assembly sends back filter and reference phase information.
The XRC sends back information concerning fault conditions, beam conditions, and an AC Line signal for
generating AC Line Interrupts to the software.
C-arm Subsystem
The C-arm Subsystem controls the generation and detection of X-rays. It processes the commands received
from the Distribution Board and passes them to the X-ray Controller or the Detector Assembly. The X-ray
Controller, as its name implies, controls the generation of the X-rays by the X-ray Source Assembly (tank).
The X-ray Controller unit rather than individual components. The X-rays pass through the patient and are
sensed by the Detector Assembly.

Introduction
Figure 8 Horizon Distribution and Motor Control Block Diagram

Signal Distribution Board
JP1 & JP3 C-Arm Interface
JP4 Control Panel Interface

Motors Encoders
TZ
Communications Controller JP10
JP2 TZ Drive Board TZ
TZ Power Supply (24VDC)
Low Voltage Power Supply (+/- 15V) (+ 24V) JP6 & JP9
TY
JP5 TY Stepper Motor Driver
TY
TX
JP7 TX Stepper Motor Driver
AR TX
AR Stepper Motor Driver JP8
AR
AY
JP11 AY Stepper Motor Driver
AY
Detector Board
The Detector Board sends data collected from scans back to the software through the C-arm Interface
Board and the Distribution Board. Mathematical algorithms applied to this data produce the scans seen by
the operator and to calculate the BMD, BMC, and area of the bone matter scanned.
Control Panel Board

The Horizon Control Panel is located at the head end of the table and communicates with the Distribution
Board via the Control Panel Interface Board. The Control Panel provides the operator with a means to
issue manual commands to move table and arm motors, turn power to the instrument on or off, and an
indicator showing when X-rays are being generated.
Table 5 System Circuit Board Function
Part No. Description

Computer Controls and commands all Horizon hardware modules
PCIe Communications Controls the flow of commands to and from the Scanner modules via
Controller Board the communications bus
Distribution Board • Provides the interconnections between the Operator's Console and
the Scanner
• Distributes DC voltages
Control Panel • Provides switches for manually moving the C-arm and Patient Table
• Also provides Emergency Stop and Instrument On/Off switches
TX Stepper Motor Driver • Controls the motion of the Patient Table in and out motor
• Monitors table position information from the encoder
TY Stepper Motor Driver • Controls the motion of the Patient Table left to right motor
• Monitors table position information from the encoder (A, W, and Wi
only)

Introduction
Table 5 System Circuit Board Function (Continued)
Part No. Description

TZ Drive Board • Controls the motion of the Patient Table left and right pedestal
motor
• Monitors table position information from the string encoders (A
only)
AR Stepper Motor Driver • Controls the rotational motion of the C-arm
• Monitors C-arm position information from the encoder (A only).
AY Stepper Motor Driver Controls the motion of the C-arm left and right motor.
Monitors C-arm position information from the encoder
Filter Drum Interface • Controls the Filter Drum assembly and interfaces with the C-arm
which passes the signals.
C-arm Interface • Controls the Aperture motor
• Generates timing and control signals for the X-ray Controller and
the Data Acquisition System
• Monitors the tape switches
• Provides power to the Positioning Laser
X-ray Source Unit Generates the X-ray beam (part of the X-ray Source Assembly). The X-
ray Source contains an integrated controller that controls the
operation of the X-ray Source.
Filter Drum/Aperture Controls the rotation of the two filter drums and the positioning of the
Controller aperture
Detector Board • Converts the X-rays into electrical signals.
• Integrates the signals from the Solid State Detectors and converts
them to a digital value in the Analog-to-Digital converter circuitry.
Control Panel Provides the operator with a means to:
• reposition the table, C-arm, and
• turn on the laser.
Positioning Laser Provides a laser crosshair beam to assist in positioning the patient on
the Patient Table.

Introduction
Table 6 Product Specifications
Specification Model Definition

Scanning Method All Multi-detector array, indexing table, and motorized C-arm
X-ray System All Switched Pulse Dual-Energy X-ray tube, operating at 100 and
140 kV, 5 mA avg. at 50% duty cycle, 2.5 mA avg. at 25% duty
cycle (30 sec. maximum), Tungsten target
Detector System A 216 multi-channel detector consisting of GOS scintillators
coupled to silicon diodes
C/W 128 multi-channel detector consisting of GOS scintillators
Ci/Wi 64 multi-channel detector consisting of GOS scintillators
Scanning Sites A Lumbar spine (in AP and lateral projections), proximal femur
(hip) forearm, IVA Spine, SE Femur, and whole body
W/Wi Lumbar spine (in AP and decubitus lateral projections),

proximal femur (hip), forearm, IVA spine (AP only), SE Femur
and whole body
C/Ci Lumbar spine (in AP and decubitus lateral projections),

proximal femur (hip), forearm, SE Femur, and IVA spine (AP
only)
Scan Region A 1.95 m (76.77 in.) x .65 m (25.59 in.) maximum
W/Wi 1.97 m (77.5 in.) x .65 m (25.59 in.) maximum
C/Ci .96 m (38 in.) x .51 m (20 in.) maximum
Scatter Radiation All Less than 10 µGy/h (1 mrad/h) at 2 m (79 in.) from the center of
the X-ray beam for all scans
Leakage Radiation All The Horizon meets the requirements of 21 CFR 1020.30(k) for
leakage from the X-ray source.
External Shielding All Contact state regulatory agency.
Requirement
Calibration All Self Calibrating using Hologic Automatic Internal Reference
System. Operator calibration NOT required.

Introduction
Table 7 System Operating Parameters
Specification Model Definition

Operating Temperature All 15 °C – 32 °C (59 °F – 90 °F)
Humidity All 20 – 80% relative humidity, non-condensing
Storage Temperature All -30 °C – 50 °C (-22 °F – 122 °F)
Storage Humidity All 10 – 90% relative humidity, non-condensing
Horizon Heat Load All 1000 w (3400 BTU/hr)
Patient Table Height A Scanning in AP Mode
Adjustable to 71 cm (28 in.) from floor
Maximum Elevation
88.9 cm (35 in.)
Patient ON/OFF
67.3 cm (26.5 in.)
C/Ci, W/Wi 71 cm +/- 25 mm (28 in. +/- 1 in.)
Positioning Laser All Diode laser (< 1 mW) cross hair
X-ray Collimation All Dual movable aperture with 0.5 mm and 1.0 mm
slots
Leakage Current All Normal < 75 µA Single Fault < 400 µA
All 0.5 line pair/mm (approximately 1.0 mm)
Table 8 System Dimensions
Footprint Model Length Width Height

m (in.) m (in.) m (in.)
Maximum A 3.02 (119) 1.48 (58.3) 1.55 (61.2)
W/Wi 3.02 (119) 1.64 (64.6) 1.42 (56.0)
C, Ci NA 1.34 (52.8) 1.42 (56.0)
Stationary A 2.02 (79.5) 1.15 (45.3) 1.42 (56.0)
W/Wi 2.02 (79.5) 1.37 (53.8) 1.42 (56.0)
C, Ci 1.97 (76.0) 1.14 (44.8) 1.42 (56.0)
Table 9 Exam Mode Performance
Exam Type Default

Scan Durations Dose in vivo
Length @ Default mGy Precision
Model (in.) Length Scan Site max (%)
AP Spine High All 8.0 163 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.20 1.0
Def
AP Spine Array All 8.0 82 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.20 1.0

Introduction
Table 9 Exam Mode Performance (Continued)
Exam Type Default

Scan Durations Dose in vivo
Length @ Default mGy Precision
Model (in.) Length Scan Site max (%)
AP Spine Fast All 8.0 41 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.10 1.0
AP Spine Turbo All 8.0 21 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.05 1.0
Express Scan All 8.0 10 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.07 1.0
Decubitus Lateral C&W 8.0 160 L2, L3, L4 0.40 1.0
Spine Fast
Lat Spine High A 8.0 240 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.35 1.0
Def
Lat Spine Array A 8.0 240 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.70 1.0
Lat Spine Fast A 6.0 120 L1, L2, L3, L4 0.35 1.0
Hip High Def All 6.0 123 Femur (Total) 0.20 1.0
Hip Array All 6.0 62 Femur (Total) 0.20 1.0
Hip Fast All 6.0 31 Femur (Total) 0.10 1.0
Hip Turbo All 6.0 16 Femur (Total) 0.05 1.0
Dual Hip All 6.0 2X Scan Left & Right Selected Selected Scan
Mode Femur Scan Mode Mode
Whole Body W/Wi 77.0 402 Whole Body 0.015 1.0
A 77.0 180 Whole Body 0.01 1.0
Forearm All 6.0 31 Forearm 0.10 1.0
(Radius &
Ulna) (Total)
IVA SE AP All 16.1 10 Spine T5-L4 0.07 NA
Imaging
IVA SE R/L All 16.1 10 Spine T5-L4 0.07 NA
Lateral
IVA DE R/L All 13.6 511 Spine T5-L4 0.35 NA
Imaging
Small Animal A 2/3 149 Spine & NA NA
Spine and Femur Femur
Small Animal A 12.0 122 Whole Body NA NA
Whole Body

Introduction
Table 10 Duty Cycle
Model Scan Mode Duty Cycle

A IVA HD and IVA 12%
Whole Body 100%
All Others 50%
C and W IVA HD and IVA 12%
All Others 50%
Ci and Wi All Scan Modes 50%
1.4 Leakage Technique Factors

The leakage technique factors for all Horizon models are the same. It is the maximum continuous current
at the maximum peak potential. This is X-ray mode #3.
• Peak potential: 100/140kVp (dual energy)
• Tube Current: 10 mA peak, 25% duty cycle or 2.5 mA

Introduction
1.4.1 Beam Filtration

Table 11 X-ray Beam Filtration
Condition Aluminum Equivalent Filtration

Minimum filtration permanently in the X-ray beam 6.1 mm1
Additional filtration, dual-energy mode at 140 kV 53 mm2
Additional filtration, A models, single-energy mode, lateral 0.8 mm3
position
1. Of the total minimum Al Equivalent Filtration, 5.9 mm is attributable to the X-ray source and 0.2 mm is
attributable to the filter drum/aperture assembly.
2. From 1.6 mm Brass.
3. From 25.4 µm copper
1.4.2 Beam Quality

Table 12 Typical Measured Values for Half Value Layer in a Horizon System
Mode Half Value Layer (mm Al)

100 kV, no additional filtration 4.4
140 kV, no additional filtration 6.0
140 kV, with additional filtration 13.5
1.4.3 Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current

Table 13 Horizon Line Voltage and Maximum Current1
Line Voltage Current Frequency Maximum Apparent
(VAC) (A) (Hz) Resistance (Ώ)
Power 100 16 50/60 0.32
Requirements
120 14 50/60 0.32
230 8 50/60 1.28
1. All Models
1.4.4 Maximum Deviation from Indicated Values

The maximum deviation from the preindication given by labeled technique factor control settings or
indicators are detailed in Table 14.
Table 14 Maximum Deviation
Unit Range
Peak Potential +/- 15%
Current: +/- 40%
Time: +/- 10%
1.4.5 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors

The measurement criteria of the technique factors are detailed in Table 15.

Introduction
Table 15 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors
Criteria Description
Peak Potential The voltage peak is measured with an oscilloscope. Voltage is a squarewave
pulse.
Peak is defined as the peak voltage of the 4 millisecond pulse, discounting any
initial overshoot.
Current Current is measured with an oscilloscope on the last millisecond of the
4 millisecond pulse.
Time Time of each pulse is measured with an oscilloscope and defined as the time
between 50% rise and fall times of the peak potential pulse.
Time of the scan is measured by counting the number of AC line pulses from
the start to the end. X-ray pulses are synchronous with the AC line.

Functional Description
2 Functional Description
This section provides a detailed functional description along with interconnection diagrams. Refer to
Section 2.3.2 Interface Connections on Page 20 for a block diagram and a brief functional description of each
block.
2.1 Computer
The computer is a Pentium 4-based (or higher) PC that comes equipped with a hard disk drive, a
keyboard, a mouse, a flat panel monitor, and a DVD R/W for archiving scans and backups of the system
database. The computer interfaces to the scanner via a PCIe Communications Controller Board.
2.2 PCIe Communications Controller Board

The PCIe Communications Controller Board handles all the communications between the Computer and
the Scanner C-arm and Table assemblies. The board resides in the computer internal PCIe slot and
communicates with the computer via the computer's I/O bus. It connects to the Distribution Board in the
Scanner through a ribbon cable. This cable contains two independent communications links (one
synchronous and one asynchronous) and additional system control signals. Each signal requires a pair of
conductors for differential (RS422) noise immunity.
The asynchronous link communicates with the Motor Controller Boards (TX, TY, AR, and AY), the TZ
Control Board, the C-arm Interface Board, and the Control Panel Controller section of the Detector Board
(or the Control Panel Interface on A models). The synchronous link communicates with the Data
Acquisition System (DAS).
2.2.1 Connectors and Pin Assignments

Table 16 identifies the connectors and their pin assignments. Figure 9 displays the interconnections
between the PCIe Communications Controller Board and the Distribution Board.
.
Table 16 PCIe Communications Controller Board/Distribution Board

Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Pair Description PCI Pin1 Dist Pin2

ATD+ Asynchronous data to the Scanner. JP1-2 JP10-3
ATD- JP1-27 JP10-4
STD+ Synchronous data to the Scanner. JP1-28 JP10-6
STD- JP1-4 JP10-7
STCLK+ Synchronous data clock from PCIe JP1-5 JP10-9
STCLK- Communications Controller Board to JP1-30 JP10-10
Distribution Board. Synchronizes data to the
Scanner.
STFRM+ Synchronous data frame from PCIe JP1-31 JP10-12
STFRM- Communication Command Board to JP1-7 JP10-13
Distribution Board.
ARD+ Asynchronous Data from the Scanner. JP1-8 JP10-15
ARD- JJP1-33 JP10-16
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Scanner. JP1-34 JP10-18
SRD- JP1-10 JP10-19

Table 16 PCIe Communications Controller Board/Distribution Board Interconnection Descriptions

(Continued)
Signal Pair Description PCI Pin1 Dist Pin2

SRCLK+ Synchronous data clock from PCIe JP1-11 JP10-21
SRCLK- Communication Command Board to JP1-36 JP10-22
Distribution Board. Synchronizes data from the
Scanner.
SRFRM+ Synchronous data frame from Distribution JP1-37 JP10-24
SRFRM- Board to PCIe Communication Command JP1-13 JP10-25
Board.
EMERGENCY_IN+ Signals an emergency condition. Generated by JP1-14 JP10-27
EMERGENCY_IN- the C-arm Interface Board. JP1-39 JP10-28
ZEROX+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system JP1-40 JP10-30
ZEROX- wide synchronization. Generated by the C-arm JP1-16 JP10-31
Interface Board.
INTEGRATE+ Synchronous signal for Detector Integrate JP1-17 JP10-33
INTERGATE- period. Generated by the C-arm Interface JP1-42 JP10-34
Board.
SYSRESET+ Resets the Scanner controllers. JP1-20 JP10-39
SYSRESET- JP1-45 JP10-40
EMERGENCY+ Removes power from the Scanner motor JP1-49 JP10-48
EMERGENCY- drivers and the X-ray system JP1-25 JP10-49
1. PCIe = PCIe Communication Controller Board
2. Dist = Distribution Board
Figure 9 PCIe Communication Controller Board/Distribution Board Interconnection Diagram
PCI
Communication DISTRIBUTION
Command BOARD
Board
KP1085_004-0201

2.3 Distribution Board

The Distribution Board provides interconnections between the Operator's Console (PC) and the Scanner. It
passes several signal lines from the Operator's Console and power lines from the DIN rail directly to the
C-Arm Controller module. It also provides buffering and individual drivers and receivers for various
signal lines to and from individual Scanner modules and the PCIe Communication Command Board. The
Distribution Board is located in the Electronics Tray in the base of the Scanner.
One cable connects the Operator's Console (PC) communications bus to the Distribution Board. One cable
connects to the Distribution Board from the DIN rail. This cable brings DC power to the Distribution Board
and connects the X-ray On and Emergency signal lines to the Power Module.
Up to eight (8) cables connect the Distribution Board to the various Scanner boards depending on
instrument model. Four cables connect to the four Motor Controller Boards (Table X, Table Y, Arm R, and
Arm Y). A single cable connects to the TZ Control Board. Two cables (one signal and one power) connect
to the C-arm Controller Board. In addition, one cable connects to the scanner Control Panel Interface
Board. In all models, this board is located under the head end of the table.
The Distribution Board has provision for three jumpers that can be installed to override the EMERGENCY
signal lines when troubleshooting.
2.3.1 Power
The Distribution Board receives +24 and +/-15VDC from the Multi-voltage DC Switching Power Module.
The +24VDC is applied through four individual circuit breakers to the Table X, Table Y, Arm R, and Arm Y
Motor Controller Boards. The +24 and +/-15VDC are passed to the C-arm Interface Board. The +24VDC is
also reduced to +7 and +5VDC by regulators to power op-amps and analog switches located on this board.
The +7VDC is passed to the Control Panel Controller Board. The +5VDC powers the digital section of the
Distribution Board.
Note +7VDC may measure anywhere from +6.25VDC to +7.25VDC. This is true
everywhere +7VDC is shown in this manual.
Six (6) green LEDs indicate the status of the +24 (motors), +24 (control), +15, -15, +7 and +5VDC (ON
indicates the respective voltage is present). Five (5) red LEDs indicate the status of the five circuit breakers
applying voltage to the motor drivers/controller. ON indicates the circuit breaker has been tripped by an
over-current condition.
2.3.2 Interface Connections

Figure 10 shows connections to/from the Distribution Board.

Figure 10 Distribution Board High Level Interconnection Diagram
2.4 Motor Controller Board

The Motor Controller Board is a microprocessor controlled power driver circuit for use with a two-coil
bipolar stepper motor. It receives high-level commands through the Distribution Board from the host
computer, and applies 24-volt pulses to the stepper motor windings. The system uses four (4) identical
Motor Controller Boards to control and drive the Table X (Table In/Out), Table Y (Table Left/Right), C-Arm
Y (C-arm Left/Right) and C-arm R (Arm rotation, A only) stepper motors. The motor windings are driven
by two integrated H-bridges. These integrated circuits provide internal level conversion and power
limiting. Their logic level control inputs are driven from a stepper motor control microcircuit that receives
commands from the microprocessor. The control circuit senses the current in the motor windings and
adjusts the duty cycle of the applied voltage in such a way as to limit the maximum motor current. The
maximum value is determined by an 8-bit control word at a Digital to Analog Converter.
Each Motor Controller Board monitors the position of its respective mechanism using a voltage received
from an associated Position Encoder connected to the mechanism. The Position Encoder is a precision
potentiometer that divides a +/-3V reference source. The output voltage is fed to a sense amplifier in
proportion to the position of the mechanism driven by the motor. The sense amplifier output is converted
to digital value that provides position feedback to the microprocessor.

The Motor Controller Boards receive movement commands from the system computer via the
communications bus. Each Motor Controller Board contains an ID switch and four status indicators
(LEDs). The ID switch is a 16-position rotary encoded switch (SW1) that is read during system
initialization to determine the Motor Controller Board address for communicating with the computer. ID
switch settings for the Motor Controller Boards are as follows:
Table X drive 4
Table Y drive 5
C-arm Rotation 6
C-arm Y drive 7
The four red status LEDs provide visual indications of motor drive power on, Stepper CPU active, motor
drive direction, and motor step pulses.
The Motor Controller Board also has provision (JP2) for connecting limit switches to inhibit motor
operation when the mechanism goes beyond established mechanical limits. This feature is not used in the
system and, therefore, no cable is connected to JP2.
2.4.1 Power
Power input to the Motor Controller Board is +24VDC. This voltage provides the motor drive power and is
converted down to +5VDC for use by logic circuits on the board. The +5VDC is also converted to -5VDC.
Two green LEDs provide a visual indication of the power present on the Motor Controller Board.

Figure 11 shows the typical interconnections between the Distribution Board, the Motor Controller Board,
the Stepper Motor, and the Position Encoder, and it describes the interconnections between each Motor
Controller and its respective stepper motor and position encoder. The tables also identify the connectors
and their pin assignments.
Figure 11 Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Diagram

Table 17 Distribution Board/Motor Controller Board Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description Table X Table Y C-arm Y Pin(s)

ARD+ Asynchronous Receive Data JP7 JP5 JP11 11
ARD- 12
ATD+ Asynchronous Transmit Data JP7 JP5 JP11 14
ATD- 15
SYSRST+ System Reset. Resets the Motor JP7 JP5 JP11 17
SYSRST- Controller Board 18
28V DC power for the Motor Controller JP7 JP5 JP11 2,3,4,5
28V_RET Board 1,6,7,8
Table 18 Motor Controller Board/Stepper Motor and Position Encoder

Signal Description Pin

(No label) Motor drive signals (4). JP5-1 – JP5-4
+REF (+3V) Precision positive voltage to position potentiometer. JP3-1
(No label) Position encoder wiper return voltage. JP3-3
-REF (-3V) Precision negative voltage to position potentiometer. JP3-5
2.5 TZ Control Board (A Only)

The TZ Control Board is a microprocessor-controlled power driver circuit for the two DC pedestal motors,
which raise and lower the patient table of the Horizon A. This board is located in the Electronics Tray in
the rear of the bottom of the Scanner base assembly.
The TZ Control Board communicates with the PCIe Board, via the Distribution Board, to drive the
pedestal motors under computer control. Manual repositioning of the pedestal may be required in case of
an emergency. In this case, manual control is provided through the Table switches of the Scanner’s
Operator Control Panel.
The TZ Control board monitors the position of both pedestals using signals received from an associated
Position Encoder connected to the respective pedestal.
2.5.1 Service Switches

The TZ Control Board contains four service switches used during replacement of a defective pedestal or
Position Encoder. Table 19 lists these switches and their respective functions.
s
Table 19 TZ Drive Service Switches
Switch Function
Mode (Normal/Service) Determines whether the TZ Drive is in Normal or Service operation.
Left Up/Down When the TZ drive is in Service mode, moves the left pedestal up or
down.
Right Up/Down When the TZ drive is in Service mode, moves the right pedestal in the
direction specified by the Direction switch (not active in normal mode).
Reset Resets the board after manual operation. The TZ Control Board must
be reset after any manual operation.

2.5.2 Power
Power input to the TZ Control Board is + 24VDC from the standalone power supply to drive the pedestals
powers circuitry located on this board.
Logic power input to this Motor Controller Board is +24VDC from the distribution board. This voltage
provides the motor drive logic power and is converted down to +5VDC for use by logic circuits on the
board. The + 5VDC is converted to ± 5 VDC and ± 3VDC. The ± 5VDC powers logic circuitry on this board,
while the ± 3VDC provides the reference voltage for the position sensors. Two green LEDs provide visual
indication of the DC status (ON indicates the respective voltage is present).
Logic power input to this Motor Controller Board is +24VDC from the distribution board. This voltage
provides the motor drive logic power and is converted down to +5VDC for use by logic circuits on the
board. The + 5VDC is converted to +/- 5 VDC and +/â€? 3VDC. The +/â€?5VDC powers logic circuitry on
this board, while the +/â€? 3VDC provides the reference voltage for the position sensors. Two green LEDs
provide visual indication of the DC status (ON indicates the respective voltage is present).

Figure 12 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board, the TZ Control Board, the Pedestal
Motors, and the Pedestal Position Encoders. describes the interconnections between the Distribution
Board and the TZ Control Board. describes the line voltage between the standalone +24VDC power
supply and the TZ Control Board. Table 34 describes the interconnections between the TZ Control Board
and the two pedestal motors and their respective position encoders. The tables also identify the
interconnection connector and pin assignments.
Figure 12 Distribution Board/TZ Control Board Interconnection Diagram

Table 20 Distribution Board/TZ Control Board Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description Pin(s)

ARD+ Asynchronous Receive Data. JP1-11
ARD- JP1-12
ATD+ Asynchronous Transmit Data. JP1-14
ATD- JP1-15
SYSRST+ System Reset. Resets the TZ Control Board. JP1-17
SYSRST- JP1-18
EMERGENCY+ Enables manual operation of the pedestals in the case of an JP1-20
EMERGENCY- emergency (under control of the Control Panel Table switch JP1-21
on the Patient Table).
MAN_UP* Raises the Patient Table in the case of an emergency. JP1-23
MAN_UP_RET JP1-24
MAN_DWN* Lowers the Patient Table in the case of an emergency. JP1-26
MAN_DWN_RET JP1-27
+24V DC power for the Motor Controller board. JP1-5, JP1-6
+6.5V Not used. JP1-2, JP1-3
Table 21 Motor Power Input

-24VDC 24V return/reference for right and left pedestal motors JP2-1
+24VDC +24V Power for right and left pedestal motors JP2-4

Power Supply Cable DIN Rail Connections

Table 22 Power Supply Cable DIN Rail Connections
DIN Rail Color Connection

S1 Green/Yellow Ground
NB7 Blue Neutral
S3 Brown Live
Wiring Harness to Power Supply Connections 1 to 6

Table 23 24VDC Output Power Supply Connections, 1 to 6

1 Blue +24V
2 Blue +24V
3 Blue +24V
4 White Ground
5 White Ground
6 White Ground
Wiring Harness to Power Supply Connections 7 to 9

Table 24 120VAC Input to Power Supply Connections, 7 to 9

7 Green/Yellow Ground
8 Blue Neutral
9 Brown Live
Table 25 Right Position Potentiometer J9
Connector
Pin Signal Name Type Description
J9-1 POT_VREF Power Buffered output of 3 Volt reference to the high side of the
right column position potentiometer through a 100 ohm
series resistor. Referenced to AGND.
J9-2 AGND Power Shield connection point for right column position pot
cable.
J9-3 POT_IN Analog Input from the wiper connection of the right column
position potentiometer. Referenced to AGND.
J9- POT_RTN Power Return/reference for the right column position
potentiometer. Connected to AGND through a 100 ohm
resistor. Output to low side of the right column position
potentiometer.

Table 26 Left Position Potentiometer J7
Connector
J7-1 POT_VREF Power Buffered output of 3 Volt reference to the high side of the
left column position potentiometer through a 100 ohm
series resistor. Referenced to AGND.
J7-2 AGND Power Shield connection point for the left column position pot
cable.
J7-3 POT_IN Analog Input from the wiper connection of the left column
position potentiometer. Referenced to AGND.
J7-4 POT_RTN Power Return/reference for the left column position
potentiometer. Connected to AGND through a 100 ohm
resistor. Output to low side of the left column position
potentiometer.
Table 27 Right Column Motor J5
Connector
J5-1 MOTOR_OUT_A Power Armature connection to right column motor.
0 – 24VDC during motoring. Referenced to
24VRTN.
J5-2 — — No Connection
J5-3 +5 VDC Power +5VDC power output to right column position
encoder. Not used for this application.
J5-4 S1 Input Active-high input from right column position
encoder Ch. A. Referenced to 0 VDC.
Not used for this application.
encoder Ch. B. Referenced to 0VDC.
J5-7 0 VDC Power Return/reference for +5VDC to right column
J5-8 MOTOR_OUT_B Power Armature connection to right column motor. 0 –
24VDC during motoring. Referenced to 24VRTN

Table 28 Left Column Motor J3
Connector
J3-1 MOTOR_OUT_A Power Armature connection to right column motor.
0 – 24VDC during motoring. Referenced to
24VRTN.
J3-3 +5 VDC Power +5VDC power output to right column position
encoder Ch. A. Referenced to 0VDC.
encoder Ch. B. Referenced to 0VDC.
J3-7 0 VDC Power Return/reference for +5VDC to right column
J3-8 MOTOR_OUT_B Power Armature connection to right column motor. 0 –
24VDC during motoring. Referenced to 24VRTN
Indicators
There are 12 LED indicators on the Tz drive board. Eight (8) of the LEDs are driven from a MCP23008 I/O
expander IC that is controlled by the MCU through an I2C serial connection. Other indicators are
connected between power and ground and indicate the presence of voltage at the power inputs to the
board or the outputs of on board regulators. Table 29 describes the function of each of the indicators.
Table 29 Tz Drive Board LED Indicators
Reference Name When Lit, Indicates Notes
LED1 PSON Enable output to 24V motor power Power supply enable output is not
supply is ON used for this application
LED2 DRIVE One or both lifting columns are in

motion
LED3 DIR The current direction of motion is
UP
LED4 LEFT ALIGN The left lifting column has failed to
ERROR position to within the required right/
left position tolerance
LED5 RIGHT The right lifting column has failed
ALIGN to position to within the required
ERR right/left position tolerance

Table 29 Tz Drive Board LED Indicators (Continued)
Reference Name When Lit, Indicates Notes
LED6 MTR The MCU has detected a fault in the Overcurrent condition or no motion
FAULT operation of the left lifting column detected during attempted re-
LEFT motor position
LED7 MTR The MCU has detected a fault in the Overcurrent condition or no motion
FAULT operation of the right lifting column detected during attempted re-
RIGHT motor position
LED8 SYS TICK Slow blink (2/sec): MCU operating,
Normal mode
Fast blink (4/sec): MCU operating,
Service mode
LED9 24V 24VDC logic input power is present
at J1
LED10 5V +5VDC is present at output of
voltage regulator U14
LED11 3.3V +3.3VDC is present at output of
voltage regulator U17
LED12 MOTOR 24VDC motor input power is
PWR present at J2
Jumpers
There are three 2-position jumpers on the Tz drive board that function as described in Table 30.
Table 30 Jumpers
Reference Type Function

JW1 2-position In – Enables resets from the external system
jumper
Out – Disables resets from the external system
JW2 2-position In – Enables resets from the MCU supervisor watchdog
jumper
Out – Disables resets from the MCU supervisor watchdog.
Overridden by R25, if installed.
JW3 2-position In – Enables Host Port operation in Test Mode.
jumper
Out – Enables Host Port operation in Normal Mode.
2.6 Control Panel Controller Board

The Control Panel Controller Board on the Horizon is a separate board located in the C-arm. Its function is
to interface the Scanner Operator Control Panel to the computer allowing the software to determine the
state of the Operator Control Panel switches, to define the state of the various Operator Control Panel
LEDs, and to control motor movement. The board is located under the table at the head end of the scanner.
The Control Panel Controller communicates with the Operator's Console computer using the
asynchronous communications signals ARD and ATD of the communications buss and the system control
signals SYSRESET, XRAY_LIGHT, and EMERGENCY.

2.6.1 Power
The Control Panel Controller Board receives +7VDC from the Distribution Board. The +7 is reduced to
+5VDC to power the circuitry on this board and is applied to the Operator Control Panel to power the
LEDs. A green LED, on this board, provides a visual indication of the +5VDC power (ON indicates the
voltage is present).

Figure 13 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board, Control Panel Controller Board, and
the Operator Control Panel.
Table 31 details the interconnections between the Distribution Board and the Control Panel Controller.
Table 31 describes the interconnections between the Control Panel Controller and the Operator Control
Panel. The tables also identify the connectors and their pin assignments.
Figure 13 Control Panel Controller Interconnection Diagram

Table 31 Distribution Board/Control Panel Controller Interconnection Descriptions

ARD+ Asynchronous Receive Data from the PCIe JP2-4
ARD- Communication Command Board via the Distribution JP2-5
Board.
ATD+ Asynchronous Transmit Data to the PCIe JP2-7
ATD- Communication Command Board via the Distribution JP2-8
Board
SYSRESET+ System Reset from the PCIe Communication JP2-10
SYSRESET- Command Board via the Distribution Board. Resets the JP2-11
Control Panel Controller.
EMERGENCY+ Emergency TZ drive indicator from the PCIe JP2-13
EMERGENCY- Communication Command Board via the Distribution JP2-14
Board.
XRAY_LIGHT+ X-ray Light from the X-ray Controller via the C-arm JP2-16
XRAY_LIGHT- Interface and Distribution Boards. JP2-17
EMERGENCY_CPANEL State of the STOP switch and of the collision sensor. JP2-19
HW_EMERGENCY_RET (Part of the safety daisy chain.) JP2-20
+7V DC power for the Control Panel Controller Board JP2-2
Table 32 Control Panel Controller/Control Panel Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description 1 2
CPC Pin CP Pin
L0_PWR* Turns on the ENABLE switch LED. JP6-11 JP1-11

L1_PWR* Turns on the HOME switch LED. JP6-12 JP1-12
L2_PWR* Turns on the LOAD switch LED. JP6-13 JP1-13
L3_PWR* Turns on the TABLE switch IN/OUT LED. JP6-14 JP1-14
L4_PWR* Not used. JP6-15 JP1-15
L5_PWR* Turns on the C-arm switch RIGHT/LEFT JP6-16 JP1-16
LED.
L6_PWR* Not used. JP6-17 JP1-17
L7_PWR* Turns on the Laser LED. JP6-18 JP1-18
XRAY_LIGHT_PWR* Turns on the X_RAY LED JP6-19 JP1-19
SW0 Control signal to determine the state of the JP6-4 JP1-4
C-arm and LASER switches.
TABLE IN/OUT switches.
LOAD, HOME and ENABLE switches.

Table 32 Control Panel Controller/Control Panel Interconnection Descriptions (Continued)
Signal Description 1 2
CPC Pin CP Pin
SR0 Returns the state of the C-arm switch LEFT JP6-1 JP1-1
position when SW0 is active. Signals the
state of the TABLE switch IN position when
SW1 is active. Signals the state of the LOAD
switch when SW2 is active.
SR1 Returns the state of the C-arm switch JP6-2 JP1-2
RIGHT position when SW0 is active.
Signals the state of the TABLE switch OUT
position when SW1 is active. Signals the
state of the HOME switch when SW2 is
active.
SR2 Returns the state of the LASER and JP6-3 JP1-3
ENABLE switches when SW2 is active.
EMERGENCY_CPANEL Returns the state of the STOP switch. (Part JP6-23 JP1-23
HW_EMERGENCY_RET of the safety daisy chain.) JP6-24 JP1-24
+5V Provides power for the Control Panel LEDs. JP6-21 JP1-21
JP6-22 JP1-22
1. CPC = Control Panel Controller
2. CP=Control Panel
2.7 C-arm Interface Board

The C-arm Interface Board distributes DC power and signals to the Data Acquisition System (DAS) and
provides control electronics for the devices located in the C-arm assembly. It passes several signal and
power lines from the Distribution Board directly to the DAS. It also provides buffering for various signal
lines. The C-arm Interface Board is located near the rear of the lower C-arm directly above the X-ray
Source Assembly.
Note On the Horizon A model, the Data Acquisition System (DAS) consists of the
Analog to Digital Converter, Integrator/Multiplexor, and Solid State Detector
Boards. On the Horizon C and W models, a single-board, 128-Channel Detector
Assembly is used. On the Horizon Ci and Wi models, a single-board,
64-Channel Detector Assembly is used.
The C-arm Interface provides circuitry to:
• Control and monitor operation of the X-ray Controller Board. Four LEDs (two red, one green, and
one yellow) on this board, provide a visual indication of the status of the X-ray Controller and the
X-ray control circuitry of this board.
• Generate timing references to the DAS and PCIe Communication Command Board.
• Control power to the Positioning Laser.
• Command the Aperture stepper motor and monitor its mechanically linked position-sensing
device.
• Command the stepper motor of the inner and outer filter drums and monitor the encoded signals
returned from each drum of the device. Two green LEDs, on this board, provide a visual indication
of the Reference Drum operation.
• Generate +7VDC for the DAS system

2.7.1 Continuity Daisy Chain

The C-arm Interface Board is part of two linked chains of boards. Removing any of these boards conveys
an alarm message to the host computer indicating that the electrical integrity of the system has been
compromised. This message can be decoded by the host computer to detect the extent of the damage.
2.7.2 Power
The C-arm Interface Board receives + 24 and +/-15VDC from the Distribution Board. The +/-15V is passed
through this board to the DAS. The + 24VDC is also regulated to +5 and +7VDC. The + 5VDC powers the
digital section of this board and the laser while the +7VDC is applied to the DAS.
Three green LEDs, on this board, provide a visual indication of the + 24VDC and +5VDC power (ON
indicates the respective voltage is present). The third LED monitors the +28VDC used on the QDR-4500
models.

Figure 14 shows the interconnections between the Distribution Board and the C-arm Interface Board. Table
33 details the interface signals and identifies the connectors and their pin assignments.
Figure 14 Distribution Board/C-arm Interface Board Interconnection Diagram

Table 33 Distribution Board/C-arm Interface Board Interconnections
Signal Description Dist Pin1 C-arm Pin2

ARD_CARM+ Asynchronous data to the C-arm Interface Board. JP1-3 JP1-3
ARD_CARM- JP1-4 JP1-4
STD+ Synchronous data through the C-arm Interface Board to JP1-6 JP1-6
STD- the DAS. JP1-7 JP1-7
STCLK+ Synchronizes data through the C-arm Interface Board to JP1-9 JP1-9
STCLK- the DAS. JP1-10 JP1-10
STFRM+ Synchronous channel data frame from PCIe Board JP1-12 JP1-12
STFRM- through the Distribution Board to the DAS. JP1-13 JP1-13
ATD_CARM+ Asynchronous Data from the from the C-arm Interface JP1-15 JP1-15
ATD_CARM- Board. JP1-16 JP1-16
SRD+ Synchronous Data through the C-arm Interface Board JP1-18 JP1-18
SRD- from the DAS. JP1-19 JP1-19
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data through the C-arm Interface Board JP1-21 JP1-21
SRCLK- from the DAS. JP1-22 JP1-22
SRFRM+ Synchronous channel data frame through Distribution JP1-24 JP1-24
SRFRM- Board to PCIe Communication Command Board from JP1-25 JP1-25
the DAS.
XR_ZEROX_CC+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system wide JP1-30 JP1-30
XR_ZEROX_CC- synchronization. Generated by the C-arm Interface Board. JP1-31 JP1-31
INTEGR_CC+ Synchronous signal for Detector Integrate period. JP1-33 JP1-33
INTERG_CC- Generated by the C-arm Interface Board. JP1-34 JP1-34
SYSRST_CARM+ Resets the C-arm Interface Board. JP1-39 JP1-39
SYSRST_CARM- JP1-40 JP1-40
EMERGENCY_CARM+ Removes power from the Scanner motor drivers and the JP1-42 JP1-42
HW_EMGNCY_RET- X-ray system JP1-43 JP1-43
XRAY_LIGHT+ Applies power to the AUX X-ray light outlet on the Power JP1-48 JP1-48
XRAR_LIGHT- Console. JP1-49 JP1-49
CONTINUITY 1 Emergency shutdown daisy chain. JP1-1 JP1-1
CONTINUITY 2 JP1-5 JP1-5
+15V Powers the Data Acquisition System. JP4-1 JP9-1
-15V JP4-3 JP9-3
15V_RET JP4-2 JP9-2
24V Generates +5VDC to power the digital section of the C- JP4-4 JP4-5 JP9-4
24V_RET arm Interface Board, and +7VDC for power to the Data JP9-5
Acquisition System.
28V Powers the stepper motors and fan. JP4-6 JP4-7 JP9-6
28V_RET JP9-7
1. Dist = Distribution Board
2. C-arm = C-arm Interface Board

Figure 15 shows the boards and assemblies that connect to the C-arm Interface Board
Figure 15 C-arm Interface Board High Level Interconnection Diagram
2.7.4 X-ray Source Assembly

This assembly is a single, integrated device consisting of the X-ray controller and the X-ray generator. It
provides pulsed power to the primary winding of the high voltage transformer in the X-ray Source section
and AC power to the primary winding of the filament transformer. It consists of a chassis mounted at the
rear of the lower C-arm, just behind the X-ray Source Assembly portion of the assembly. The XRC receives
split 240VAC power from the DIN Rail Power Distribution Module. It also receives command and timing
data from the C-arm Controller Board and it provides a line frequency timing signal and housekeeping
and diagnostic data to the C-arm Interface Board.
2.7.5 Interface
Figure 16 shows the interface connections between the C-arm Interface Board and the X-ray Controller
Assembly. Table 34 describes the interface signals and identifies the connectors and their pin assignments.
Note that the AC input power comes directly from the DIN Rail Power Module and connects to the X-ray
Controller Assembly.

Figure 16 C-arm Interface Board/X-ray Controller Assembly Interconnection Diagram
C-arm Connectors
Table 34 details the C-arm board connectors. The operation of the communication and debug connectors
are described in the subsequent sections. Connector pin signal descriptions are shown only for those
connectors that add understanding to the design.
Table 34 C-arm Board Connectors
Ref Type Source/Destination Signal Descriptions

JP1 4 pin MTE Not Implemented 1 – +3V
Aperture position pot 2 – V position
3 – -3V
4 – -3V
JP2 4 pin MFIT 2x2 Not Implemented Drum Motor windings:
Aperture motor Phase 1A
Phase 1B
Phase 2A
Phase 2B


JP3 34 pin IDC ribbon X-ray power supply Outgoing control signals:
XR_RLY_ON – Logic
XR_FREQ – 50 or 60Hz
XR_BEAMON – Logic
XR_ISET – sets beam current [3, 10ma}
XR_KV0/1 – sets beam voltage
{OFF, 80, 100, 140KV}
XR_WARM – Logic
Incoming status signals:
IBEAM – beam current pulses
KVPEAK – beam voltage pulses
XR_LIGHTON - Logic
XR_FAULT – problem in power supply
Incoming control signals:
ACLINE – provides synchronized
timing with the AC line
JP4 4 pin MFIT 1X4 Drum Controller Power 1 - 24V
2 - 24V_RET
3 - 24V_RET
4 - 24VM
JP5 Header 3 Fan Power 1 - 24VM
2 - NC
3 - 24VM_RET
JP6 25 pin Dsub Drum / Aperture Controller Communications:
Comm. RS232
Incoming signals:
Drum Segment
Drum Index
Drum Lock led
Drum Brass
Outgoing signals:
Sys Reset
AC line
JP7 8 pin Molex Power supply 1 – +15V
2 – 15V Return
3 – -15V
4 – 24V
5 – 24V Return
6 – 28V
7 – 28V Return
8 – n/c
JP8 50 pin IDC ribbon Distribution Board I/O Control and timing signals are delivered
to the C-arm board from the ComCon
board. Some of these signals are used on
this board while others are routed out
the JP9 connector.


JP9 40 pin IDC ribbon DAS Board Most of these signals routine through the
C-arm board from JP8
JP10 16 pin IDC ribbon Laser 1,2,15 – Laser power
3,4,16 – Return
Others - NC
2.8 X-ray Source Assembly

The X-ray Source (commonly referred to as the X-ray Source Assembly) consists of the X-ray tube, the X-
ray tube filament controller, the high voltage generator, and the sensing/feedback circuits that monitor the
X-ray tube voltage and beam current. This is a sealed unit and integrated together with the X-ray
Controller as a single, replaceable unit.
Note A thermal overload protector is installed in the source unit which will open
when the temperature limit is reached. The circuit resets automatically when
X-ray Source Assembly temperature returns to normal levels.
2.9 Data Acquisition System (C/Ci and W/Wi)

The Data Acquisition System (DAS) consists of a single board that has solid state (diode) detectors, the
integration circuitry along with the analog-to-digital conversion circuitry, and multiplexing circuitry to
select the outputs in a sequential fashion. The solid-state detectors are photodiodes with a Gadolinium
Oxide Sulfate (GOS) ceramic attached. X-rays striking the GOS ceramic chips are converted into photons
of visible light. The diodes sense this light and convert the light into a current, which is amplified in a
current to voltage converter. The converter output is applied to an integrator through analog switches. The
analog switches all operate in parallel and are turned on during the X-ray pulse. These switches are turned
off during the integrator hold time to prevent the introduction of integration noise into the data. The
turning on and off of these switches is controlled by the INTEGRATE signal under control of the software.
The signal from the detectors is then integrated with the final voltage obtained held in a sample/hold
circuit. This voltage is sampled, in photodiode order, by the multiplexor circuitry under control of the
software. The output voltage is then sent to the analog-to-digital conversion circuitry where it is changed
to a digital value usable by the software. The Detector Assembly is located in the upper end of the C-arm
directly above the X-ray source.
There is a lead radiation shield between the detector board and the cover to stop any X-rays that may get
through the detectors.
2.9.1 Solid State Detector

The Solid State Detector converts X-rays into signals that are applied to the Integrator/Multiplexor section
of the Detector Assembly board. Each Detector Assembly contains 128 high-resolution (C & W) or 64
high-resolution (Ci & Wi) detectors. Each detector is 2mm (or 4mm wide for Ci & Wi models) wide at the
detector. This equates to slightly less than 1mm resolution in an AP spine.
2.9.2 Integrator/Multiplexor Subsection

The Integrator/Multiplexor subsection of the Detector Assembly receives 64 (Ci/Wi) or128 (C/W) signals in
parallel from the Solid State Detector Boards. This subsection integrates and stores those signals and then
applies the stored signals to the Analog to Digital subsection of the Detector Assembly.

Switched signals charge integrating capacitors in this subsection during a given charging time. After the
charging time, the switched signals are turned off and the charges are held on the capacitors. Each
integrator is sampled, in photodiode order, by a multiplexor and the output sent to the Analog to Digital
subsection. At the end of sampling, all the integrating capacitors are discharged in parallel by shorting
them out with analog switches.
Each integrator has an additional input into which a test signal can be applied when there are no X-rays
present. This test signal is used to verify the operation of the integrators and multiplexors by the System
Diagnostics program on APEX V5.5 and higher, systems (D.A.S. Tab - Test Signal).
2.9.3 ADC Board Power

The ADC board receives +/-15V and + 7V from the C-arm Interface board. The +/-15V is passed through
this board to the Integrator/multiplexor board. It is also reduced to +/-12V by series regulators to power
hop-amplifiers and analog switches located on this board. The +/-15V also generates +/-5V to power the
analog-to-digital converter circuit. The +7V is reduced to +5V to power the digital section of this board.
The +5V is also passed on to the Integrator/Multiplexor board.
2.9.4 Analog To Digital Subsection

The Analog to Digital (ADC) subsection of the Detector Assembly converts analog signals received from
the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection to a digital format.
Analog signals from the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection are applied to differential amplifiers on the
ADC subsection. Outputs from the differential amplifiers are combined in a final multiplexor consisting of
four analog switches. The multiplexed signals pass through a programmable gain amplifier and summing
amplifier before being applied to an A/D converter. A one-volt fixed DC offset is inserted at the summing
amplifier to insure that no channels ever go negative. The A/D converter converts the analog signal into 16
bit parallel data for processing by a Digital Signal Processor.
The ADC subsection uses a Digital Signal processor to generate all the control signals necessary for the
Detector Assembly. This processor also provides a high-speed serial data link to the computer.
2.9.5 Detector Assembly Power

The Detector Assembly receives +/-15V and +5V from the C-arm Interface Board. The +/-15V is passed
through this board to the Detector subsection. It is also regulated to +/- 12V by series regulators to power
operational amplifiers and analog switches located on this board. The +/- 15V is also used to generate +/-
5V to power the analog-to-digital converter circuit. The +7V is reduced to +5V to power the digital section
of this board.

Figure 17 shows the interconnections between the Detector Assembly and the C-arm Interface Board.
Table 35 describes the interface signals and identifies the connectors and their pin assignments.

Figure 17 C-arm Interface Board/ Detector Assembly Interconnection Diagram
Table 35 C-arm Interface Board/ Detector Assembly

Signal Description C-arm Pin1 DA Pin2

STD+ Synchronous data to the Analog/Digital JP10-3 P1-12
STD- Converter board. JP10-4 P1-13
STCLK+ Synchronizes data to the Analog/Digital JP10-6 P1-15
STCLK- Converter board. JP10-7 P1-16
STFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-9 P1-18
STFRM- JP10-10 P1-19
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Analog/Digital JP10-12 P1-3
SRD- board. JP10-13 P1-4
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data from the Analog/Digital JP10-15 P1-6
SRCLK- Converter board. JP10-16 P1-7
SRFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-18 P1-9
SRFRM- JP10-19 P1-10
SYSRST_DAS+ Resets the Analog/Digital Converter board. JP10-21 P1-21
SYSRST_DAS- JP10-22 P1-22
INTEGRATE+ Data integration signal. Generated by the C- JP10-24 P1-24
INTEGRATE- arm Interface Board. JP10-25 P1-25
XR_ZEROX_DAS+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system JP10-27 P1-27
XR_ZEROX_DAS- wide synchronization. Generated by the C-arm JP10-28 P1-28
Interface Board.

Table 35 C-arm Interface Board/ Detector Assembly

Interconnection Descriptions (Continued)
Signal Description C-arm Pin1 DA Pin2

+15V JP10-32 P1-32
JP10-33 P1-33
-15V Powers the Data Acquisition System. JP10-36 P1-36

JP10-37 P1-37
15V_RET JP10-30 P1-30

JP10-31 P1-31
JP10-34 P1-34
JP10-35 P1-35
+7V
JP10-38 P1-38
JP10-39 P1-39
CONTINUITY Emergency shutdown daisy chain (grounded JP10-1 P1-1
on ADC board)
1. C-arm = C-arm Interface Board
2. DA= Detector Assembly
2.10 Data Acquisition System (A Model only)

The Horizon A Data Acquisition System (DAS) consists of a single board with a Solid State Detector
subsection and an Integrator/Multiplexor subsection. The Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) is on a
separate board located in the back of C-arm. The Solid State Detector Assembly is physically located
within the upper end of the C-arm. There is also a lead radiation shield between the detector circuit board
and the enclosure to stop any X-rays that might get through the detectors. The ADC board is located
within the rear downward slope of the C-arm.
2.10.1 Solid State Detector

The Solid State Detector subsection convert X-rays into signals that are applied to the Integrator/
Multiplexor subsection. X-rays striking detector crystals are converted into visible light. Solid State
photodiodes sense this light and convert the light into current, which is amplified in a current to voltage
converter. Output from the amplifier is applied to the Integrator through analog switches. The analog
switches all operate in parallel and are turned on during the X-ray pulse. These switches are turned off
during the integrator hold time to prevent integrating noise into the data. The turning on and off of these
switches is controlled by the INTEGRATE signal supplied from the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection.
Each solid-state detector has a capacity of 216 high-resolution detectors. This is equal to slightly less than 1
mm resolution in an AP spine.
2.10.2 Power
The Solid State Detector subsection receives +/-15V from the Integrator/Multiplexor subsection. Voltage
regulators, located on this board, convert this voltage to +/- 12V to power the amplifiers and switches.

Table 36 Integrator/Multiplexor Board/Solid State Detector Boards Interconnection Descriptions
Signal Description I/M Pins SD PINS

CHANNEL0 - See Note 1 See Note 2
CHANNEL215
INTEGA JP2-6, JP2-44 JP1-44, 6
INTEGB JP1-6, JP1-44 JP2-44, 6
INTEGC JP4-6, JP4-44
INTEGD JP3-6, JP3-44
INTEGE JP6-6, JP6-44
INTEGF JP5-6, JP5-44
+15V Powers the amplifiers and switches of the Solid JP1-JP6-47 JP1/2-47
State Detector boards. JP1-JP6-48 JP1/2-48
15V_RET JP1-JP6-3 JP1/2-3
JP1-JP6-4 JP1/2-4
JP1-JP6-5 JP1/2-5
JP1-JP6-43 JP1/2-43
JP1-JP6-45 JP1/2-45
JP1-JP6-46 P1/2-46
JP1-JP6-49 JP1/2-49
P1-JP6-50 JP1/2-50
-15V JP1-JP6-1, JP1/2-1, JP1/2-
JP1-JP6-2 2
Note 1. Refer to schematic drawing 140-0048-SD for connector and pin assignments
(cannot scope these signals).
2. Refer to schematic drawing 140-0050-SD for connector and pin assignments
(cannot scope these signals).
3. Note that the CHANNEL hardware numbers are reversed from the software
numbers. e.g. Hardware
CHANNEL0 = software CHANNEL215.
2.11 Integrator/Multiplexor Board

The Integrator/Multiplexor receives 216 signals in parallel from the Solid State Detector boards. The board
integrates and stores those signals, and then applies the stored signals in four groups of 64 signals in
parallel to the Analog to Digital board.
Switched signals from the Solid State Detector board charge integrating capacitors on this board during a
given charging time. After the charging time, the switched signals are turned off and the charges are held
on the capacitors. Each integrator is sampled by the multiplexor and sent to the Analog to Digital board.
At the end of sampling, all the integrating capacitors are discharged in parallel by shorting them out with
analog switches.
Each integrator has an additional input into which a test signal (TESTLVL) can be applied when there are
no X-rays present. This test signal is used to verify the operation of the integrators and multiplexors when
running the System Diagnostics program (DAS Tab - Test Signal).

2.11.1 Power
The Integrator/Multiplexor board receives +/-15V and +5V from the Analog to Digital board. The +/-15V is
passed through this board to the Solid State Detector boards. Voltage regulators, located on this board,
convert this voltage to +/-12V to power circuitry contained on this board. Analog and digital returns are
kept separate.

Figure 18 shows the interconnections between the Analog/Digital Converter board and the Integrator/
Multiplexor subsection of the Detector Assembly. Table 37 describes the interface signals and identifies the
interconnection connector and pin assignments.
Figure 18 Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Subsection Interconnection
Diagram

Table 37 Analog Digital Converter Board/Integrator Multiplexor Subsection Interconnection

Diagram
Signal Signal Description ADC Pins I/M PINS

(see Note 1)
MA1, MA2 IN0, IN1 Selects integrator JP4-1, JP4-3 JP7-1, JP7-3
MB1, MB2 IN6, IN7 channels to be JP4-13, JP4-15 JP7-13, JP7-15
MC1, MC2 IN2, IN3 returned to the JP4-5, JP4-7 JP7-5, JP7-7
MD1, MD2 IN4, IN5 Analog/Digital JP4-9, JP4-11 JP7-9, JP7-11
Converter.
MUX0- MUX3 IN8 IN9 JP4-17, JP4-19, JP7-17, JP7-19,
IN10, IN11 JP4-21, JP4-23 JP7-21, JP7-23
GPL1, GPL2 IN14, IN15 JP4-29, JP4-31 JP7-29, JP7-31
MGN1, MGN2 IN12, IN13 Controls integrator/ JP4-25, JP4-27 JP7-25, JP7-27
multiplexor gains.
LTCH1, LTCH2 IN16 Latches control signals JP4-33 JP7-33
on Integrator/ JP4-37 JP7-37
Multiplexor.
INTEG IN18 Controls signal JP4-35 JP7-35
integration.
DISC IN19 Discharges the JP4-39 JP7-39
integrating capacitors.
TSTEN IN20 Test signal used to JP4-41 JP7-41
verify the operation of
the integrators and
multiplexor when no
X-rays are present.
BB0 Integrator signals to JP2-2 JP11-2
BB1 the Analog/Digital JP2-6 JP11-6
BB2 Converter. JP2-10 JP11-10
BB3 JP2-14 JP11-14
+15V Powers the amplifiers JP1-5 JP10-5
15V_RET and switches of the JP1-4 JP10-4
-15V Integrator/Multiplexor JP1-3 JP10-3
board and powers the
Solid State Detector
boards.
+5V Powers the digital JP1-2 JP10-2
circuitry of the
Integrator/Multiplexor
board.
GND JP1-1 JP10-1

2.12 Analog To Digital Board (A Model Only)

The Analog to Digital (ADC) board converts analog signals received from the Integrator/Multiplexor
subsection of the Detector Assembly to a digital format. Analog signals from the Integrator/Multiplexor
subsection are applied to differential amplifiers on the ADC board in four groups of 64 channels. Outputs
from the differential amplifiers are combined in a final multiplexor consisting of four analog switches. The
multiplexed signals pass through a programmable gain amplifier and summing amplifier before being
applied to an A/D converter. A one-volt fixed DC offset is inserted at the summing amplifier to insure that
no channels ever go negative. The A/D converter converts the analog signal into 16-bit parallel data for
processing by a Digital Signal Processor.
The ADC board uses a Motorola 56000 Digital Signal processor to generate all the control signals necessary
for the detector array assembly. The same software can now be used with all Horizon systems. This
processor also provides a high-speed serial data link to the computer.
Note Jumper JP5, on the ADC board, must always be present on Horizon A models.

Figure 19 shows the interconnections between the Analog/Digital Converter board and the Integrator/
Multiplexor subsection of the Detector Assembly. Figure 38 describes the interface signals and identifies
the interconnection connector and pin assignments.
Figure 19 C-arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board Interconnection Diagram

Table 38 C-arm Interface Board/Analog/Digital Converter Board Interconnection
Signal Description C-arm Pin1 ADC Pin2

STD+ Synchronous data to the Analog/Digital JP10-3 P1-12
STD- Converter board. JP10-4 P1-13
STCLK+ Synchronizes data to the Analog/Digital JP10-6 P1-15
STCLK- Converter board. JP10-7 P1-16
STFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-9 P1-18
STFRM- JP10-10 P1-19
SRD+ Synchronous Data from the Analog/Digital JP10-12 P1-3
SRD- board. JP10-13 P1-4
SRCLK+ Synchronizes data from the Analog/Digital JP10-15 P1-6
SRCLK- Converter board. JP10-16 P1-7
SRFRM+ Synchronizes DSP Communications. JP10-18 P1-9
SRFRM- JP10-19 P1-10
SYSRST_DAS+ Resets the Analog/Digital Converter board. JP10-21 P1-21
SYSRST_DAS- JP10-22 P1-22
INTEGRATE+ Data integration signal. Generated by the C- JP10-24 P1-24
INTEGRATE- arm Interface board. JP10-25 P1-25
XR_ZEROX_DAS+ AC line zero-crossing signal used for system JP10-27 P1-27
XR_ZEROX_DAS- wide synchronization. Generated by the C-arm JP10-28 P1-28
Interface board.
+ 15V Powers the Data Acquisition System JP10-32 P1-32
JP10-33 P1-33
- 15V JP10-36 P1-36
JP10-37 P1-37
15V_RET JP10-30 P1-30
JP10-31 P1-31
JP10-34 P1-34
JP10-35 P1-35
+ 7V JP10-38 P1-38
JP10-39 P1-39
CONTINUITY Emergency shutdown daisy chain (grounded JP10-1 P1-1
on ADC board)
1. C-arm = C-arm Interface board
2. ADC=Analog/Digital Converter board.
2.13 Toroid Power Module and DIN Rail

The Toroid Power Module provides the AC voltage required by the Horizon Operator's Console computer
system and the Scanner. The module is located behind the pedestal at the foot end of the table and consists
of a Main Power circuit breaker, a Power On indicator, and a toroid AC line input isolation transformer.
The Main Power circuit breaker and the Power On indicator are located on the rear of the pedestal
enclosure. The isolation transformer is located inside the pedestal enclosure.

AC power from the Toroid Power Module is sent to the Scanner on a four-wire cable providing split 240
volts to the DIN Rail. From the DIN Rail, unfiltered AC is fed to the line filter and, from there, distributed
to various sections of the Scanner. Unfiltered AC is also fed to an AC outlet connector at the rear of the
Electronics Tray. This outlet provides AC power to the Operator’s Console power strip. A second
AC outlet provides unfiltered AC only while X-rays are being produced. This outlet is used in the factory
to give a visual indication of X-ray production during testing, and also for customers located in localities
where an external X-ray annunciator is required.
2.14 Filter Drum Assembly

The filter drum assembly is a quality control device that provides on-the-fly system calibration and system
integrity checks.
It consists of three (3) separate assemblies:
• filter drum
• aperture
• control board
Table 39 Switches
Switch Name Positions Notes

SW1 Reset Push to reset board
SW2 Tilt Closed < 25º ± 10º from
Horizontal
Table 40 Jumpers
Jumper Name Positions Description

W1 Sys.Reset Inserted: normal operation Removed: SYSRESET disabled
W2 Test Mode Inserted: test mode enabled Removed: normal operation
W3 Com Mode 1 – 2 : Normal operation
2 – 3 : Test port enabled
W4 Laser power 1 – 2 : 5V laser power
select 2 – 3 : 3V laser power

System Installation
3 System Installation
3.1 Preparing for an Installation
3.1.1 Site Considerations
For Hologic bone densitometer systems, the required installation procedures vary according to customer
site-specific existing conditions. For example, is the:
• new system the first and only bone densitometer on site?
• new system replacing another bone densitometer?
• new system being installed where one or more bone densitometer systems are already present?
To determine which procedures apply for any given site, refer to Hologic documents:
• CSD-0042-F19 Horizon Installation Checklist
3.1.2 Tool Kit

When installing the Horizon system, a tool kit that includes the following items should be available:
• Assortment of both flat-bladed and Phillips screwdrivers
• Assortment of needle-nose and diagonal cutting pliers
• Socket drivers (full set including 1/4-in., 3/8-in., 7/16-in.,
1/2-in. and 3/4-in.)
• Open-end wrenches (full set including 3/8-in., 7/16-in., 1/2-in.,
9/16-in., 5/8-in. and 3/4-in.) and an adjustable wrench
• Hex driver (Allen wrench) set including sizes 1/16-in., 5/64-in.,
3/32-in., 7/64-in., 1/8-in., 9/64-in., 5/32-in., 3/16-in., 7/32-in.,
and 1/4-in.
• 24 in. Digital Level (099-0269)
• Oscilloscope and digital multimeter
• Survey meter
• Measuring tape, approx. 3.7 m (12 ft)
• Beam alignment tool (TLS-05376)
• X-ray test pattern (099-0715)
• Step Wedge Penetrometer (099-0716)
• Aperture Alignment Pin (099-0111)
• X-ray Leakage Test Tool (TLS-02693)
• Filter Drum Alignment Key (TLS-01886)
• Aperture Alignment Block (TLS-02698)
• APEX Service Dongle (TLS-03999)
3.1.3 Required Documentation

The following documents are required:
• The Radiation Measurement Report (CSD-0042-F07)
• Horizon Service Manual (MAN-03310)
• FDA Form 2579

System Installation
3.1.4 Minimum Room and Doorway Size

Use Table 41 and Table 42 to prepare for the move. Refer to Figure 20 through Figure 26 for more details.
Table 41 Room Size
Model Minimum Room Size Minimum Doorway Width

C/Ci 2.44 m (8.0 ft) x 2.44 m (8.0 ft) 0.77 m (30.0 in.)
A & W/Wi 2.44 m (8.0 ft‘) x 3.05 m (10.0 ft) 0.77 m (30.0 in.)
Figure 20 Horizon A Space Requirements

System Installation
Figure 21 Horizon A Space Requirements for an External Console

System Installation
Figure 22 Horizon C, Ci Space Requirements

System Installation
Figure 23 Horizon W, Wi Space Requirements
The Operator's Console may be up to 45 ft (13.72 m) away from the Scanner, but since leakage and scatter
radiation levels are extremely low, it can be safely located in the same room with the Horizon unit.
When the X-ray is on, all personnel other than the patient should remain about 6 ft (2 m) away from the
scanner to avoid unnecessary exposure to scatter radiation. At the same time, never leave the system
unattended whenever a patient is on the table.

System Installation
Figure 24 Horizon A Dimensions and Clearances

System Installation
Figure 25 Horizon C, Ci Dimensions and Clearances

System Installation
Figure 26 Horizon W, Wi Dimensions and Clearances

System Installation
3.1.5 Arrange For Help

Moving the unit to its final location requires at least two able-bodied people to direct the machine, hold
doors, and lift heavy parts. Table 42 gives some representative weights.
Table 42 System Weights
Horizon-A Horizon-C/Ci Horizon-W/Wi

kg (lb) kg (lb) kg (lb)
Machine Weight 379 (835) 264 (583) 318 (700)
Packed Weight 562 (1238) 451 (995) 486 (1072)
Max. Patient Weight 227 kg (500 lb) 227 kg (500 lb) 227 kg (500 lb)
Area 1. 9 m x 1.1 m 1. 9 m x 1.1 m 1. 9 m x 1.1 m
6.3 ft x 3.5 ft 6.3 ft x 3.5 ft 6.3 ft x 3.5 ft
Floor Loading 244 kg/m2 215 kg/m2 220 kg/m2
(49.9 lb/ft2) (43.9 lb/ft2) (45 lb/ft2)
3.2 Hardware Installation

3.2.1 Inspect the System
Inspect for Shipping Damage
1. Inspect the exteriors of all crates and boxes for shipping damage.
2. Bring any damage discovered to the attention of the customer's Shipping/Receiving department
before proceeding.
Figure 27 Crated Unit (Horizon A)

System Installation
Figure 28 Crated Unit (Horizon C, Ci, W, and Wi)
3.2.2 Uncrate the Unit

Remove the unit from the crate as described below:
1. Cut the strapping that holds the packaging together.
2. Remove the cardboard cap by lifting it up and off.
3. Remove the cardboard sleeve by lifting it straight up and off. Be careful not to scratch the unit.
4. Remove the wooden table shelf and the boxes packed with the unit.
5. Remove and save the metal cross brace attached to the wooden table shelf. It is used later in the
installation.
6. Verify that the serial numbers on both crates and the scanner all match.
3.2.3 Inspect for Hidden Shipping Damage

Open all crates and boxes, and check for signs of hidden damage. Check the ShockWatch and Tip-N’-Tell
indicators for evidence of improper handling during shipment. Bring any damage discovered to the
attention of the customer's Shipping/Receiving department and the freight forwarders.
3.2.4 Take Inventory

The system is shipped in two crates. Using the checklist in Table 43, take inventory of the contents of all
crates and boxes, and confirm that all of the expected items have been received. Unused power cables and
circuit breakers are to be returned to Hologic. Report any discrepancies to the Hologic Sales Department.
Two System Backup disks are shipped with each system. One will be included with the scanner and the
other shipped in the crate with the PC. Mark the one shipped with the scanner and note that if the Serial
Numbers on the backup disks do not agree, the disk shipped with the scanner is the correct disk.
Table 43 Installation Inventory Check List1
[] Main Horizon Assembly [] Voltage Selection Kit

(100/120/220/230/240)
[] Printer Paper [] C-arm Assembly
[] Horizon User's Guide [] Tabletop Pad
[] Computer, Mouse, and Keyboard [] Hip Positioner

System Installation
Table 43 Installation Inventory Check List1
[] Laser or Business Inkjet Printer [] Knee (Block) Elevation Pad

[] Spine Phantom [] Foot Restraint
[] Flat Panel Monitor [] DVD R/W
[] Upper C-arm Assembly [] Pedestal Covers (Left)
[] Horizon Console [] Miscellaneous Hardware Box
[] Communication Cables [] System Backup Disks (2)
1. Quantities are one (1) each unless otherwise specified.
3.2.5 Measure Path to Final Destination

Contact the department receiving the unit and request that a representative show you the room where the
unit is to be installed. As you make your way from the loading dock to the room, measure all doorways
and openings including any elevators on which you must travel. Look for other obstacles (thresholds,
steps, sharp corners, etc.) which could cause a problem during transport. The Horizon system fits through
any doorway at least 30 in. (76.2 cm) wide and 81 in. (206 cm) high, and hallways 45 in. (114c m) wide. All
measurements are inside dimensions.
Short Doorway
If a Horizon system must be moved through a doorway that is not at least 81 in. (206 cm) high, the tabletop
can be removed. This allows the unit to fit through a doorway 79 in. (201 cm) high (inside dimension).
See Section 3.2.6 Remove Tabletop (If Necessary) on Page 58.
Narrow Hallway
If a Horizon unit must be moved through a hallway that is not at least 45 in. (114 cm) wide, the C-arm can
be removed. This allows the unit to fit through a hallway 29 in. (74 cm) wide (inside dimension). See the
instructions for removing the C-arm below.
3.2.6 Remove Tabletop (If Necessary)

Note It is not necessary to remove the tabletop if the doorway that the unit must go
through is at least 81 in. (206cm) high (top-to-bottom inside dimension).
Removing the tabletop allows the unit to fit through a doorway 79 in. (201cm)
high.
The tabletop can be removed before taking the unit off the pallet. Follow the procedure below to remove
the tabletop:
1. Remove the right-side table rail end cover Phillips screws (2) located on the right end). This cover
slides straight out the side.
2. Remove the table locking bracket located on the left side of the scanner (Figure 33).
3. Remove the head end pedestal covers. You will need to move the table to its extreme forward
position to access the center screws on each panel.
4. Remove the two screws (Phillips) that secure the tabletop in place (located on top of the table near
the rear center) and slide the table to the left, far enough to access the Table X-bearing blocks.
5. Remove the right-side, front endcap — 3 Phillips screws (Figure 29).
6. Remove the back Phillips screw from the right-side cover (of the table X-drive assembly) and slide
the cover out from the front.
7. Unplug the cable to the Motor Controller and Control Panel boards.

System Installation
8. Disconnect the stainless steel cable guard (2 screws) and remove the Table X-drive attachment
bracket (4 bolts and 2 nuts) (Figure 29).
9. Remove the left rail stop (1 counter sunk screw located next to the left-side, front endcap) to allow
the tabletop to be rolled off from the front.
10. Remove the 8 Allen screws (6mm) holding the table X-drive bearing blocks.
11. Remove the tabletop by carefully sliding it off the front of the unit (requires two people). Be careful
not to slide the bearing blocks off the rail.
12. Install the right angle bracket (found in the miscellaneous hardware kit) to hold the bearing blocks
and X-drive bracket in place while the scanner is moved (Figure 29). If this bracket is not available,
tape the bearing blocks, and X-drive bracket in place.
Figure 29 Table X Drive
3.2.7 Remove Horizon A Lower C-arm Assembly (If Necessary)

Note It is not necessary to remove the C-arm if the hallway that the unit must go
through is at least 45 in. (114cm) wide (side-to-side inside dimension).
Removing the C-arm allows the unit to fit through a hallway 29 in. (74cm)
wide.
The C-arm Carriage Assembly can be removed before taking the unit off the pallet. Follow the procedure
below to remove the C-arm:
1. Remove the 2 carriage-to-base shipping brackets (Figure 30 and Figure 31).
2. Remove the table locking bracket located on the left side of the scanner.
3. Move the table forward, and remove the X-ray Source Assembly cover. Then move the table back.
4. Remove the shield in front of the aperture/filter drum assembly.
5. At the front of the X-ray Source Assembly, remove the bracket that secures the X-ray Source
Assembly within the C-arm. Remove the X-ray Source Assembly (leave the Filter Drum Assembly
attached).
6. Disconnect the cables and NylaTrac™ mounting hardware from the c-arm carriage, and tape
NylaTrac and cables in the electronics tray of the scanner, so that they are secure.

System Installation
Figure 30 Shipping Bracket Location (Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi)
Figure 31 Shipping Bracket Location (Horizon A)

System Installation
7. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the Arm R Motor Controller board.
8. Disconnect the Y bearing blocks at the rear of the C-arm.
9. Remove the bracket that connects the C-arm carriage to the AY belt.
10. Lift the C-arm carriage up and out of the scanner unit.
11. Tape, or tie wrap, the bearing blocks in place to prevent them from sliding off the end of the rail.
3.2.8 Prepare the Horizon System for Moving (A, W, Wi)

Note Do not tilt the unit to the vertical position until the Table End Bracket is
properly installed (step 4 below).
Before the Horizon can be lifted to the vertical transport position, you must slide the table top to the right
and clamp it so it clears the floor when the unit is lifted to the vertical transport position.
To accomplish this, do the following:
1. Slide the tabletop to the right until it clears the table base panel.
2. Adjust the table end stop as pictured in Figure 32.
Figure 32 Table End Stop (Horizon A, W, Wi)
3.2.9 Move the Horizon System to Destination (All Models)

Remove System from the Shipping Pallet
Follow the procedure below to move the unit:

System Installation
1. Remove the four shipping brackets (Figure 33) as follows: loosen the screws that hold the auxiliary
caster bars (located under each bracket), remove the lag bolts and remove the bracket. Then,
re-tighten the screws that hold the auxiliary caster bar to the frame.
Figure 33 Shipping Bracket
Caution The screws that hold the auxiliary caster bars must be re-tightened (Figure 34)
to prevent the unit from dropping when moved.
Figure 34 Re-tighten Caster Bar Screws
2. Locate the two off-load ramps supplied with the unit. Ramps are attached to the shipping skid base
(Figure 35).

System Installation
Figure 35 Off-load Ramps (as packed)
3. Install the two off-load ramps. Ramps may be installed at the end of the skid (Figure 36), or the side
of the skid.
Figure 36 Ramps Installed at End of Skid
4. Move the unit down the ramp and away from the skid.

System Installation
5. If hallways to the destination room are wide enough to move the unit in the horizontal position,
move the unit and everything that shipped with it to the destination room. Continue the install by
following the procedure starting at Step 2 of Set the System in Place on Page 65.
If the unit must be placed in the vertical position, continue with the procedure in Stand System on Foot End
to Move in a Narrow Environment (A, W, Wi).
Stand System on Foot End to Move in a Narrow

Environment (A, W, Wi)
Warning: Do not tilt the unit to the vertical position until the Table End Bracket is
properly installed (step 4 below).
Before the Horizon can be stood up to vertical transport position, you must slide the table top to the right
and clamp it so it clears the floor when the unit is stood up to vertical transport position.
To accomplish this, do the following:
1. Slide the tabletop to the right until it clears the table base panel.
2. Adjust the table end stop as pictured in Figure 32.
3. Attach the caster bars and cross brace located in the separate shipping box (Figure 37).
4. Disconnect and move the C-Arm assembly from the head end of the table to the foot end of the table
and re-attach the shipping bracket to secure the X-ray Source Assembly to the frame (Figure 33)
Warning: Cross-brace must be installed before tipping the unit on its end.
Figure 37 Caster Bars Installed
5. With two people, tip the unit on end, Figure 38 and Figure 39 (cardboard, or equivalent, can be used
to protect the floor).

System Installation
Figure 38 Tipping Unit on End
Figure 39 Unit in Vertical Position
6. Remove the auxiliary caster bars.

7. Move the unit and everything that shipped with it to the destination room.
3.2.10 Set the System in Place

Set the System Down
Follow the procedure below to set up the unit:

System Installation
1. Carefully tilt the unit down.
Warning: The unit will feel heavier when putting it down than it felt when tipping it up.
This is because the pivot point is different. For safety purposes, two people must
be used to tilt the unit down.
2. Remove the caster bars and cross brace. Position the unit in its final location in the room.
3. Level the unit.
Caution This step is very important that the base of the system, the C-arm and table top
must be level to 0.1 degrees
4. Remove the 2 carriage-to-base shipping brackets (Figure 30 and Figure 31).

5. Horizon A, W & Wi — Remove the table end stop (Figure 32).
6. Remove the table locking bracket located on the rear of the scanner (Figure 31).
Install the C-Arm Assembly

The upper C-arm is not attached to the system when shipped and must be installed. On Horizon Model A
Systems Remove the counterweights attached to the C-arm before installing the C-arm.
There are (8) total counterweights in the C-arm assembly.
• Two (2) weights are mounted behind the A/D Converter PCB in the rear C-arm frame
• Four (4) are attached to the sides
• One (1) to the front of the cover assembly mounted over the Detector Assembly
• One (1) is attached to the inside of the C-arm bottom cover (Figure 40).
The detector cover weights and bottom cover weights are installed in factory. The rear weights are shipped
in a box separately and require installation after mounting the upper C-arm assembly to the lower C-arm
carriage.
Figure 40 C-arm Counterweights (Removed)

System Installation
Counterweights under A/D Converter

1. Mount the rear weights (Figure 41 and Figure 42).
Figure 41 Lower C-arm Counterweights
Figure 42 Lower C-arm Counterweights behind A/D Converter
Counterweights on Upper C-arm

2. Remove the weights from the Upper C-arm (Figure 43 and Figure 44).

System Installation
Figure 43 Upper C-arm weights — Front View
Figure 44 Upper C-arm Weights —Side View
3. Remove the counterweights (Figure 41) before installing the upper C-arm.
Note Models W and Wi have a box frame that must be installed to the C-arm
assembly. The C-arm is then attached to the box.
Install C-arm (C, Ci, W and Wi)

Warning: The C-arm is heavy. Hologic recommends that it be installed by two people.
To install a C-arm assembly:

System Installation
1. Carefully place the C-arm on the bottom bolts. Tilt the arm back slightly and slip the cables through
the openings and then tilt the arm forward until the front bolts are in place.
2. Put nuts and washers on all the bolts that attach to the scanner and tighten.
3. Install the cables.
4. Install T-beam end caps.
5. Using a digital level insure that the scanner is level (front to back and left to right).
Install Upper C-arm (A)
Follow the procedure below to install a Horizon A upper C-arm assembly:
Warning: Do not remove C-arm shipping brackets until done.
Figure 45 Horizon A C-arm Rear Cover
6. Remove the four (4) 1/2-in. bolts that lock the upper C-arm in place (left in place during shipment).
7. Remove the screws for the C-arm shoulder cover (Figure 45) that were left in place during
shipment.
8. Remove the cover from the upper C-arm.
9. Install the upper C-arm onto the lower C-arm (tilt the front of the upper C-arm up to slide it in
place).
10. Install the four bolts that secure the upper C-arm to the lower C-arm.
11. Re-install the detector assembly cover with all counterweights.
12. Install the two large counter weights in the back of the upper C-arm and the A/D board assembly.

System Installation
13. Connect the ribbon cable and laser power cables from the Lower C-arm to the upper C-arm, then
connect the cable from the A/D board assembly to the Detector assembly (Figure 46).
Figure 46 Upper C-arm Cables
Figure 47 Hardware that Holds Upper C-arm to Lower C-arm

System Installation
3.2.11 Level the Base Frame

Level the System Left-to Right to 0.0 Degrees
To level the system left-to-right, use an adjustable wrench to adjust the table feet as necessary.
1. Verify that the system is sitting in place in the area of normal operation.
2. Moving the C-arm as necessary, place the digital level left-to-right on the front rail at the foot end
and the head end of table (Figure 48).
3. Adjust the front table feet to level the rail to 0.0 degrees.
4. Place the digital level on the rear linear guide rail at the foot end and the head end of table.
5. Adjust the rear table feet to level the linear guide rail to 0.0 degrees left-to-right.
Figure 48 Level the System Left-to-Right
Foot End of Front Rail Head End of Front Rail
Foot End of Back Rail Head End of Back Rail
Level Cross-Frame to 0 Degrees

1. Move the C-arm to the foot end of the system.
2. Place the digital level on the cross table C-arm carriage rail (Figure 49).
3. Level the system front-to-back to 0 degrees +/- 0.0 degrees at the foot end.
4. Move the C-arm to the head end of the system.
5. Place the digital level on the right cross table C-arm carriage rail.
6. Level the system front-to-back to 0 degrees +/- 0.0 degrees at the head end.

System Installation
Figure 49 Level the System Front-to-Back

Foot End of C-arm Carriage Rail Head End of C-arm Carriage Rail
3.2.12 Level the Table

Level the Table Left to Right to 0.0 Degrees
To level the table left-to-right, use an adjustable wrench to adjust table feet as necessary.
1. Verify that the system is sitting in place in the area of normal operation.
2. Place the digital level on the center of the table (Figure 50).
Figure 50 Level the Table Left-to-Right
3. Adjust the table feet to level the table to 0.0 degrees.
Level Cross-Table to 0 Degrees

1. Place the digital level at the center of the table (Figure 51).
2. Level the table front-to-back to 0 degrees +/- 0.0 degrees at the center of the table.
3. Level the system front-to-back to 0 degrees +/- 0.0 degrees at the head end.
4. Place the digital level on the foot end of the table.
5. Level the system front-to-back to 0 degrees +/- 0.0 degrees at the foot end.

System Installation
Figure 51 Level the Table Front-to-Back

Center Foot Head
3.3 Horizon Toroid A/C Input Wiring

3.3.1 Check Power Line Voltage
Power Requirements
Hologic specifies that the Horizon be powered from a dedicated power with isolated, dedicated ground
lines.
Table 44 Power Requirements for all Horizon Models
Voltage Amperage Frequency Maximum Apparent Resistance

(VAC) (A) (Hz) (Ω)
100 16 50/60 0.32
120 14 50/60 0.32
230 8 50/60 1.28
Measure Line Voltage

Before plugging in the Horizon, measure the voltage (neutral to phase) with an AC voltmeter at the outlet
from which the unit will draw power. The measured voltage must be within ± 10% of the voltage shown
on the power label (located where the power cord attaches to the Toroid Power Module). The Toroid
Assembly is a step up/step down isolation transformer, which can be re-strapped to accommodate various
input voltages. See Figure 58 for the most common configurations of the isolation transformer.
There are two standards for conductor color-coding. The North American standard specifies the BLACK
conductor as LINE and the WHITE as NEUTRAL, while the International standard defines the BROWN
conductor as LINE and the BLUE as NEUTRAL.
Note Measure the potential voltage between ground and neutral at the wall outlet
that is being used to supply the system power. If the measured potential voltage
is greater than 250 mV (0.25 VAC) call Hologic Technical Support before
continuing.

System Installation
Figure 52 Toroid Mounting Location
Figure 53 Horizon A DIN Rail

System Installation
Figure 54 Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi DIN Rail
Table 45 Wire Connections from Toroid power Supply Assembly
Wire Color Label Connection

Blue SA-N SA-N on Din Rail
Black SB-H SB-H on Din Rail
Brown SA-H SA-H on Din Rail
Green/Yellow S1 TOP S1 TOP on Din Rail
Green/Yellow wire w/ring term Ground stud in tray
Caution Ensure all toroid power cable wires are clamped onto the conductors and not the
insulation jacket.

System Installation
3.3.2 Install A/C Input Power Connections
Note Installation Tip for Horizon Toroid Assembly Wiring

Remove the nylon nuts that secure the terminal blocks so that you can pull the
blocks towards you (Figure 47), making it much easier and faster to install the
required wiring. Replace the terminal blocks and nylon nuts to their original
positions before powering on the system.
If installing the system, locate input power kit and confirm you have the proper
Circuit Breaker for the site's A/C voltage, 100/120/220/230/240 (Table 46).
1. Install CB1 to the Toroid assembly using the four retaining screws. Orient the switch so that CB1-1
power on is in the up position.
2. Install the A/C input power cable and strain relief though the Toroid Base hole.
3. Attach the A/C Input Power ground to the Toroid Base earth ground using the Nut and Star
washers.
4. Attach the A/C Input Power wire Black (load) to TB1-1 matching with the Brown wire.
5. Attach the A/C Input Power wire White (Neutral) to TB1-2 matching with the Blue wire.
6. Connect the TB1-1 Brown wire to the input to CB1-2 (bottom connection).
7. Connect TB1-1 Blue wire to the input of CB1-1 (bottom connection).
Figure 55 Nylon Nuts

System Installation
8. Install the system cables (Section 3.3.3 Install Power Connection Jumpers with InRush Limiter ).
Figure 56 Main Power Wiring Configuration
Table 46 Circuit Breaker and Power Cables
Description Mains Power Kit Power Cable

240 VAC 8.3 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09335 CBL-01682
230 VAC 8.7 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09335 CBL-01682
220 VAC 9.1 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09335 CBL-01682
200 VAC 10 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09335 CBL-01682
120 VAC 15 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09333 CBL-01634
100 VAC 20 AMP 50/60 Hz ASY-09334 CBL-01883
3.3.3 Install Power Connection Jumpers with InRush Limiter

1. From the power kit, attach the neutral blue wire with spade terminal to the output top terminal of
the circuit breaker CB1-3 then attach to the TB2 1A input.
2. Attach the load brown wire labeled CB1 - 4 from the Inrush Limiter to the output top terminal on
the circuit breaker CB1- 4.
3. Attach the load Brown wire from the Inrush Limiter to TB2 input based on the input voltage, as
shown in the Tables 47 - 52.
4. From the power kit, attach the blue and the brown jumper wires to the TB2 inputs based on the
input voltage, as shown in Tables 47 - 52.
5. Confirm that the input voltage configurations are set up as shown in the diagram in Figure 58.

System Installation
Figure 57 Strain Relief Panel
Note These diagrams can also be found on the inside of the Toroid Assembly Cover.
Table 47 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Wire From To
Blue Circuit Breaker — Load Pin 1A — TB2
Brown TB2 Limiter Pin 7A — TB2
Brown Jumper Pin 3A — TB2 Pin 4A — TB2
Wire From To
Brown Inrush Limiter Pin 6A — TB2

System Installation
Wire From To
Wire From To
Wire From To
Blue Circuit Breaker — Load Pin 1 — TB2
Brown Inrush Limiter Pin 7 — TB2
Blue Jumper Pin 1A — TB2 Pin 4A — TB2
Brown Jumper Pin 3A —TB2 Pin 7A — TB2
Wire From To
Blue Jumper Pin 1A — TB2 Pin 4A — TB2

System Installation
Figure 58 Isolation Transformer Input Taps
For more detailed wiring diagrams, see ID-00123 (Horizon C/W/Ci/Wi) and ID-00128 (Horizon A).

System Installation
6. Replace the Toroid assembly side cover.

7. Attach the umbilical cable Console Power Cable to the top power receptacle in the electronics tray.
The bottom power receptacle is used in the manufacturing process to power X-ray On indicator
light.
Note The bottom receptacle can be used to power an external X-ray on annunciator
lamp at the customer site (if required by local regulations).
8. Route the Operator Console Communications Cable through the cable clamp block on the rear of
the Scanner.
9. Route the Operator Console AC Supply Cable through the cable clamp block on the rear of the
Scanner.
10. Route the system input A/C Supply Cable through the cable clamp block on the rear of the Scanner.
11. Replace the Foot End Pedestal base frame cover.
12. Replace the Foot End Pedestal middle telescoping and upper covers.

82
CPWR[1..8]
SIGNAL[1..50] CABLE, COM BUS 1 CABLE, C-ARM POWER

JP10 JP3 WHT +15V
2 1 GRN 15V RET
CBL-01426-XX (SEE SHEET 1 FOR OPTIONS) CBL-01737 3 2 CBL-01651 CSIG[1..50]
BRN -15V
4 3 RED 24V
CABLE, DC POWER
Figure 59
5 4 GRY 24V RET

6 To Computer To C-Arm 5 YEL 28V
7 6 BLU 28V RET
8 7 1 CBL-01878
9 8 JP1 2
10 3 CABLE, C-ARM SIGNAL EMI
11 4
12 5
13 To C-Arm 6
14 7
15 8
16 9
RED 22-3
RED JP6-1
BLK JP6-6
17 10
GRY 21-B
GRY JP6-4
WHT JP6-3
BLU JP6-9
RED JP6-2
18 11
System Installation
19 12
20 13
21 14
22 15
23 16
24 17
25 18
24V -
26 19
24V +
15(A) -
15(B) -
15(A) +
15(B) +
27 20
28 21
Multi DC 29 22
30 23
Power Supply 31 24
32 25
33 26
PWR-00071 34 27
35 28
36 29
37 ASSY, SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD 30
030-3129 38 31
GND
NEUTRAL
HOT
39 32
40 33
41 34
42 35
ASSY, DIN RAIL 43 36
44 37
45 38
NTC 46 39
RED 22-3 47 40
3 4 48 41
YEL 22-1 49 42
1 2 50 43
R22 44
VIO 22-A1 VIO ASSY P/N 140-0086 45
A1 A2 RED +24 46
GRY 21B GRY RED +24 1 JP6 SCHEM P/N 140-0086-SD 47
VIO TB21 WHT +15 (A) 2 48
GRY 24 RET 3 To Din Rail 49
ORN VIO 22-A1 4 50
GRY TB20 BLK 15 RET 5
6 OPNL[1..26]
BRN BLK1 ORN 22-A1 7
3 4 BLU -15 (B) 8
BLK BLK2 9
1 2 JP4 26
R19 25 CBL-01736
VIO GRY YEL 22-1 1 JP9 24
A1 A2 2 To Table 23 CABLE, OPER PNL, EMI SHEILDED
GRN\YEL 3 To Din Rail 22
GB18 GRN\YEL 4 21
5 20
BLU 6 19
NB17 BLK3 18
17
BLK4 16
NB16 BLU 15
14
JP11 13
BLK TB15 BLK JP7 JP5 12
1 11
BRN BRN 2 1 1 10
TB14 BRN 3 2 2 9
BLK1 4 3 3 8
BRN 5 4 4 7
F13 8 AMP BLK2 6 5 5 6
7 6 6 5
BRN
BLK3 8 7 7 4
3 4 9 8 8 3
BRN BLK4 10 9 9 2
BLU 1 2 11 10 10 1
GRN\YEL R12 GRN/YEL 12 11 11
AUX_LIGHT_AC[1..3] 13 12 12
ORN 12-A1 GRY
A1 A2 14 13 13
15 14 14
GB11 16 15 15
17 16 16
BLU 18 17 17
NB10 BLU 19 18 18
20 19 19
BLK BLK 20 20
BLU FH9 8 AMP
GRN\YEL
CONSOLE_AC[1..3] AY Motion TX Motion TY Motion W AND Wi MODELS ONLY
GB8
CBL-01734 CABLE, TABLE YY DRIVE SHIELDED
TY[1..20]
NB7
BLU
BLU NB6
BLK BLK
FH5 8 AMP CBL-01664 CABLE, TABLE XX DRIVE SHIELDED
TX[1..20]
Horizon C/Ci and W/Wi DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram
BRN BRN
FH4 8 AMP
FH3 8 AMP
CBL-01846 CABLE, ARM AY DRIVE
AY[1..20]
FH2 8 AMP CBL-01650 CABLE, X-RAY POWER

XRPWR[1..5]
GB1 GRN/YEL
BLK BLK
BLU H SUPRESSOR H
N N
G SSB G
BRN BRN
H SUPRESSOR H BLU
N N
G SSA G GRN/YEL
AC_IN[1..4]
PE GND STUD

CPWR[1..8]
SIGNAL[1..50] CABLE, COM BUS 1 CABLE, C-ARM POWER

JP10 JP3 WHT +15V
2 1 GRN 15V RET
CBL-01426-XX (SEE SHEET 1 FOR OPTIONS) CBL-01737 3 2 CBL-01651 CSIG[1..50]
BRN -15V
4 3 RED 24V
Figure 60
CABLE, DC POWER 5 4 GRY 24V RET

6 To Computer To C-Arm 5 YEL 28V
7 6 BLU 28V RET
8 7 1 CBL-01878
9 8 JP1 2
10 3 CABLE, C-ARM SIGNAL EMI
11 4
12 5
13 To C-Arm 6
14 7
15 8
16 9
RED 22-3
RED JP6-1
BLK JP6-6
17 10
GRY 21-B
GRY JP6-4
WHT JP6-3
BLU JP6-9
RED JP6-2
18 11
19 12
20 13
21 14
22 15
23 16
24 17

25 18
24V -
26 19
24V +
15(A) -
15(B) -
15(A) +
15(B) +
27 20
28 21
Multi DC 29 22
30 23
Power Supply 31 24
32 25
33 26
PWR-00071 34 27
35 28
36 29
37 ASSY, SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD 30
030-3129 38 31
GND
NEUTRAL
HOT
39 32
40 33
41 34
42 35
ASSY, DIN RAIL 43 36
44 37
45 38
NTC 46 39
RED 22-3 47 40
3 4 48 41
YEL 22-1 49 42
1 2 50 43
R22 44
VIO 22-A1 VIO ASSY P/N 140-0086 45
A1 A2 RED +24 46
GRY 21B GRY RED +24 1 JP6 SCHEM P/N 140-0086-SD 47
VIO TB21 WHT +15 (A) 2 48
GRY 24 RET 3 To Din Rail 49
ORN VIO 22-A1 4 50
GRY TB20 BLK 15 RET 5
6 OPNL[1..26]
BRN BLK1 ORN 22-A1 7
3 4 BLU -15 (B) 8
BLK BLK2 9
1 2 JP4 26
R19 25 CBL-01736
VIO GRY YEL 22-1 1 JP9 24
A1 A2 2 To Table 23 CABLE, OPER PNL, EMI SHEILDED
GRN\YEL 3 To Din Rail 22
GB18 GRN\YEL 4 21
5 20
BLU 6 19
NB17 BLK3 18
17
BLK4 16
NB16 BLU 15
14
JP11 13
BLK TB15 BLK JP7 JP5 12
1 11
BRN BRN 2 1 1 10
TB14 BRN 3 2 2 9
BLK1 4 3 3 8
BRN 5 4 4 7
F13 8 AMP BLK2 6 5 5 6
7 6 6 5
BRN
BLK3 8 7 7 4
3 4 9 8 8 3
BRN BLK4 10 9 9 2
BLU 1 2 11 10 10 1
GRN\YEL R12 GRN/YEL 12 11 11
AUX_LIGHT_AC[1..3] 13 12 12
ORN 12-A1 GRY
A1 A2 14 13 13
15 14 14
Horizon A DIN Rail AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram
GB11 16 15 15
17 16 16
BLU 18 17 17
NB10 BLU 19 18 18
20 19 19
BLK BLK 20 20
BLU FH9 8 AMP
GRN\YEL
CONSOLE_AC[1..3] AY Motion TX Motion TY Motion W AND Wi MODELS ONLY
GB8
CBL-01734 CABLE, TABLE YY DRIVE SHIELDED
TY[1..20]
NB7
BLU
BLU NB6
BLK BLK
FH5 8 AMP CBL-01664 CABLE, TABLE XX DRIVE SHIELDED
TX[1..20]
BRN BRN
FH4 8 AMP
FH3 8 AMP
CBL-01846 CABLE, ARM AY DRIVE
AY[1..20]
FH2 8 AMP CBL-01650 CABLE, X-RAY POWER

XRPWR[1..5]
GB1 GRN/YEL
BLK BLK
BLU H SUPRESSOR H
N N
G SSB G
BRN BRN
H SUPRESSOR H BLU
N N
G SSA G GRN/YEL
AC_IN[1..4]
PE GND STUD
System Installation
83
System Installation
Attach the Communications Cable to JP10 on the Distribution Board and the ground strap to the
grounding stud.
The ComCons on the Horizon use a new style of connector on both the ComCon and Signal Distribution
Board ends of the cable. The cable plugs directly into the ComCon on the PC end and the Signal
Distribution Board in the scanner.
Note Horizon systems currently ship with distribution board PCB-01057, which has
a PCIe connector for the umbilical cable. Some older Horizon systems shipped
with distribution board 140-0086, which requires Umbilical Distribution Board
Adaptor PCB-00683.
Figure 61 PCIe ComCon
Figure 62 Umbilical Distribution Board Adapter
Figure 63 Umbilical Cable Connector

System Installation
Figure 64 Umbilical Cable Connector with Old Connector
A P-Clamp is used as a strain relief for the cable on the back of the PC.
Figure 65 Umbilical Distribution Board Adapter Orientation and Umbilical Cable Routing
Note The adapter plug is not keyed.
Caution Do not misalign the Umbilical Distribution Board Adapter in the Signal
Distribution board slot as in the picture below. It can be inserted in the board off
by one set of pins in either direction. It will cause either non-operational system
or system that produces errors.

System Installation
Figure 66 Misaligned Umbilical Adapter on Signal Distribution Board
Caution SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

There are a number of safety precautions that MUST be observed when
servicing the systems.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Voltage levels that can injure or be fatal are present
through the systems. The line voltage (100, 120, 220, 230, 240 volts) is supplied
to the Toroid Assembly and the scanner. The X-ray source unit contains 140kV
as well as other AC and DC voltages.
Use caution when checking, calibrating, and troubleshooting. Always trip the
main breaker when replacing components.
X-RADIATION: Service personnel are required to wear a dosimeter. Do not
leave the system unattended in X-ray SURVEY (SURVEY mode).
ESD PRECAUTIONS: To prevent damage due to ESD (Electrostatic
Discharge), you must take precautions when handling components. Remove
any charge from your body by wearing an approved and properly grounded
wrist strap. Keep PCBs in their ESD protective bag until you are ready to
install them. Treat defective PCBs as new to prevent any additional damage.
3.4 Assemble the Horizon™ Control Desk

3.4.1 Introduction
This document details the procedure to install the necessary mounting hardware and assemble the
Horizon™ Control Desk.
This procedure consists of:
• Clearing an area for assembly
• Arranging the components in the approximate order of installation
• Assembling the console frame from bottom to top, hand-tightening all hardware to facilitate
alignment

System Installation
• Tightening the mounting screws

• Attaching the power strip to the console
• Plugging the power strip to an outlet
• Plugging in the printer and computer to the power strip
• Checking the printer and computer for proper operation
3.4.2 Intended Audience

The Horizon is designed to be installed by field service personnel trained on the Horizon family of
products.
3.4.3 Preliminary Steps

1. Clear an area for assembly.
2. Open the packaging (Figure 67).
Figure 67 Open Packaging
3. Arrange the components for a bottom to top installation (Figure 68).

System Installation
Figure 68 Arrange Components
4. Arrange the mounting hardware for convenient access (Figure 69).

Figure 69 Mounting Screws
5. Do a parts inventory (Figure 70 and Table 53).

System Installation
3.4.4 Hardware
Figure 70 Horizon Control Desk Components

System Installation
Table 53 Horizon Control Desk Parts List
Item Description Qty Part No

1 Frame 2 MME-00452
2 Base 1 MME-00453
3 Rear Brace 1 MME-00454
4 Shelf Support 2 MME-00455
5 Printer Shelf 1 MME-00456
6 Monitor Shelf MME-00457
Locking Caster Oxford # SH98453
7 Shepherd #PPA-5000-FB-B or Equivalent 2 MME-00458
Dynamic Load Rating = 75 lb
Caster Oxford # SH95675
8 Shepherd # PPA-5000-FB or Equivalent 2 MME-00459
Dynamic Load Rating = 75 lb each
9 Threaded Stem, Oxford # Sh002951 4 MME-00463
10 SE-05 3/8-16 X 1.50 or Equivalent
11 Label, # 280-0291, Operator Console 1 280-0291
12 Hardware Bag REF MME-00462
13A 1/4-20 X 0.50 Long, Pan PH Screw 8 MME-00462
13B 1/4-20 X 1.50 Long, Pan PH Screw 6 MME-00462
13C 1/4-20 X 2.25 Long, Pan PH Screw (Bottom) 2 MME-00462
13D 1/4-20 X 1.625 Long, SHC Screw (Top) 2 MME-00462
13E # 6-32 X .38 Long, Pan PH Screw 2 MME-00462
13F # 6 Internal Tooth L’Washer 2 MME-00462
13G 1" Square Tubing Cap, Black 4 MME-00462
13H 1 in. X 1-1/2 in. Rectangular Tubing Cap, Black 4 MME-00462
14 Chinese Label, # LBL-00309, Operator Console 1 LBL-00309
15 Scr, 4-40 X.375 in., Pan HD, SS 2 SCR-00301
16 Washer, Split Lock 4 220-0012
3.4.5 Assembly
Base
1. From the top side, attach the Base (Figure 71) to the left side of the Frame with two (2) of the six (6)
1/4-20 X 0.50 Long, Pan PH Screws (Figure 72).

System Installation
Figure 71 Base
Figure 72 Attaching the Base to the Left Frame
Note Assemble the console from bottom to top. Hand-tighten all mounting hardware
to facilitate alignment.
2. Attach the Base to the right side of the Frame with two (2) of the six (6) 1/4-20 X 0.50 Long, Pan PH
Screws (Figure 73).

System Installation
Figure 73 Attaching the Base to the Right Frame
Monitor Shelf
1. Place the Monitor Shelf on the frame of the computer stand (Figure 75).
Figure 74 Monitor Shelf
2. From the bottom, attach two (2) 1/4-20 X 1.50 Long, Pan PH Screws in the rear of the Monitor Shelf
(Figure 75).

System Installation
Figure 75 Monitor Shelf
3. Use the two (2) 1/4-20 X 2.25 Long, Pan PH Screws (Bottom) to attach the front Shelf Support
through the Monitor Shelf (Figure 76).
Figure 76 Shelf Supports
Rear Brace
4. With the 1/4-20 X 0.50 Long, Pan PH Screws, attach the Rear Brace to the frame (Figure 77).

System Installation
Figure 77 Rear Brace
Printer Shelf
1. Attach the printer shelf supports to the frame with the two (2) black hex bolts (1/4-20 X 1.625 Long,
SHC Screw [Top]) (Figure 78).
Figure 78 Alignment Bolts
2. Place the Printer Shelf on the frame, aligning the holes over the hex bolts.
3. From the bottom, attach the shelf with four 1/4-20 X 1.50 Long, Pan PH Screws (Figure 79).

System Installation
Figure 79 Printer Shelf
Attach Casters
1. Turn the control desk frame on its back.
2. Attach the fixed casters (MME-00459) to the rear of the stand (Figure 80).
3. Attach the locking casters (MME-00458) to the front (Figure 80).
Figure 80 Attach Casters

System Installation
Insert the End Caps

1. Insert the End Caps in the frame.
Figure 81 End Caps
Figure 82 End Caps Installed
Attach Power Strip to Rear of Control Desk

1. From the rear of the power strip, punch out the plugs covering the screw holes (Figure 83).

System Installation
Figure 83 Removing Plugs from the Power Strip
2. Attach the power strip to the console with the Scr, 4-40 X.375 in., Pan HD, SS and Split Lock
Washers.
Figure 84 Power Strip
3. Cover the screw holes with the plugs that were removed from the strip.
4. To the right and left of the power strip, attach the # 6-32 X .38 Long, Pan PH Screws and # 6 Internal
Tooth L’Washers to the rear brace (Figure 85).

System Installation
Figure 85 Attaching Pan Screws
5. Plug the power strip to the power cable from the Horizon system.
6. Place the PC on the console stand and attach cables.
7. Plug in the printer and computer to the power strip.
Figure 86 Plug in Printer and Monitor

System Installation
Figure 87 Assembled Console
Place Hardware and Dress Cables to Console

Dress Cables
1. Wrap all cables with Tie Wraps (Figure 88 and Figure 89).
Figure 88 Wrap Cables

System Installation
Figure 89 Tie Communications Cables
1. Connect the signal cable from the umbilical cable to the computer communication card (Comm
Con).
2. Plug in the input power from the umbilical cable to the power strip on the control desk.
3. Attach the system power cable to the facility power at the wall.
4. Apply power to the system, place CB1 power switch in the up (ON) position.
5. Turn on the printer and install ink printer heads and or cartridges with paper.
6. Turn on computer and verify it boots normally and stops at the login screen.
7. Log in as User QDR and verify that the system turns on with the launch of the APEX application.
3.4.6 Input A/C Line Checks

After plugging in the instrument and switching on the main breaker and instrument power on the Control
Panel, measure the voltage at the power strip located at the rear of the Operator’s Console with a digital
voltmeter set to measure AC volts.
Note The voltage should be between 110 VAC and 130 VAC. If the voltage is out of
this range, recheck the voltage at the wall outlet, and the strapping of the
isolation transformer as shown in Figure 55
Conduct the Input AC Power Checks detailed in Figure 90.

System Installation
Figure 90 Input AC Power Checks Checks
Input AC Power Checks

QDR Series Bone Densitometers
Customer Name:
System Serial Number:
Use this form for:
x System Installations
x System Relocations
x After Site Remodeling or Rewiring
x Power-related Image Artifacts (Banding/Horizontal Lines in Image)
Notes:
Brown wire = Phase
Blue wire = Neutral
Green/Yellow wire = Ground
DIN Rail Measurements are made at inputs to Surge Suppressor A
Dedicated Circuit: (Y/N)
Wall outlet measurements:
Electrical Outlet Measurements Acceptable Range Measured
Phase to Neutral 108 – 132 Volts A/C
Phase to Ground 108 – 132 Volts A/C
Neutral to Ground < 250 millivolts A/C
DIN Rail Measurements - System Idle (not scanning):

DIN Rail Measurement Acceptable Range Measured
Blue to Green/Yellow < 2 Volts A/C
Brown to Blue 108 – 132 Volts A/C
DIN Rail Measurements – System Active (QC Scan):

DIN Rail Measurement Acceptable Range Measured
Blue to Green/Yellow < 6 Volts A/C
Brown to Blue 108 – 132 Volts A/C
Brown to Blue 59.8 – 60.2 Hertz
Test performed by:

Sign Name: __________________________________________________________
Date of Test: / /

System Installation
3.5 System Alignment and Calibration

3.5.1 Summary of Procedure
This summary of the installation, alignment and calibration procedure refers to detailed procedures
elsewhere in this manual.
1. Perform all table alignment checks and adjust if necessary
2. Check belt tension of all belts, adjust if necessary
3. Calibrate all motors in this order: TZ, AY, TY, TX, AR
4. Perform initial leakage survey
5. Perform Y-axis (side-to side) X-ray beam alignment:
a. Install X-ray beam alignment tool.
b. Set aperture to 7 (does not apply to fixed aperture systems).
c. Install aperture alignment pin and block.
d. Loosen securing hardware before turning adjustment screws.
e. Adjust for maximum amplitude and flatness of X-ray beam.
f. Tighten securing hardware
g. Re-check X-ray beam amplitude and flatness after tightening.
h. Remove X-ray beam alignment tool, aperture pin, and block.
6. Perform X axis (front-to-back) X-ray beam alignment
7. Perform aperture calibration
8. Check HVPS/S (Tank) For Radiation Leakage
9. Perform laser positioning offset check
10. Check A/D gain, adjust only if necessary
11. Perform lateral alignment test (A systems only)
12. If listed on the Sales Order, install any research option keys or additional research protocol software
(HP Whole Body)
13. Perform detector flattening (Bigflat)
14. Perform one QC Scan on Spine Phantom (All Systems).
15. Perform the additional BCA Calibration Scans and Tabletop Radiographic Uniformity (Airscan)
Test (A and W systems only), (A, W and Wi)
16. Perform Scan Thickness C/Ci W/Wi
17. Perform Scan Thickness A
18. Calibrate for Area, BMD, and BMC (Field Service Calibrations Utility)
19. RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database
20. Test all scan types and scan modes
21. Perform Scatter and Patient dose survey
22. Perform QC Scan
23. Radiation measurement report
24. Complete Fan Beam Cross-Calibration (if required)
25. Perform Fan Beam Cross-Calibration New or Additional System
3.5.2 Verify Table Alignments

Start APEX Software in Service Mode
Follow the procedure below to cable the system:
1. Log on as Field Service user.

System Installation
2. Exit the software by clicking the Exit button and selecting the Exit QDR without shut down?
option and then clicking the OK button.
Figure 91 Exit the Software
3. Insert the dongle (if necessary), click My Computer and then double-click on Default (C:).
4. In the Search Results window, double-click on the QDR folder. Double-click on the Utilities folder.
Locate the icon for the Service Utility and drag it to the desktop. Close the Search window and then
double-click the Service icon on the desktop. The software will now be restarted in service mode.
Check Table Alignment

Note In order to use this function, the user must be a Hologic trained Field Service
Engineer with a updated service dongle attached to the computer. Otherwise a
temporary key must be issued by Hologic Technical Support Help desk for a
service option valid for maximum of two weeks.
To check the table alignment, perform the following procedure:
1. Using a measuring tape, and referring to Figure 92, check the following:
• Distance from the edge of the table to the back of both T-rails (A dimension).
• Distance between the T-rails (front and rear).
• Gap from the edge of the table bracket (left side) to the rail.
2. Record all the measurements.
3. Facing the front of the system, gently push the foot end (left side) of the table. The table should
move away from, and then back, to its original position.
4. Check the A dimension and the bracket-to-guide rail gap again. Compare them to their original
values.
5. If all the measurements are within specification, the table is properly aligned. If the measurements
are not within specification, go to the Aligning Table section below.

System Installation
Figure 92 Table Alignment

+/- .06”
63.125”
FRONT & REAR
+/- .25”
“A” “A”
.25” +/- .09”
Table Alignment Procedure

After you have taken the measurements in the Checking Table Alignment section, use the procedures
below to align the table.
Note if both the “A” dimension and the bracket-to-guide rail gap are out of
specification, you should recheck the measurements after performing the first
adjustment.
Table Edge to T-Rail (A Dimension) Adjustment

To change the A dimension, do the following:
1. Remove the outer and inner covers from the right pedestal.
2. Loosen the four bolts fastening the top of the pedestal and the four bolts fastening the bottom of the
pedestal (Figure 93).

System Installation
Figure 93 Pedestal
3. Adjust the table so the A dimension is within the specification.

4. Tighten the bolts and check the table alignment again.
5. If the alignment is within the specification, replace the pedestal covers.
6. If you still note a change in the A dimension, continue with Steps 6 and 7 of this procedure:
a. Make sure the upper and lower brackets are securely fastened to the upper and lower frames.
b. If the brackets are secured to both the upper and lower frames, the brackets may not be securely
fastened to the pedestals.
c. If the upper and or lower brackets and pedestals assemblies are loose, removal of the pedestal
assembly from the table is required to re-secure the upper and lower bracket screws.
d. The upper and lower brackets are attached to the pedestals with four(4) 6 mm flat-head Allen
screws.
e. Apply a small amount of Loctite to the threads and firmly re-tighten the bracket to pedestal
screws.
f. Remount the pedestal on the upper and lower frame assemblies but do not fully tighten the
mounting bolts and or nuts at this time.
Front to Back T-Rail and Table Edge/Rail Gap Adjustment
Note The source and detector should be properly aligned. If system components are
out of alignment, adjust using the procedure detailed in Front to Back T-Rail
and Table Edge/Rail Gap Adjustment.
To adjust the front-to-back T-Rail dimensions and table edge-to-rail gap:
1. Remove the outer and inner covers from the left pedestal.

System Installation
2. Loosen the four bolts fastening the top of the pedestal and the four (4) bolts fastening the bottom of
the pedestal.
Note Before adjusting the distance between the rails, make sure the upper and lower
brackets are securely fastened to the pedestal. Refer to Steps 3 - 5 of the previous
section (Aligning Table) and then go to the next step.
3. Adjust the distance between the T-rails and the table edge-to-rail gap and tighten the bolts.
4. Install the pedestal covers that were removed in Step 1.
Perform C-arm Parallelism Adjustment (Horizon A Systems Only)

Note Horizon A systems are manufactured with tooling that establishes the
alignment of the upper and lower C-Arm parallelism. If components are
misaligned, adjust them using the procedure detailed in Perform C-arm
Parallelism Adjustment (Horizon A Systems Only).
1. Remove the tank cover. Use a digital level to measure and record the angles of the lower c-arm
front-to-back (cross table).
2. Remove the upper C-arm cover and the weight hood covering the detector assembly.
3. Repeat the measurements on the detector assembly cover front-to-back (cross-table) direction, and
record the angles again.
4. If the angles measured on the detector cover front-to-back (cross-table) vary by more than 0.1
degrees from those found on the lower C-arm, perform the remaining steps in this procedure until
the lower C-arm angle variation is 0.1 degrees or less from that on top of the detector cover.
Note If making an adjustment, make sure that the detector also stays angled at 0.1
degrees or less from head to foot on the detector cover, and that no twist is being
applied to the C-arm.
5. Rotate the C-arm until the center of gravity for the upper C-arm is over the lower C-arm
(approximately 60 degrees rotated).
6. Locate the six (6) 1/4 in. upper C-arm attachment bolts (three (3) on each side). Loosen only two on
each side so that the C-arm can pivot on the remaining screw. Move the C-arm until it is parallel to
the lower C-arm assembly using the digital level to measure the front-to-back and head-to-foot
angles.
7. Tighten all the bolts when done.
8. Adjust the table top in the A dimension (Figure 92). SeeTable Edge to T-Rail (A Dimension)
Adjustment on Page 104.
3.5.3 Belt Tension

Check Belt Tension
Check for proper tension on the AR, AY, TX and TY motor drive belts. Perform the tension adjustment for
any belt that is loose as described below. If any belt needs adjustment, you must perform motor calibration
on all system motors after adjusting the belt. Refer to Section 9.0.1 Motor Calibration on Page 380 section of
this manual for the procedure.
Adjust Belts (if necessary)

Adjust Arm R Belt Tension
1. Loosen the belt tension block (two 1/4-in. bolts).
2. Check to see if the spring tension is correct. If not, adjust to 7/8 in.
3. Tighten the tension block bolts.

System Installation
Adjust Table X Belt Tension

1. At the encoder end of the belt, loosen the tension spring and tensioning nut.
2. Tighten the tension nut so that the spring is compressed to 7/8 in. The bracket cutout can be used as
a measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush with the bracket cut).
3. Tighten the two mounting bolts holding the tension block.
Adjust Table Y Belt Tension
1. At the encoder end of the belt, loosen the two bolts holding the tension block.
2. Install the tension spring and tensioning nut.
Adjust C-arm Y Belt Tension
1. Move the C-arm to the center of the table.
Caution Do not move the C-arm or the table more than 1 in./second with the power off.
2. Turn off the Horizon system computer power and main circuit breaker on the rear of the foot end
pedestal.
3. Remove the Electronics Tray covers.
4. Loosen the two mounting bolts holding the belt tension block.
5. Adjust the tension nut so that the spring is compressed to 7/8 in.
3.5.4 Motor Calibration

Determine the Calibration Sequence
.
Note Proper calibration of the motors depends upon other motor calibrations. You
must calibrate motors in the following order: TZ, AY, TY, TX, AR, and
Aperture. Proper motor calibration depends on all motors always being
calibrated in the order shown.
The motor controller board control and drive the table and C-arm movements. Calibrate motors in the
following order: AY, TY, TX.
Use Table 54 to determine the calibration procedures you need to perform for each Horizon model.
Perform the calibration procedures identified for each motor (√) in order from left to right.
Table 54 Calibration Procedures
Model TZ AY TY TX AR
A √ √ √ √ √
1
W NA √ √ √ NA1
Wi NA1 √ √ √ NA1
C NA1 √ NA1 √ NA1
Ci NA1 √ NA1 √ NA1
1. Not applicable to the system.

System Installation
Perform the Calibration

1. Log into Windows as field service or admin user.
2. Exit APEX without shut down and launch APEX in Service Mode (with service dongle if required).
3. From the Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > System Diagnostics.
4. Select the tab for the motor you want to calibrate.
Table 55 shows the position range specifications and resolutions for each motor.
Table 55 Motor Position Range Specifications and Resolution
Motor Range (in encoder ticks)

TZ 325 ± 2 on the lower left and lower right
AY 3750 ± 5
TY 3750 ± 5
TX 1000 ± 5
AR 250 ± 5
Note Perform the motor calibration in the order shown below. In the Tests section
click Calibrate. See the instructions for each motor.
Some motor calibration changes are not applied until the system is re-booted.
Caution A fully power cycle of the system is required after performing TZ motor
calibration and after performing aperture motor calibration.
Calibrate TZ
Check Calibration Values
1. From the Hologic Main Window, click Utilities.
2. Click Service Utilities.
3. Select System Diagnostics. Select the Tz Motor tab.
4. Place SW6 (Figure 1) on the Tz motor driver board in Service mode.
Use the up/down service switches to move the pedestals to the lowest position.
Caution Drive both pedestals at the same time. If the pedestals are not synchronized, the
board will stop functioning.

System Installation
Figure 94 SW6 on the Tz Motor Driver Board
5. Observe the encoder counts on the diagnostics display.
Caution The expected travel of the motors is 22.9 cm. Enter the actual measure travel
distance on the calibration screen.
Use a metric ruler to carefully measure the travel distance of the table. This is a
critical measure for proper system function.
Adjust the Encoders
1. Observe the encoder count on the diagnostic page for the right encoder.
2. Adjust the right string encoder until the position reads 325 +/- 2.
3. On the Tz PCB, disconnect the right string encoder connector (J-9).
4. Move the left string encoder connector from J-7 to J-9.
5. Observe the detector counts on the diagnostics display.
6. Adjust the left string encoder until the value is 325 ± 2 of the set value the right string encoder was
set to in Step 5.
7. Move the left string encoder connector back to J-7.
8. Reconnect the right string encoder to J-9.
9. Use the up/down service switches (SW2 and SW3) to move the pedestal to a position at least one 1
in. above the lowest position.
Note No red LEDs on the Tz motor driver PCB should be illuminated
10. Set the Service switch (SW6) back to Normal position.

Reset Switch to Normal and Verify Limits
11. Set SW6 on the TZ motor driver board to the Normal position.
12. Click Calibrate.
13. At the conclusion, the program will prompt for details similar to the text below:
set_table_calibration=325,2664,325,2668

System Installation
calibrate_position=10,1000,1000,819,50000,500,500,3494
pos_limit_position=182784
neg_limit_position=0
The four values for the set table calibration are, respectively:
• the left pedestal lower and upper encoder limits
• the right pedestal lower and upper encoder limits
the left lower and right lower values need to be 325 ± 2 counts.
Adjust the Encoder if it Exceeds Specifications
Caution Be sure to restart the software in Service Mode after calibrating the aperture, so
the software can access the new data file. If the system is not rebooted, the
software will not be able to position the pedestals correctly.
Turn off the Table and Restart
1. Exit the application with shutdown.
2. Cycle the power at the rear of the table on CB1 Off and then back On.
3. Restart the computer.
4. Log in as Field Service.
Note There should be no red LEDs on the Tz motor driver PCB.

If red LEDs are on, use the up/down service switches to move the pedestals to
the top of travel and back down to the bottom of travel and then set the pedestals
to position 1 in. above the lowest position.
Caution Ensure that the Tz PCB is not in Service Mode.
Calibrate AY (Horizon A, W)
Caution To ensure correct C-arm travel, ensure that the lower carriage frame and AR
Motor cover is in place before performing AY Calibration.
1. With AY at the left mechanical stop (Figure 95), click Cancel.

Figure 95 Click Cancel at Left Mechanical Stop
2. Verify that the starting position is correct (3750 ± 5).

System Installation
Note To verify the starting position at the first mechanical stop:

1. Reveal the calibration screen with the encoder position by moving the screen
on top that displays the drive to the mechanical stop, or
2. Hit Esc when you reach the mechanical limit to leave the calibration routine
and reveal the screen identifying the outer limit.
3. Click Calibrate (Figure 4).

Figure 96 Calibrate
4. When AY reaches the right mechanical stop, click OK (Figure 5).

Figure 97 Click OK at Right Mechanical Stop
The program moves the C-arm and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive
and negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form Y
= Intercept + Slope * X.
5. If the two slopes are within 0.3 of each other (Figure 6), click Continue.
Caution If the slopes are not within the specified range:

1. Check that the encoder is properly attached to the mounting bracket and
coupling.
2. If the encoder is properly connected, Check the encoder.
For encoder adjustments, see Adjust the Encoder if it Exceeds Specifications on
Page 110

System Installation
Figure 98 AY Motor Calibration Scan
The Table (AY Motor) Calibration dialog box displays the calibration parameter values.
6. Check that the parameters meet specifications. For more information, see MOTOR$AY Calibration
Parameters.
The last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 3750 ± 5 ticks. To adjust this
value, refer to AY Calibration Parameters on Page 112.
7. Click Save.
Note Because the encoder is underneath the X-ray Source Assembly, adjusting it can
be counter-intuitive.
1. For example, if a value of 3770 appears (20 ticks above the correct calibration
position at the left physical stop), move the C-arm all the way to the right.
2. If the value on the right is 500, adjust it to 480 to reduce the corresponding
value on the left stop.
3. Hit Calibrate to move the C-arm to the left stop. The value should be
reduced by 20 ticks.
AY Calibration Parameters
Values are separated by commas within calibration fields.motor_direction determines whether the
positive step direction is the reverse of the direction of increasing encoder values. The value is 0 if the
direction is not reversed and 1 if the direction is reversed. This value is set from the corresponding
parameter in the MOTOR_XX.PRO file and is a constant for each motor. The direction of increasing
encoder values must agree with the system coordinates. The positive step direction is set by the wiring
harness for the stepper motor.
calibrate_position has eight values:
(1)Tolerance. The position tolerance for absolute moves in encoder ticks. The calibration program sets
this field to the value found in the corresponding calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_XX.PRO file.
(2,3)NumberOfSteps,StepDistance. The number of motors steps corresponding to the step distance in
µm. The ratio of these two numbers determines the step size (41187/2288  18 µm). The calibration
program sets these fields to the values found in the corresponding calibrate_position fields in the
MOTOR_XX.PRO file. These values are a property of the mechanical design of the system and should
never change.

System Installation
(4,5)NumberOfTicks,TickDistance. The number of encoder ticks corresponding to the tick distance in

µm. The ratio of these two numbers (61339/209  293 µm) determines the encoder calibration. These
numbers can change from calibration to calibration, however, the ratio should remain approximately the
same.
(6)EncoderOffset. The value subtracted from the encoder readback to set the origin of motion. The origin
of AY, TY, and TX motion is the extreme right mechanical stop. This value should be the same as the
NegLimit value.
(7,8)NegLimit,PosLimit. The encoder readings for the negative (right) and positive (left) mechanical stops.
pos_limit_position is the limit of motion, in µm, in the positive direction.
neg_limit_position is the limit of motion, in µm, in the negative direction.
Note Because the encoder is underneath the X-ray Source Assembly, adjustment can
seem counter-intuitive. When we perform calibration, pressing Esc as the
C-arm travels left should stop it at 3750 ± 5.
If, for example, the C-arm stops at 3770, 20 stops greater than it should be, we
need to send the C-arm all the way to the right to determine where it stops.
If the C-arm stops at 500 on the right, we need to reduce the travel by 20 to 480.
We then must recalibrate, press Esc as the C-arm travels left, and then check the
left stop once again to see if the C-arm has stopped at 3750 ± 5.
Calibrate TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi)

Caution If installing a whole-body system in a room that is less than 10 ft wide, to
calibrate a TY Motor,
1. Remove the two screws attaching the AY bracket to the table top.
2. Calibrate as normal.
The bracket will hit the end stops to complete the Calibration Process. Failure to
do this will cause the table to be driven into the wall.
The TY motor moves the table to the outer left mechanical stop.
1. When the TY motor reaches the outer left mechanical stop, click Cancel and verify that the starting
position is correct (3750 ±5).

Figure 99 Click Cancel when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop
2. Start Calibrate again (Figure 100).

System Installation
Figure 100 Calibrate
3. When TY reaches the left mechanical stop (Figure 101), click OK.
Figure 101 Click OK when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop
4. When TY reaches the right mechanical stop (Figure 102), click OK.
Figure 102 Right Mechanical Stop
The Motor Calibration Scan screen is displayed.

The program moves the C-arm and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive and
negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form
Y = Intercept + Slope * X.

System Installation
Figure 103 TY Calibration Plot
6. If the slopes are not within the specified range:

a. Check brackets or encoder coupling for proper connection.
b. If the brackets and encoder coupling are connected correctly, check the encoder.
The Table (TY Motor) Calibration dialog box displays the calibration parameter values.
7. Check that the values meet specifications.
The values for the motor_direction, calibrate_position, pos_limit_position and neg_limit_position fields
are determined for MOTOR$AY.
The last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 3750 ± 5 ticks. Adjust this value if
necessary (Adjust the Encoders on Page 109).
8. Click Save.
Calibrate TX
The TX motor centers the table and C-arm.
1. Select the TX Motor tab.
2. Click Calibrate.
3. A dialog box prompts moving the C-arm to 0° degrees (Figure 13).
Figure 104 Motor$TX Calibration
Caution The arm must be at 0°.

System Installation
Figure 105 Move C-arm to 0 Degrees
Note This message only applies to Horizon A systems. Use a digital level to set the C-
arm to 0° ± 0° for the A systems.
Ignore this message for other models.
4. Click OK.
5. When the TX motor reaches the outer mechanical limit, click Cancel (or press Esc) and verify that
the starting position is correct (1000 ±5).

6. Start Calibrate again and when TX reaches the outer mechanical limit (Figure 13), click OK.
Figure 106 Outer Mechanical Limit
The program moves the table and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive
and negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form

System Installation
Figure 107 TX Calibration Plot
8. If the slopes are not within the specified range,

b. If the brackets and encoder coupling are connected correctly, replace the encoder.
The MOTOR$TX Calibration dialog displays calibration parameter values.
9. Check that the values meet specifications. The values for the motor_direction, calibrate_position,
pos_limit_position and neg_limit_position fields are determined as described for MOTOR$AY. The
next-to-last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 1000 ± 5 ticks.
10. Click Save.
Calibrate AR (Horizon A)
Confirm that the table is level front-to-back.
Caution Confirm that the table is level front-to-back before calibrating MOTOR$AR.
Unlevel tables cause positioning tolerance errors on whole body, lateral, and
IVA scans.
1. Remove the table pad.
2. Place the digital level on the table at the foot end. The digital level
3. value must be 0.0°.
4. Move the level to the head of the table.
5. Confirm that the level is still at 0.0°.
If the level results check is not 0.0 degrees, check that the:
a. system base frame, head-to-foot rails are at 0.0 degrees
b. C-arm cross table arms at the foot end on the left side measure 0.0 degrees
c. head end on the right side measures 0.0 degrees.
Continue the Calibration Procedure
The program moves the TY and AY motors to center positions, then moves the TZ motor to topmost
position.
1. Remove the C-arm X-ray Source Assembly cover.

System Installation
2. Level the X-ray Source Assembly to 0.0° ± 0.1°.

a. Place the digital level on the top of the X-ray Source Assembly (Figure 108).
Figure 108 Level Placement on X-ray Source Assembly
b. b. Use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until the level is
0.0° ± 0.1°
3. Click OK.
4. When the AR motor reaches the AP mechanical limit (Figure 109), click Cancel.
Figure 109 AR Motor AP Mechanical Limit
5. Check the position value. It must be 250 ± 5. Adjust if necessary.

Adjustment Procedures
If calibration parameter values are not within the specified range:
1. Remove the AR Motor Cover (Figure 110).

System Installation
Figure 110 Remove AR Motor Cover
2. Loosen the coupling setscrew.

3. Manually rotate the encoder until the reading is 250 ± 5 (245 – 255).
4. Tighten the coupling setscrew.
5. Repeat the calibration procedure until the position value is in range.
6. Start Calibrate again and when AR reaches the click OK.
a. When prompted, level the X-ray Source Assembly to 0.0° ± 0.1° again.
b. Place the digital level on the top of the X-ray Source Assembly.
c. Use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until the level is
0.0° ± 0.1°.
d. Remove the level.
Figure 111 Table IN/OUT
7. When the AR motor reaches the lateral mechanical limit, click OK.
8. Level the C-arm to 83° +0.1° (Figure 112).
a. Place the digital level on the top of the tank assembly.
b. Use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until the level is 83° +0.1°.
c. Remove the level.
9. Click OK.
The program moves the C-arm and draws an encoder versus distance calibration
grid.

System Installation
The positive and negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top
right of the plot in the form Y = Intercept + Slope * X.
10. If the two slopes are within 0.1 of each other, click Continue.
11. If the slopes are not within the specified range, see Adjust encoder versus distance calibration slopes on
Page 122.
The MOTOR$AR Calibration dialog displays calibration parameter values.
12. Check that the values meet specifications. For more information see Calibration Parameters for
MOTOR$AR on Page 121.
The MOTOR$AR Calibration dialog box displays the position value. The next-to-
last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box position value must be
250 ± 5 ticks.
13. To adjust the position value, see Adjust the Position Value on Page 122.
14. Click Save.
Figure 112 Level the C-arm to 83°

System Installation
Figure 113 AR Calibration Parameter Display

Calibration Parameters for MOTOR$AR
motor_direction determines whether the positive step direction is the reverse of the direction of increasing
encoder values. The value is 0 if the direction is not reversed and 1 if the direction is reversed. This value is
set from the corresponding parameter in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file and is a constant for each motor.
The direction of increasing encoder values must agree with the system coordinates. The positive step
direction is set by the wiring harness for the stepper motor.
(1) Tolerance. The position tolerance, in encoder ticks, for absolute moves. The calibration program sets
this field to the value found in the corresponding calibrate_position field in the MOTOR_AR.PRO file.
(2,3) NumberOfSteps,StepDistance. The number of motors steps corresponding to the step distance in
minutes of rotation. The ratio of these two numbers determines the step size. The calibration program
calculates these fields based on the measurements of the 0and 83positions.
(4,5) NumberOfTicks,TickDistance. The number of encoder ticks corresponding to the tick distance in
minutes of rotation. The ratio of these two numbers that determines the encoder calibration. These
numbers can change from calibration to calibration, however, the ratio should remain approximately the
same.
(6) EncoderOffset. The value subtracted from the encoder readback to set the origin of motion. The origin
of AR motion is the 0position. This value is the encoder reading at 0.
(7,8) NegLimit,PosLimit. The encoder readings for the negative (counter clockwise or AP) and positive
(clockwise or LATERAL) mechanical stops.
pos_limit_position is the limit of motion, in minutes of rotation, in the clockwise direction.
neg_limit_position is the limit of motion, in minutes of rotation, in the counter clockwise direction.
Only follow these procedures if calibration parameter values are not within the specified range.

System Installation
Adjust the Position Value

2. Manually rotate the encoder until the reading is within the range designated for the motor.
Adjust encoder versus distance calibration slopes
1. Rerun the calibration.
2. If the slopes are still not in range, check the encoder and check that the belt tension is correct.
3.6 Perform Initial Leakage Survey

Warning: X-rays are generated during this procedure. Keep hands, head and other body
parts out of beam.
1. Place the tool X-ray Leakage Test Tool (TLS-02693) over the aperture assembly.
2. On the System Diagnostics screen, Detectors tab, turn on X-rays by clicking Xrays (F2) or by
pressing the <F2> key.
3. Slowly move the meter probe (Victoreen Model 450P or equivalent) over all accessible surfaces (see
table above for meter response times) to detect any leaks.
4. If a leak is detected (a spike in the reading), measure a point at a one meter (approx. 40 in.) distance
from the leak and ensure that the reading is 1.0 mrad/h (10 µGy/h) or less.
5. Click Xrays (F2) or press the <F2> key to turn off X-rays.
6. Remove the TLS-02693 Leakage Test Tool from the Aperture assembly.
3.7 Perform X-Ray Beam Alignment

3.7.1 X-axis (Side-to-Side) Beam Alignment Setup
To set up Aperture Beam Alignment:
1. In the Field Service mode, from the Hologic Main Screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > X-ray
Survey (Figure 114).
2. On the device control screen select the Detectors tab.

System Installation
Figure 114 X-ray Survey
3. Set the following parameters in the Device Control Screen (Figure 115 and Figure 116) to the values
shown:
• High Gain = 2
• Low Gain = 1
• X-Ray Mode = 3
• Aperture = 7
4. Verify that the screen shows Pulse equal to 1.
5. Select Filter Wheel to ON to ensure the filter drum is spinning.

System Installation
Figure 115 X-Ray Survey Screen (X-rays OFF)
Figure 116 X-ray Survey Screen (X-rays ON)
Note To turn X-rays Off and On you can press the F2 Function key on the keyboard
or by using the mouse toggle the F2 button on the screen.
6. Remove the top cover of the C-arm (Figure 117).

System Installation
Figure 117 Remove Top Cover of C-arm
7. Insert the X-ray beam alignment tool, TLS-05376, into the slot on the C-arm (Figure 118).
Note The handle of the alignment tool protrudes from the C-arm to prevent
inadvertently leaving the tool in the C-arm after performing an alignment.
Figure 118 Insert the X-ray Beam Alignment Tool
8. Press the keyboard F2 function key or with the mouse toggle the F2 button on the screen to turn X-
rays On.
9. Check the voltage output on the Device Control Screen (Figure 119).

System Installation
Figure 119 Check Voltage Output
Note Regardless of the initial voltage readings, the goal of the adjustment is to center
the filter drum and aperture assembly in the middle of the X-rays beam to
achieve maximum amplitude with a uniform flat signal across the top of the
graph.
If the arm is deflected in either direction, when the filter drum assembly is
properly aligned, the voltage drop should be the same in both directions.
On Horizon A systems use Emergency Motion to raise the table (Figure 6) to
access the area underneath the table top.
Figure 120 Raise the Table
Caution Do not drive the table to its maximum raised position. Raising the table to its
maximum height at abnormal speed can damage hardware.

System Installation
3.7.2 Perform Y-axis (Side-to-Side) Aperture Beam Alignment

1. Use pin and block (Figure 121) and (Figure 122) before turning on X-rays.
Figure 121 Pin and Block
Figure 122 Pin Inserted in Block
2. From the Hologic main menu, select Utilities > Service Utilities >System Diagnostics > Detectors
tab and select aperture 7 on Horizon C, W, and A models only.

System Installation
Note Do not use the arrow up/down function to select Aperture 7. Instead, use the
mouse to highlight the displayed aperture number, type 7 and press Enter.
3. Use the alignment block TLS-02698, and alignment pin 099-0111 to align the hole in the filter drum
base plate to the hole in the aperture plate and to the aperture base plate assembly.
The pin should drop through easily. If the pin does not drop in, select the C-Arm
tab on the System Diagnostics screen.
4. In the Commands section at the lower right, type 10 or -10 in the Move Relative field to re-align the
aperture plate. You may need to visually check that you are moving the aperture plate in the correct
direction relative to the base plate hole.
The pin should now drop down through the hole in the back left of the aperture
plate down through the alignment block and into the base plate hole with
minimum force. If the pin still does not align with the base plate hole, continue to
move the aperture plate ten steps at a time until alignment is achieved.
5. Press or click F2 to turn on X-rays.
6. Locate the (2) 10-32 x .37L Hex should bolt screws on the bottom sled bracket of the Filter Drum
Sled assembly, and loosen them by 1/2 turn.
7. Adjust the rear sled adjustment to move the whole assembly left or right in the beam (figure 119).
The goal is to achieve the maximum voltage on the left side of the survey screen.
8. Press or click F2 to turn off x-rays.
9. Tighten the (2) 10-32 x .37L Hex bottom sled screws.
10. Perform skew alignment (See Perform Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment).
11. Repeat the lateral and skew process until beam is flat and at maximum amplitude.
12. Remove the pin and block when done.
3.7.3 Perform Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment

1. On the filter drum shuttle sled assembly (ASY-?07098), loosen the three #8-32 shoulder screws
(200-0278) on the filter drum base, 1/4 turn (Figure 1 and Figure 123).
Figure 123 Shuttle Assembly Shoulder Screws
Side Opposite Label Side with Label
2. Ensure that all components can freely adjust by turning the sled Skew adjustment screw. Loosen
filter drum base screws slightly if necessary (Figure 124).

System Installation
Figure 124 Sled Adjustment Screws
3. Press F2 or click F2 in Device Control Screen the to turn on X-rays.

4. Check for signal flatness on the Device Control Screen (Figure 125) while adjusting the Filter Drum
Assembly Skew.
Figure 125 Filter Drum Assembly Left to Right Adjustment
Note Deflect the arm slightly to the left and right. The voltage should decrease when
the outside the beam path.

System Installation
5. Adjust the Filter Drum Assembly Skew (Figure 126) until the amplitude displayed on the Device
Control Screen is flat.
Figure 126 Voltage Amplitude on Device Control Screen
6. Turn off X-rays.

7. With your hand, make a fist and hit the front edge of the aperture assembly a few times.
8. Turn on the X-rays and verify that the alignment held. Adjust it until flat and repeat the hitting and
checking of the alignment until it holds.
9. Re-tighten the assemblies 3 filter drum base screws from the top.
10. Verify again the adjustment did not change.
11. Repeat the previous 2 adjustments one at a time until maximum amplitude is archived and the
beam remains flat.
a. On models A and W go to aperture 10 and verify that the beam is aligned and flat.
b. Repeat adjustments until both aperture 7 and 10 are aligned and flat.
12. On a model A system place the system in Lateral position. Then return to the AP position.
13. Turn on X-rays and verify that the alignment is still holding.
14. Remove the X-ray Beam Alignment Tool TLS-05376 from the C-arm.
3.7.4 Perform X-axis (Front-to-Back) X-ray Beam Alignment

Check Detector Signal Levels
On Horizon models A, W, and C, the first and last detector (44 and 171) at aperture 7 must be equal and
balanced. On Horizon models Wi, Ci, the first and last detector (45 and 170) must be equal and balanced.
To check the front to back alignment and balance the voltage amplitudes:
1. From the Device Control Screen, click Show Details.
2. Turn on X-rays.
3. Use the entire detector text box (Figure 127) to check the signal for detectors (44 and 171) in the
Details Window.

System Installation
If a detector at the end of the charts (e.g., Detector 44, Figure 127) has on an amplitude less than 6.0V and
less than the detector on the opposite side (e.g., Detector 171, Figure 128), the detector must be adjusted
front to back, so that both detectors display the same voltage.
Figure 127 Details Detector 44

System Installation
Balance the Detectors

To balance the detectors:
1. Turn off x-rays.
2. Remove the top cover from the C-arm.
3. Loosen the four (4)screws that hold the detector in place (Figure 4).

System Installation
Figure 129 Detector Assembly Screw Locations
4. Loosen the Detector Mounting Screws

5. Turn on x-rays.
6. Check the signal voltages displayed in the Device Control Screen as you slide the detector front to
back.
7. Adjust the detector (Figure 130) from position 0 at the rear of the arm until the beam path is aligned
and signal voltages are balanced for each detector to within 0.1V.
Figure 130 Detector Assembly Board
8. Tighten screws.

System Installation
9. Remove pin and block.
3.7.5 Aperture Calibration

Note The following procedure is performed on Horizon C, W, and A models only.
Horizon Ci and Wi models have a single, fixed aperture which does not require
calibration.
Caution Make sure the pin and block have been removed before performing Aperture
Calibration.
1. From the Hologic main window, click Utilities > Service Utilities > System Diagnostics.
2. Click the C-Arm tab.
3. In the upper right corner of the screen, click Calibrate Aperture (Figure 131) to move the aperture to
its right and left physical limits.
Figure 131 Select Calibrate Aperture
The Aperture Calibration Screen (Figure 132) opens.

System Installation
Figure 132 Aperture Calibration Screen
The x-rays turn on as the aperture plate moves left to right. As the aperture moves through the beam path,
the signal is captured and displayed. The chart will identify the signal levels for each aperture specific
encoder positions.
The vertical lines on the final output should correspond to the center of the aperture openings. The data
contributes to software positioning and aperture identification.
Slope Value
4. Click Continue.
As the potentiometer moves in both directions, a linear change should be displayed in the Aperture
Calibration Plot (Figure 133).

System Installation
Figure 133 Aperture Calibration Plot
Note A non-linear plot normally indicates a bad potentiometer.
5. Click Continue to open the Aperture Calibration Peaks screen (Figure 134)
Figure 134 Aperture Calibration Peaks
• The beam line should not be distorted.

System Installation
• The green lines should be centered at the peak of the signal for each aperture if the aperture is
moving correctly. This screen also gives an indication of whether the aperture plate is moving
erratically or binding.
• The red lines are typically displayed in pairs to reflect the pairing of the apertures. In between the
pairs, the beam should be off (maximum dark).
6. Click Continue to open the Aperture Calibration Data screen (Figure 135) and review the offset
numbers.
Figure 135 Aperture Calibration Data
7. Click Save to save the new calibration to HARDWARE.INI file.
software will not be able to find a selected aperture correctly.

3.8 Check HVPS/S (Tank) For Radiation Leakage

For regulatory and safety reasons, the High Voltage Power Supply/Source (HVPS/S) must be checked for
radiation leakage at the time of installation or whenever the HVPS/S is repaired or replaced.

System Installation
3.8.1 Principles
Radiation leakage from the HVPS/S results from a defect in the lead liner of the tank or its cover. If there is
a hole in the lead liner, the resulting leakage will produce a pencil beam of X-rays. If there is a crack in the
lead liner, the resulting leakage will produce a fan beam. In either case, the initial survey must be taken
close to and almost touching the tank with the survey meter probe. If a leak is found, the meter indicates a
spike in the reading. If this occurs, you must then move the probe one-meter (approximately 40 in.) along
the beam from that spot to determine if the leakage is within acceptable levels.
3.8.2 Perform the Leakage Test Procedure

1. Remove the tank cover and set the X-ray leakage test shield (TLS-02693) over the aperture slot.
Figure 136 Leakage Test Shield (TLS-02693)
2. Start the Utility by selecting Utilities > Service Utilities > X-Ray Survey.
3. Change X-Ray Mode to 3 and Aperture to 7 to lock in the changes.
parts out of beam.
1. Position the survey meter one meter (approx. 40 in.) from the tank and move it all around the
outside of the instrument.
2. The reading must be 1.0 mrad/h (10 µGy/h)or less. Record the highest reading in the service report.
3. Press the <F2> key to turn off X-rays, remove the tool, and replace the tank cover.
Note Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report (CSD-0042-
F07).
3.8.3 Check Laser Positioning Offset Using the Spine Phantom

The laser must be aligned with the spine phantom to perform the alignment scans:
1. Select or Create patient.
2. Select AP lumbar scan.
3. Deselect Use Default ScanMode.
4. Select Array a.
5. Scan length is 6 in. (15.2 cm).
6. Start AP Lumbar Spine Scan.
Note Watch for leading edge of L4 in the scan image window. It should start between
scan line counts of 30 to 35 as indicated at the bottom left hand corner of the
screen.

System Installation
Figure 137 Leading Edge of L4 in the Scan Image Window
The Phantom image should be in the center of the scan screen left to right.If the Phantom is not in the
center or starts before or after the line counts of 30 to 35;
7. Click Reposition.
The table and arm return to the start positions.

System Installation
Figure 138 Start Position
8. Using the vertical blue line as a guide (Figure 139), move the scan image left to right in the window
with your mouse until it is centered.
Figure 139 Repositioning

System Installation
9. Place the starting edge of L4 in the scan image 5 clicks (use arrow keys on keyboard) below the
horizontal blue line.
10. Click Restart Scan to move the table and arm to new start position.
11. DO NOT move anything on the table.
12. Now adjust the Laser beam back to the laser alignment mark on the Phantom.
3.8.4 Re-check the Laser Position

1. Exit the scan.
2. Press the Center Table button on the control panel.
3. Re-Position the Phantom to the laser.
4. Run an AP Lumbar Scan Array a mode, 6 in. (15.2 cm) length scan.
5. Verify that L4 starts be between line counts of 30 and 35.
6. Verify that the phantom image is centered left to right in the scan.
3.8.5 A/D Gain Control Adjustment

An A/D gain adjustment potentiometer ensures that all systems have the same input to the A/D converter
regardless of slight variations in X-ray flux energy output. The A/D Gain potentiometer is located on the
Detector Assembly.
Caution Any adjustment of this potentiometer affects the QC highs and lows. You must
run detector flattening and recalibrate the machine after adjusting the A/D
gain. DO NOT ADJUST THE A/D GAIN UNLESS ABSOLUTELY
NECESSARY AS DEFINED in Step 9 in the section that follows (Verify and
Adjust the A/D Gain).
3.8.6 Verify and Adjust the A/D Gain

1. Install all system covers that are normally in the X-ray beam.
2. Install the table pad onto the table.
3. Start the APEX software in Service mode (with service dongle if required).
4. On the APEX main screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > X-Ray Survey.
5. Set Pulse to 1.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mode to 3.
d. Aperture to 7 (A, C, and W models only).
7. Press <Enter>.
8. Display the X-Ray Survey bar graph.
9. Press <Ctrl>-<Page Down> or click Hi and Bone to observe Hi Air to observe Hi Air.
10. Turn on X-rays, press <F1>.
11. Verify that the average X-ray signal level is 6.25VDC for A, C, and W models and 7.0VDC for Ci and
Wi models and that no detectors vary from these voltages by more than ± 0.5VDC.
If these conditions are met, the procedure is complete.
Do not adjust the A/D gain.
If these conditions are not met, adjust the A/D gain to obtain the voltages specified above.
Note On Horizon A systems, the A/D gain adjustment pot is located on the A/D
converter board. On all other Horizon systems, the adjustment pot is on the
Detector assembly.

System Installation
Figure 140 Horizon W Beam Alignment and A/D Gain
3.9 Detector Flattening

parts out of beam
This procedure flattens the X-ray beam for each scan mode and uses the metal edges of the table to
calculate the center table position in the x-axis.
Note All covers, table mat, etc., normally in the X-ray path, MUST be on the Scanner
before running Beam Flattening.
1. Restart the Horizon software in service mode (if not already). Press the Center Table button and
turn on the laser.
2. Using a DXA Quality Control Phantom (Part Number ASY-01564), place the phantom on end with
the flattening target facing up. Orient the phantom so the metal edge is to the right (head end) and
tissue to the left (foot end) as viewed from the front of the table. Align the phantom flattening target
to the laser crosshair.

System Installation
Figure 141 Correct Flattening Position
3. Start the X-Ray Survey Utility by selecting Utilities > Service Utilities > X-Ray Survey.
4. Set Pulse to 1, High gain to 2, Low gain to 1, X-ray Mode to 3 and Aperture to 7 (for A, C, and W
models).
5. For Display, click Graph.
6. Click X-Rays (F2) to turn X-Rays on.
7. Check that the phantom covers the entire beam. This is critical. If phantom does not cover the entire
beam, move it until it does. Keep the phantom as straight as possible.
8. Turn off X-rays with the <F2> key and press <Esc> or click Close to exit X-Ray Survey.
9. Reboot the PC, logon as Field Service, and restart the software in Service Mode to return to Horizon
Main Menu screen.
10. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > Detector Flattening.
11. Click Flattening –Basic First.
Figure 142 Flattening –Basic First
12. Click Continue.

This procedure will take approximately 15 minutes on a Ci and Wi, 25 minutes on a C and W, and
50 minutes on an A model system.
13. After this procedure, the X-Ray Source Assembly will be hot. You must wait for 30 minutes before
performing a Field Service Calibration of the machine.

System Installation
3.10 Perform Lateral Alignment and Flatness Test (Horizon A)

Note This procedure applies to the A system only. Use this procedure to verify lateral
alignment.
1. Login into the system as user Field Service.

2. Start APEX software in Service Mode.
3. Perform Daily QC if necessary.
4. From the Main Menu, select Exam.
5. Click Perform Exam (Figure 143).
Figure 143 Select Perform Exam
6. Select New Patient (Figure 144).

Figure 144 New Patient
7. In the Patient window (Figure 145), enter Flat/Lat Verification in Last Name.
8. Click OK.
Figure 145 Patient Window
9. Enter a height and weight for the patient in the Patient Confirmation Window (Figure 146).
10. Click OK.

System Installation
Figure 146 Patient Confirmation Window
11. At the Select Scan Type screen, select AP/Lateral (Figure 147).
12. Deselect Use Default Scan Mode.
Figure 147 Select AP/Lateral
13. Click Next.

14. Select AP/Lateral Exam as the scan type.
15. Select Array (a) (Figure 148).

System Installation
16. Click Next.

Figure 148 Select Array (a)
17. At the Select Lateral Scan Mode for AP/Lateral Exam screen, select Fast Array (f).
18. Click Next.
Figure 149 Select Fast Array (f)
19. Follow the instructions (Figure 150) regarding patient (spine phantom) alignment with the laser.
20. Click Continue.
Figure 150 Alignment Warning

System Installation
21. Place two sheets of paper against the left and right edges of the phantom (Figure 151).
Figure 151 Paper against Right Edges of Phantom
22. When done, click Continue.

23. On the Scan Parameters screen, set the scan length to 6.0 in. (Figure 152).
24. Click Start Scan.
Figure 152 Scan Length
25. After the scan has been completed, on the Analyze Setup screen (Figure 153), select Choose
Analysis Method.
26. Select Lumbar Spine from the pull-down.
27. Click Next.

System Installation
Figure 153 Select Lumbar Spine
Note If Lumbar Spine is not available from the drop down menu, you must load base
analysis protocols from the application disk first.
28. Select Global ROI, select Line Mode (Figure 155).

29. Set the ROI width to 113 and ROI height to 105.
Figure 154 Global ROI Line Mode
30. Click Whole Mode.

31. Move the Global ROI so that its bottom line is against bottom edge of image (Figure 155).

System Installation
Figure 155 Global ROI Whole Mode
32. If image adjustment is necessary to visualize the bone, select the SUN symbol to
open the Image Toolbox (Figure 156).
33. When done, click the Sun symbol to switch back to the Global ROI Toolbox.
Figure 156 Global ROI Toolbox
34. Click Line Mode.

System Installation
35. Select the top line of the Global ROI and move it to the vertebral space that separates L1 and L2
(Figure 157)
Figure 157 Move Top Line of Global ROI to Vertebral Space
36. Select Whole Mode (Figure 158).

Figure 158 Select Whole Mode
37. Center the Global ROI left to right on the vertebrae.

38. In this order, click Bone Map > Vertebral Lines > Results > Start Position.

System Installation
Figure 159 Bone Map
Figure 160 Bone Map Vertebral Lines

System Installation
Figure 161 Bone Map Results
39. Verify that the angle displayed under the image (near the bottom of the screen) is less than ± 2
degrees (Figure 162).
Figure 162 Bone Map Start Position
40. Using the sheets of paper as a guide, carefully rotate the phantom on its back edge towards the C-
arm so that the bone segments are facing the rear of the table as shown (Figure 163).
Except for the rotation, do not move the phantom in any other direction.

System Installation
Figure 163 Paper Guides
41. Click Close.

42. When the Continuously Press Enable message appears, press and hold the Enable Lateral switch
until the C-arm and table move to the Lateral position.
43. On the Scan Parameters screen, click Start Scan.
(Figure 164) until the C-arm and table move back to the AP position.
Figure 164 Lateral Enable Switch
45. From the Exit Exam screen, select Analyze Scan (Figure 165).

System Installation
Figure 165 Analyze Scan
46. From the Analysis Setup screen, select Choose Analysis Method.
47. Select Supine Lateral from the pull-down menu (Figure 166).
Figure 166 Supine Lateral Analysis Method
48. Click Next.

49. Select Global ROI (Figure 167).

System Installation
Figure 167 Analysis Method
50. Select Line Mode. Select the bottom line of the Global ROI and make the sides vertical (Figure 168).
Figure 168 Line Mode
51. Verify the left edge of the ROI is at the left edge of the image.

System Installation
Figure 169 Whole Mode
53. Using the right arrow key, count the number of steps required to align the left edge of the Vertebral
Boundaries ROI (the middle vertical line in Figure 169) to the left edge of spine.
54. Record the number of steps taken here: ______________.
55. The steps will be less than 6 when properly calibrated.
56. If the number of steps taken was 6 or less, click Cancel on the scan analysis screen, click Yes and Exit
to confirm analysis exit and proceed to Step 66.
57. If the number of steps exceeds 6 steps, you must adjust the table height.
58. Click Cancel on the scan analysis screen,
59. Click Yes and
60. Exit to confirm analysis exit and proceed to Step 61.
61. Click Utilities > Service Utilities > Table Height.
62. Refer to Figure 170.
a. Subtract the actual number of steps recorded in Step 53 from the number 10.
b. Enter the difference into the text box as a positive number to lower the table (Example for this
image: +4).
c. Record value entered into the text box ______________. Click Next when done.

System Installation
Figure 170 Set the Height of the Table Top
63. From the APEX or QDR main screen, select Exit, Exit QDR without shut down and click OK.
64. Re-boot the system and login as user Field Service. When the APEX or QDR main screen displays,
select Exit, Exit QDR without shut down and click OK.
65. Start APEX or QDR software in Service Mode.
66. Detector Flattening (Big Flat) must now be run since the table height has been changed. Click
Utilities > Service Utilities > Detector Flattening and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note The Table Height Utility parameter limits are ±5 to raise or lower the table;
however, actual limits may be less for any given system. If the limits are
exceeded, the Lateral Position setup cannot function and a Table Height Out
of Limits or similar error message will display. If this is the case, enter
countering numbers until values are within limits (indicated by no error
message).
For Example: you entered +5 and the Table Height Out of Limits or similar
error message displayed. To counter, enter -2. This will result in you having
input the value +3. Any time you run the Table Height utility, you must always
re-run Detector Flattening (Big Flat).
67. Select Perform Exam and select patient Flat/Lat Verification in the last name field and
68. Click OK.
69. Click OK.
70. Repeat Steps 14 through 54.
3.11 Perform Field Service Calibrations

3.11.1 Summary of Field Service Calibrations Procedure
• Verify the QC Phantom values.
• Perform one QC Scan, on models A, W and Wi perform BCA calibration scans and uniformity table top
test scan.
• Scan Thickness
Calibration for Area, BMD, and BMC is accomplished in three stages:
• Array Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration
• Calibration of Area and BMC for Array Scan Modes
• Adding Array AP scans to the QC database
Follow the procedure, in order, and exactly as shown, for each stage of the
calibration.

System Installation
Note 1. If the Horizon being installed is to replace an existing QDR fan beam
system or if the customer has multiple systems, then a cross calibration
must first be performed to ensure that any longitudinal studies begun on
the QDR being removed can safely be continued on the new Horizon. Refer
to the cross-calibration procedure in Section 3.12 Fan Beam Cross-
Calibration Gold Standard System on Page 167 before uninstalling the
existing QDR. The Cross-Calibration procedure applies to fan beam
systems only.
2. To ensure stability, the instrument must be completely powered up for a
minimum of 30 minutes prior to running any of the following tests. Also,
because the tabletop pad will have a slight affect on the test results, all scans
must be performed with the tabletop pad in place.
Warning: X-rays are produced during most of these tests. Keep hands, head and other
body parts out of the X-ray beam path. The tester should also be wearing an
approved radiation dosimetry badge.
3.11.2 Check Phantom Values

1. From the Horizon Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service
Calibration.
2. Click the Number button.
Figure 171 Field Service Calibration Dialog Box
3. Compare values displayed with actual values printed on the phantom. If there is a discrepancy,
check to make sure you have the phantom that shipped with the unit. Check with Hologic Technical
Support if needed.
3.11.3 Perform BCA Calibration Scans and Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (A, W
and Wi)
This procedure verifies proper X-Ray beam alignment and the uniformity of the X-Ray transparency of
entire tabletop in a manual process (for Horizon A, W and Wi models). BCA Calibration Scans must be
performed on the system prior to verifying the uniformity test scan.

System Installation
Note On Models A, W, and Wi, after Flattening is performed and 30 minute cool
down is expired, perform a Daily QC scan. Automatically the system will
perform BCA calibration scans on the QC Phantom. After the calibration scans
are complete the system will inform you to remove the QC Phantom and clear
the table to perform the Table Top Uniformity Scan test. This test will report the
results automatically and must pass with the Hi and Low Air SD of less than
2.0.
If the system is passing normally, skip to next step.
If the system is not passing with less than SD 2.0, verify that table alignments
and beam alignments are correct, adjust as necessary and run Flattening again.
1. If necessary, restart the software in Service Mode.
2. Type WBAIRQC in the Patient Biography. Enter the serial number of the unit in the Patient ID field.
Make sure that only the pad is on the table. Clear the table of anything else.
3. Perform one Whole Body air scan (a scan with nothing on the table). Do NOT interrupt the scan for
any reason. When the scan completes, select Exit Exam. Do not analyze the scan that was just
performed.
4. From the Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > Table Top Radiographic
Uniformity.
5. Select the Whole Body scan and click the Next>> button.
6. Table Top Radiographic Uniformity results tabs are now displayed. Select the Low Air Tab.
7. If the Global Stats S.D. (2) is less than 2.0, the instrument is properly aligned. If the Global Stats S.D.
is greater than or equal to 2.0, then the machine is not aligned properly. Check the following:
• If the image appears “streaky” or “banded”, check for loose wires or other debris between the table
and the tank.
• Check the Aperture Calibration.
• Check AC Line voltage.
• Check +/- 15 V Power Supply.
• Check for a dedicated line.
• Check Detector Flattening.
• Re-run daily QC (detailed in MAN-03644 Horizon QDR Series User Guide).
Print a copy of the test results and include it with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
After realignment, repeat the Table Top Radiographic Uniformity test. If the global S.D. is less than 2.0,
you are done. If the global S.D. if equal or greater than 2.0, print a copy of the test results and include it
with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
If the global is equal to or greater than 2.0, the non-uniformity may be attributed to the table itself. If so,
continue with this procedure. Make sure that the machine has body composition loaded. If it does, then
follow the appropriate procedure in Section 3.11.3 Perform BCA Calibration Scans and Table Top Radiographic
Uniformity (A, W and Wi) on Page 158.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
1. Press the Center Table button.
2. Turn on the laser.
3. With the laser on, place the phantom so that the laser dot is on the centerline of the phantom, 1/2 in.
from the left end, shining on the phantom target. The sides of the phantom should be aligned
parallel to the table, using a ruler if necessary.

System Installation
4. Be sure the spine phantom has been entered in the patient database in the form of “Spine Phantom
#nnnn” (where nnnn is the number of the phantom) so that the QC plot program can identify it
properly.
5. From the Main Menu screen, select Perform Exam, select the Spine Phantom, and click the OK
button at Patient Information dialog box.
6. Select AP Lumbar Spine, uncheck default scan check box, and click the Next>> button.
7. Select Array, click the Next>> button, set the scan length to 6 in., and start the scan.
8. Analyze the scan and click the Close button to exit the Analysis screen.
9. Start the Field Service Calibration program by selecting Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service
Calibration from the Main Menu screen.
10. Select the Spine Highs/Lows for Array Spine phantom option to automatically calculate the new
thickness indicators for array spine.
11. Select the Spine Phantom scanned in step 7 from the list of Analyzed Scans and click the Next>>
button. Click the Continue button on the Successfully Calculated message box.
12. Click the Temp Write button and click the Continue button on the Successfully Wrote message box.
Exit Field Service Calibration.
3.11.5 Scan Thickness Measurement & Calibration (A)

DXA Quality Control Phantom Procedure
2. Start APEX software in Service Mode (with service dongle if required).
Note Be sure the DXA QC phantom has been entered in the patient database in the
form of “Spine Phantom #nnn” (where nnn is the number of the phantom) so
that the QC plot program can identify it properly. This should be the phantom
shipped with the machine.
3. Center the table, place the phantom on the table and align with the laser. The sides of the phantom
should be parallel to the table. Use a ruler if necessary.
4. Click Perform Exam from the application main screen.
5. At the Select a Patient for this Exam window, select the phantom, and click OK.
6. At the Patient Confirmation screen, click OK.
7. At Select Scan Type screen, select AP/Lateral, uncheck Use Default Scan Mode, and click Next>>.
8. At the Select AP Lumbar Spine Scan Mode for AP/Lateral Exam screen, select Array (a), and click
Next>>.
9. At the Select Lateral Scan Mode for AP/Lateral Exam screen, select Fast Array (f), and click Next.
10. Recheck phantom alignment with laser.
Note Do not move the arm or table, otherwise the test will have to be started over.
11. Place two sheets of paper against the left and right edges of the phantom (Figure 151) When done,
click Continue.
12. On the Scan Parameters screen, set the scan length to 6.0 in., click Enter and click Start Scan.
13. When scan has finished, select Spine as the analysis method, and click Next>>.
14. Analyze the scan and click Start Position.
15. Refer to Figure 172 Verify that the angle displayed under the image (near the bottom of the screen)
is less than ± 2 degrees.

System Installation
16. Using the sheets of paper as a guide, carefully rotate the phantom on its back edge towards the
C-arm so that the bone segments are facing the rear of the table as shown. Except for the rotation,
do not move the phantom in any other direction.
17. Click Close. When the Continuously Press Enable message appears, press and hold the Lateral
Enable switch until the C-Arm and table move to the Lateral position.
19. When the “Continuously Press Enable” message appears, press and hold the Lateral Enable switch
until the C-Arm and table move back to the AP position.
20. From the Exit Exam screen, select Analyze Scan.
21. Analyze the scan (refer to user guide for Lateral analysis) and close the screen.
22. Click Exit to close the Exit Analysis screen.
23. Restart APEX software in service mode (if not already). From the APEX Main window, select
Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibration.
24. Select Highs/Lows for Array Spine Phantom.
25. Select the AP scan just performed and click Next.
26. Click Continue on the Calculated highs and lows page.
27. Select Highs/Lows for Array Lateral Phantom.
29. Click Temp Write to write temporary results and click Continue to exit the write dialog box.

System Installation
3.11.6 Calibration of Area and BMC for Array Scan Modes

After the machine has been calibrated for thickness measurement in the array mode, it must be calibrated
for the array AREA and BMC measurements.
1. Restart the software in service mode (if not already).
2. Center the table. From the Main Menu screen,
3. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > AP Reposition.
4. Return to the menu and select Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Scan.
5. Select the Spine Phantom.
6. Click OK at Patient Confirmation dialog box.
7. Select AP Lumbar Scan Type.
8. Enter 5 for number of scans.
9. Deselect Use Default.
10. Click Next.
11. Select Array Mode for the scan type.
12. Click Next.
The system performs the five (5) programed Auto Scans on the phantom.
13. Wait 15 minutes, run the next set of five (5) scan using the Auto Scan function for a total of eleven
(11) scans performed on the spine phantom.
Note For Horizon system with version APEX 5.6 and higher, only 10 reproducibility
scans for calibrations are required. Earlier versions required 20 scans. Acquire 5
scans with a period of 15 between groups.
14. Analyze the first scan manually selecting Lumbar Spine for the analysis method.
15. Note the scan #.
16. Click the Close button to exit analysis.
17. From the Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze.
18. Click unanalyzed Scans and select the 10 scans, click Compare radio button and then click Next.
19. Now, select the QC Scan performed in Perform QC Scan on Page 186.
20. Click Next.
21. The 10 scans will now be compared with the auto-analyzed QC Scan.
Note It is important to compare to the auto analyzed QC Scan.

Do not analyze the first scan for comparative purposes.
3.11.7 Calibration (Area, BMD, and BMC) with ACF and BCF Correction Factors

System Installation
Follow the procedure, in order, and exactly as shown, for each stage of the calibration.
Note 1. If the Horizon being installed is to replace an existing QDR fan beam system
or if the customer has multiple systems, then a cross-calibration must be
performed to ensure that any longitudinal studies begun on the QDR being
removed can safely be continued on the new Horizon. Refer to the cross-
calibration procedure in Section 3.12 Fan Beam Cross-Calibration Gold
Standard System on Page 167 before de-installing the existing QDR. The Cross
Calibration procedure applies to fan beam systems only.
1. From the Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibration.
2. Click the ACF/BCF button.
3. Select the 11 reproducibility scans performed in previous step.
4. Click Next
5. Click Continue at the Successfully Calculated dialog box.
6. At the Field Service Calibration dialog box, click the Write button to write the values to arrc.txt file.
7. Click Continue to return to the Main Menu.
3.11.8 RECALYZE and Add Array AP Scans to the QC Database

Once the unit has been calibrated with new ACF and BCF correction factors, re-analyze the AP scans and
add them to the QC database.
1. From the Main Menu, select Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze.
2. Select the analyzed scans, click RECALYZE, and select the 11 scans just acquired and used in
previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
4. The scans will now be recalculated to the new calibration ACF and BCF correction factors.
5. From the Main Menu, select QC > QC Data Management > Select Scans.
6. Highlight the ten (10) reproducibility scans from the Excluded list.
7. Click the Include Scans button.
8. Then Finish. (Selection is easier if you click Scan Date bar above the list. This will order the scans by
date and time).
9. Select the QC > QC Data Management > Plot option from the Horizon Main Menu Screen to
generate an AREA, BMC, and BMD plot.
10. Verify that the QC plots includes the 11 factory scans and the 11 scans just performed by leaving the
Start Date blank.
11. Ensure that all scans fall on the plot mean between the two, dotted limit lines.
12. Print the BMD, BMC, Area, HiAir and LoAir plots. Include the printed plots with the other
paperwork being returned to Hologic.
13. Print the Scan Averaging (Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging) selecting the QC scans.
Include this with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.

System Installation
3.12 Install Software Options

Perform all applicable software installation and configuration procedures in Section 11 Software Installation
and Upgrades on Page 417, according to the Hologic Sales Order.
3.13 Test Scan Modes

parts out of beam.
Using a test patient, perform at least one scan in each of the scan modes to verify that machine is fully
functional in all modes of operation. Verify that there are no electrical or mechanical problems during each
scan mode.
[ ] Perform an AP Spine Array, Fast Array, and Express scan.
[ ] Perform a Left Hip Array, Fast Array, and Express scan.
[ ] Perform a Whole Body scan (A, W, and Wi only).
[ ] Perform a Forearm scan.
[ ] Perform the IVA Scan QC Procedure described below.
3.14 Performing the IVA Scan QC Procedure

The ability of the Horizon to produce high quality images must be tested:
• at the time of installation
• after the repair of any parts associated with the generation or detection of x-rays
Each service engineer has been provided with an 11-step aluminum phantom (Step Wedge Penetrometer,
P/N 099-0716) for checking image contrast and a line-pair phantom (X-ray Test Pattern, P/N 099-0715) for
verifying scan resolution.
• Checking the quality of the IVA scans requires running a single-energy AP IVA scan.
To perform an IVA scan QC:
1. Press the Center Table button to center the table.
2. Press the Laser button to turn the laser ON. If the laser goes off during the alignment process just
press the Laser button again to turn the laser ON.
3. Place the X-ray Step Wedge Phantom (P/N 099-0716) on the table approximately an in. to the right
of the crosshair. Center the laser line approximately through the center of the Step Wedge.
4. The Step Wedge Phantom should be placed with its thickest end to the left (foot end) and its
thinnest end on the right with its edges parallel to the table.
5. Skip steps 6 through 8 for Models Ci and Wi.
6. The X-ray Test Pattern Phantom (P/N 099-0715) should be aligned approximately an in. to the right
of the Step Wedge Phantom.
7. The X-ray test pattern should be placed on the table with the lines the Test Pattern Phantom
perpendicular to the motion of the C-arm during scanning. The laser line should pass through the
center of the x-ray Test Pattern Phantom. The 1.8 and 0.6 test patterns should be farthest from the
Step Wedge Phantom. The 0.6 test pattern should be nearest to the front of the table.
8. Depress the Laser button on the C-arm to turn OFF the laser.
9. Click the Perform Exam button at the Horizon Main Screen.
10. Select the IVA Test as the patient. If this name is not present, then click the New patient button.
Enter IVA Test as the new patient last name. Leave the first name and initials blank and then click
the OK button.
11. Click the name IVA Test from the patient names. Click the OK button.
12. In Patient Confirmation Screen, click the OK button.

System Installation
13. At the Select Scan Type screen, select IVA Imaging.

14. Deselect Use default scan mode box and then click Next>>.
15. Select SE AP Image then click Next>> .
16. Select None then click the Next>> button.
17. From the Scan Parameters screen set the scan length to 10.0 in.
18. Click the Start Scan button to run a single-energy AP scan.
19. From the Hologic Analyze screen, perform the next 3 steps.
Note Intensity may be adjusted to visualize scan.
20. Count the 12 steps associated with the Step Wedge Phantom.
The number of steps visible on the Step Phantom should be 11 and 1 more for the table.
21. Skip this step on models Ci and Wi. By clicking the + sign to increase the magnification and using
the scroll bar to examine the x-ray test pattern image on the screen, you should be able to see three
lines for the 0.8 test pattern image.
22. When completed, click Cancel.
3.15 Finish Assembling Unit

Dress all cables at the rear of the console with nylon tie wraps. Take the time to replace any covers or
enclosures that may have been previously removed. Check that all of the machine's safety features
(ground wires, emergency stop, etc.) are in place and working properly. Finally, clean the machine and
remove any unwanted packing materials from the room.
3.16 Measure X-ray Dose To Patient

parts out of beam.
A radiation dose measurement must be performed at installation time, and done routinely whenever the
machine is serviced. This test requires the use of a Victoreen Model 450P, Unfors, or equivalent measuring
device set to measure dose over time (mR/Hr).
Note The dose measurements must be done with the machine fully assembled and the
table mat in place.
1. If using a Victoreen, place the meter in the center of the table approximately ½ in. to the right of the
laser crosshair. If using an Unfors, place the detector on the crosshair and raised 2.0 in. above the
table surface.
2. Click the Perform Exam button, create a test patient biography, and select the Array spine scan.
3. Set scan length for 9.5 in. and click the Start scan button.
4. The meter is now scanned.
5. Observe the scan to verify that the entire chamber of the meter is included in the scan.
6. Record the result from the meter.
Note The arrayExplorer spine scan dose should be less than 20mrad (200µGy).

System Installation
7. Record the highest reading in the service report.

Note Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report. See
Section 0.1.10 Radiation Measurement Report on Page 5.
3.17 Measure X-Ray Scatter From Phantom

parts out of beam.
A radiation scatter measurement must be performed at the time of installation. You must use a survey-
type radiation meter (Victoreen 450P or equivalent).
Perform the following:
1. Center the table and C-arm.
2. Place the spine phantom in the center of the table and align using the laser.
3. Start an AP Spine scan.
4. Using the <Esc> key, stop the scan when it is between the two middle vertebrae.
5. Start the X-ray Survey Utility by selecting Utilities > Service Utilities > X-ray Survey.
6. Using the survey meter, measure the scatter radiation at a distance of 2 meters from the phantom on
a horizontal plane all around the unit. Move the meter slowly.
Note If you cannot measure the scatter radiation at a distance of 2 meters because of
space restrictions, you can measure at 1 meter and divide the result by 4. This
reading must be less than 1.0 mrad/h (10 µGy/h) at 2 meters (approx. 80 in.) in
array AP scan mode.
7. Record the highest reading in the service report and then turn off X-rays by clicking on X-ray (F2).
Note Enter this information into the Radiation Measurement Report (Section 0.1.10
Radiation Measurement Report on Page 5).
3.18 Perform QC
Once the machine has been fully assembled and calibrated, at least one QC scan should be performed.
• Perform the daily QC procedure and enter the scan into the QC database.
3.18.1 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA)

Instruments performing BCA must have a global S.D. of less than 2.0. If the realignment and recalibration
procedures above have been performed and an S.D. of less than 2.0 cannot be obtained, check beam
alignment.
Note Archive the air scans you have acquired and either e-mail or ship them to a
Technical Support Specialist at Hologic headquarters for final evaluation.
3.18.2 Instruments using BMD Whole Body Analysis

Instruments using only BMD Whole Body measurements can tolerate a larger S.D. If the global S.D. is less
than 3.0, you are done. If the S.D. is equal to or greater than 3.0, check beam alignment.

System Installation
3.19 Complete the Radiation Measurement Report

After installation, the field engineer must fill out the Radiation Measurement Report (CSD-0042-F07) and
distribute original and copies according to documented Hologic Field Service requirements for system
paperwork.
3.20 Perform a System Backup of the Installed Calibrated System

Perform a system backup of the installed calibrated system.

3.21 Perform Fan-Beam Cross Calibration if Required

3.21.1 Application
Sites replacing an older fan beam system or sites with multiple fan beam systems, require that the systems
be cross-calibrated.
This procedure applies to fan beam systems only (Table 56).
Table 56 Fan Beam Systems
Fan Beam Systems

Horizon™ Discovery™
QDR™ 4500 Delphi™
Note The procedure does not apply to pencil beam systems.
Cross-calibration must be performed to a precision of 0.5% or less between systems.
Caution The new system must be properly calibrated before performing cross-calibration
3.21.2 Cross-Calibration Overview

Cross-Calibration Process
The process of cross-calibration consists of:
• Determining the system and spine phantom that will be the Gold Standard
• Determining the average BMD, BMC, and Area of the Gold Standard system using the QC plots
• Determining whether or not a cross-calibration is required by
• scanning the Gold Standard phantom 20 times on the new (or other) systems
• doing scan averaging
• comparing performance results of the QC scans on the Gold Standard Phantom for the two
systems
• If the cross-calibration is found to be necessary, calibrating the new (or other) systems to the Gold
Standard values
• Once cross-calibrated, rescanning the new (or other) spine phantom 20 times and using scan
averaging to determine the new phantom label values
Before Performing the Procedure

Prior to performing this procedure, the customer must identify the Gold Standard system and spine
phantom. All systems, including the new system, must be calibrated to this Gold Standard system.
Warning: Verify the selection with the site supervisor before proceeding with this
procedure.
If the Gold Standard System cannot readily be identified, use the system that is
producing the most consistent scans as the Gold Standard.
Cross-Calibration Calculator
This document contains sample Cross-Calibration Calculator output (Figure 213 on Page 196). You must
record the values obtained during this procedure in worksheet TLS-05948.

• Include a printed copy of the completed worksheet with your install or service call paperwork, or
• send the worksheet as an email attachment.
Refer to TLS-05948 for the Excel Cross-Calibration Calculator for worksheet details.
3.21.3 Steps Required When an Old System is Being Replaced

Preliminary Steps for System Replacement
Note If the old system will be in use after the backup is performed, make plans to copy
all new files to the new system.
For additional details on system backup, refer to MAN-04725,
(Technical Bulletin, TB-00540).
Warning: If data from the old system cannot be recovered, contact Technical Service to
arrange for systematic recovery of data from the unit that will be replaced.
Determine BMC, BMD, AND AREA Gold Standard System Averages

Record Values from Gold Standard Phantom Label
1. In Section 1 on the Cross-Calibration Calculator (Figure 173), record values on the gold standard
phantom label (Figure 174).
Figure 173 Cross-Calibration Calculator Section 1

Figure 174 Gold Standard Phantom Label (Clear)
Figure 175 EVA Phantom Label (White)
Verify Correct System Operation

Remove Outliers
1. Review the entire QC Plot and print two (2) sets of QC plots on the Gold Standard system to verify
that the Gold Standard system has been working correctly.
2. Identify outliers on the plot (Figure 176).
a. Click on an individual outlier, or
b. Draw a box around a group of outliers.

Figure 176 Selecting Outliers
3. In the Scan Information popup, select each of the scans to be removed from the plot (Figure 177).
Figure 177 Removing Outliers from the Scan Information Popup Window
4. Remove any outliers from each quality control plot tab:

a. Start with BMD.
b. Then remove outliers from BMC.
c. Finally remove them from AREA plots.
Note Be sure to select each scan in the popup that you intend to remove. Outliers that
are overlooked may skew results.

Scan Averaging
5. On the Scan Averaging report, confirm that the Coefficient of Variation (CV) % for the selected
scans are:
BMD < 0.6% Area < 0.8%
BMC < 0.8%
6. If the CV values exceed these percentages, locate and eliminate any outlier scans from the QC plots.
Caution If your CV percentages for the scans exceed specifications, check for an outlier
(Red X at the top or bottom of the plot) that might have been overlooked. A
missed outlier will skew values and produce unacceptable CV percentages.
Table 57 Sample Results for Scan Averaging
Average Area 55.12 Area CV 0.32%

Average BMC 58.05 BMC CV 0.36%
Average BMD 1.053 BMD CV 0.41%
Technical Support Reports

7. To print a set of Gold System QC plots starting from the date of the system was issued:
a. Leave the Start Date field blank as shown on the Quality Control Plot Parameters screen
(Figure 178).
Figure 178 Quality Control Plot Parameters
8. Print each of the nine (9) tabs for all of the plot results.
9. Fax/email the plots and values to Hologic Skeletal Health Technical Support, BED-tsppt@hologic.com,
before proceeding.
10. Technical Support will tell you which values to record.
In some cases, you may be required to perform 20 scans of the spine phantom to obtain the values.
11. Record the QC plot values obtained/provided by Technical Support in Section 2 on the
Cross-Calibration Calculator Spreadsheet (Figure 179).

3.21.4 Cross Calibrate New or Additional System

Installation of the System being Cross-Calibrated
1. Install and calibrate the DXA system being cross-calibrated according to normal field service
procedures.
2. Verify proper functioning and calibration of the new system.
3. On APEX 3.5, 4.5, 5.5 and higher systems install the Base Analysis option from the install option list.
4. On systems with APEX 3.4 and higher skip to Step 8.
5. Systems with APEX 3.3 or less:
a. Load Base Analysis Protocol.
b. Log in as QDR, Exit without shutdown from the application. Insert the APEX application disk.
c. From My Computer, browse the disk to locate and open the folder Base Analysis Protocol
d. Double-click on Setup.exe.
6. Use Admin permissions to install.
7. When prompted the second time for a password, enter the password holx.
8. Reboot and log in as Field Service (with a service dongle if required).
9. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging to verify that the average of field service QC
calibration scans agree with the spine phantom label of the new system for BMD, BMC, and AREA.
10. On the Scan Averaging report, confirm that the % CVs are:
• BMD less than 0.6%,
• BMC is less than 0.8%, and
• Area is less than 0.8% for the selected scans.
11. If the CVs exceed these percentages, locate and eliminate any outlier scans from the QC plots.

• There must be a minimum of 11 installation reproducibility scans remaining.

• Additional scans may be required.
:
Figure 180 Sample Results for Scan Averaging
Result Average % CV
BMD 1.053 0.41%
BMC 58.05 0.36%
Area 55.12 0.32%
12. Print this report.
Scan the Gold Standard Phantom

Create Patient: Phantom # XXXXX
1. On the newly installed DXA system, create a patient called Phantom # XXXXX — where XXXXX
equals the serial number of (old) Gold Standard spine phantom.
Caution The patient must be called Phantom #XXXXX, where #XXXXX equals the
serial number from the phantom.
Do Not use Spine Phantom #XXXXX.
2. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > AutoScan.
3. Left-click on Select a Patient.
Figure 181 Select a Patient
4. Search for PHANTOM.

5. Select the PHANTOM #XXXXX that matches the Gold Standard phantom being used to cross
calibrate the new system.
6. Click OK.
7. Select AP Lumbar.

8. Enter 5 as the Number of times to run the scan.

9. AutoScan the gold standard phantom 5 scans at a time.
Caution Allow 20 min between the groups of 5 scans for the HVPS X-ray tube anode to
cool down.
10. Deselect Default.

Figure 182 Select AP Lumbar
11. Click Next.

12. Select Array for the scan type.
Figure 183 Select Array as the Scan Type
13. Click Next.
Note Performing these scans as the customer would use the system produces results
that are far more accurate for this calibration procedure.

Caution Record the values for the first scan to identify a start point.
AutoScan the gold standard phantom 5 scans at a time.
Allow 20 min between the groups of 5 scans for the HVPS X-ray tube anode
to cool down. This process replicates customer use of the system and minimizes
deviation in the scan results.
14. Perform a total of 20 scans on the Gold Standard spine phantom.
Analyze the First Scan
Lumbar Spine Analysis
1. From the QDR/APEX desktop, click Analyze Scan and manually analyze the first scan acquired.
2. Choose Lumbar Spine from the Analysis Method drop down.
Caution Do Not Use Spine as the analysis method.
3. Record the Scan ID in Section J on the Cross-Calibration Calculator.

4. Properly place the ROI and the inter-vertebral lines.
5. Click on Results > Close > Exit.
6. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze.
7. Click Compare.
8. Analyze the remaining 19 scans (comparing them to the first scan analyzed in previous step).
9. From Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging, select the 20 scans analyzed in the previous
steps.
10. Print the results.
Recording the Results
11. Record the averages for BMD, BMC and AREA in Section 3 in the Cross-Calibration Calculator
(Figure 184).
The spreadsheet will calculate the percent difference between the values on the old and new
machines.

12. Compare the values given to Figure 185 Conditions Range Diagram to determine your next step.
Figure 185 Conditions Range Diagram

Determine if a Recalibration is Required

Compare Test Results
Table 58 Cross-Calibration Criteria
Percentage Cross- Action

Condition Difference Calibrate
1 ≤ 0.5 No No Action Required
2 > 0.5 and < 3.0 Yes Perform cross-calibration procedure
3 ≥ 3.0 Yes Contact Tech Support
• Condition 1: If the percent difference for BMD, BMC, and AREA are all ≤ 0.5%, no cross-
calibration is required.
The results for all three averages must be < 0.5% different to meet condition 1.
• Condition 2: If any percent difference > 0.5% but < 3.0%, a cross-calibration is required.
Perform the steps from Section Calibrate System to Gold Standard Phantom Averages on Page 178
through Section Reset Field Service Application for Future Calibrations on Page 192.
• Condition 3: For percent differences ≥ 3.0%, contact Technical Support — Dxasupport@hologic.com.
Have the results of plots and spreadsheet available for review and discussion.
Calibrate System to Gold Standard Phantom Averages

Determine and Change Area and BMC Values
To determine the current Area and BMC values and change them to the desired values:
2. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibration (Figure 186).
Figure 186 Select Field Service Calibration
3. Click Number (Figure 187).

Figure 187 Click Number
Figure 188 Phantom Values
Update Values from the Cross-calibration Spreadsheet

4. Enter the determined values for Area and BMC recorded in Section B of the worksheet
(Figure 179).
Caution Enter Area and BMC data carefully on screen. The values appear in a different
order in the Cross-Calibration Calculator Spreadsheet.
AREA and BMC are displayed sequentially in Arrc.txt file.
BMD, BMC, and Area are in sequence in the Cross-Calibration Calculator
Spreadsheet.
5. Record the values for Area and BMC (from Section 2) on the worksheet in the area labeled
Section 6 (Figure 190).
Caution DO NOT change the values for Phantom Number or Height.
6. Click Continue.

Figure 189 Confirm Changes
7. Click Yes.
Accept ACF and BCF Values to Arrc File

1. Accept the changes to the ACF and BCF files from the Field Service Calibration program.
2. Click Yes to confirm the Array Phantom Information (Figure 2).

Figure 191 Phantom Information
3. Click OK.
4. Click OK in Area Within Limits (Figure 192).
Figure 192 Area within Limits
5. Click Write to update the Arrc.txt file (Figure 193).

Figure 193 Write
6. Click Exit.
7. In Windows Explorer, browse to C:\QDR\Data folder.
Figure 194 Arrc File Location
8. Double-click on the Arrc.txt file.

9. Verify that the information in the file matches the Area and BMC entered in Figure 188
(e.g., PHANTOM_CAL = 51.56 50.98)

Figure 195 Arrc File Details
Recalibrate New System With Gold Standard Spine Phantom

Calculating Correction Factors
1. Use the 20 Array scans obtained on the Gold Standard phantom.
2. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibration (Figure 196)
3. Click ACF/BCF.
Figure 196 Field Service Calibration ACF/BCF Button
4. Select the 20 gold standard phantom scans to re-calculate the correction factors.
5. Click Write (Figure 197) to finalize the update in arrc.txt.

Figure 197 Write Button
6. Click Exit.
Figure 198 Successful Calculation of ACF and BCF
7. Click Continue.

Figure 199 Arrc Updated
8. Click Continue.
9. Select Exit the QDR application with shutdown.
10. Reboot the PC.
Apply New Correction Factors to Gold Standard Spine Scans
1. Log on as Field Service.
2. Re-launch the application in Service Mode.
3. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze.
4. Select the 20 gold standard phantom scans on the All Scans tab for patient Phantom # XXXXX.
5. Click RECALYZE.
6. Click Next to apply correction factors to scans.
Scan Averaging
1. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging.
2. Select the 20 scans (Figure 200) for the patient Phantom # XXXXX just recalyzed.

Figure 200 Scan Selection for Averaging
3. Click Next.
Figure 201 Scan Averaging Results
Figure 201 shows one scan (second from the last on the list) that is out of range. The CV (%) is out of range
as a result.
4. Exclude this scan from the list.

Note These values should match the BMD, BMC, and Area in Section B of the TLS
spreadsheet. If these numbers DO NOT match, repeat steps 8a through 8i one
time. If they still do not match contact Technical Support.
5. Click Print.
6. Click OK.
7. Validate that the New System is calibrated with the Gold Standard Spine Phantom.
8. Recalibrate New System With Gold Standard Spine Phantom.
a. Use 20 good scans on the Gold Standard Spine Phantom.
b. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibration.
c. Click the ACF/BCF button to re-calculate the correction factors.
d. Click the Write button to finalize the update in arrc.txt and then click Exit.
e. Exit the QDR application with shutdown and then reboot the PC.
f. Log on as Field Service and re-launch the application in Service Mode.
g. Select Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze click the RECALYZE radio button and the 20
scans on the All Scans Tab for patient Phantom # XXXXX.
h. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging, select the 20 scans for patient Phantom #
XXXXX just recalyzed and print the results.
i. Record the averages for BMD, BMC, and Area in Figure G on the worksheet.
Determine New Spine Phantom Values

Perform Scans
Perform QC Scan
1. Perform one QC Scan on the new system’s new spine phantom.
This scan Passing or Failing does not matter at this point.
2. Perform 20 Array Auto Scans on the new system using the new QC phantom.
Note Be sure to use the correct NEW QC Spine Phantom biography.

Do the following:
1. Auto scan only 5 scans at a time.
2. Allow 20 minutes between the groups of 5 scans to allow the HVPS X-ray
tube to cool down
Compare Unanalyzed Scans to QC Scan
3. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Auto Analyze.
4. Select Compare.
5. Choose the scans performed in Step 2, on the Unanalyzed Scans tab.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Analyzed Scans tab, select the QC Scan performed in Step 1.
8. Click Next.
Perform Scan Averaging
9. From Utilities > Service Utilities > Scan Averaging (Figure 202), highlight the 21 scans just
analyzed.

Figure 202 Select Scan Averaging
10. Click Next to see the averages.

Figure 203 Scan Averages
Figure 203 shows one scan (second from the last on the list) that is out of range. The CV (%) is out of range
as a result.
11. Exclude this scan from the list.

12. Click Print.

13. Click OK
Note The BMD, BMC, and Area average numbers are the numbers that will be used
to re-label the new phantom. They must be from a tight grouping of scans
without outliers.
Record Averages for BMD, BMC, and Area in Section 8 on Worksheet

1. Record the BMD, BMC and Area averages in Section 8 on the worksheet.
Re-labeling the Phantom

Part Numbers
• Older clear phantom – 280-0155
• Newer EVA white phantom – LBL-00379
Note When requesting labels, be sure to provide the determined values to the Parts
Group, so that the values can be added to the label.
2. Re-label the new Spine Phantom with the averages of BMD, BMC and AREA from Step 9 (Section
8, Figure 204, on the worksheet).

3. On the new spine phantom label, indicate that the new values resulted from a cross-calibration by
writing the following:
Cross-calibrated to S/N XXXXX using Spine Phantom #YYYYY
Service Log
4. In Utilities > Service Utilities > Service Log, record the following information (Figure 205):
• This system was cross-calibrated with phantom # xxxxx from DXA S/N XXXXX to BMD XX.XX,
BMC XX.XX, and AREA X.XXX values and the Month/Day/Year on which the cross-calibration
was performed.
• The recalibration results of the spine phantom # XXXXX are now: BMD xx.xx, BMC xx.xx, and
Area x.xxx Phantom re-labeled Month/Day/Year.
Figure 205 Utilities Service Log
Reset System Values For Monitoring And Future Calibrations

1. Go to QC > QC Data Management > Setup Plot (Figure 206).
Figure 206 Setup Plot
2. Verify that the information is correct for the new system.

3. Then click the Next button.
Note The new system QC Phantom should be the only phantom in the list.

4. Select the 21 scans (or fewer if any were excluded) for the Spine Phantom performed in step Step 9
on page 187, (Section 8Section 8 on the worksheet).
Figure 207 Scan Selection
5. Click Finish.
6. Go to QC > QC Data Management > Select Scans.
Figure 208 Select Quality Control Scans
7. In the Select Quality Control Scans (Figure 208), select the scans used in step Step 9 on page 187,
(Section 8 on the worksheet).
Note The BMD, BMC, and Area average numbers must be from a tight grouping of
scans (no outliers).

8. Click Include Scans to add these to the QC Plots.

9. Click OK.
10. Go to QC > QC Data Management > Plot.
11. Change the Start Date to begin on the cross-calibration date.
12. Print all the plots for BMD, BMC, AREA, dO, K, Hi/Lo Air, ACF and BCF.
Reset Field Service Application for Future Calibrations

1. Go to Utilities > Service Utilities > Field Service Calibrations.
2. Click Number (Figure 209).
Figure 209 Select Number
3. Enter the Area and BMC values that were recorded in Section 8 on the worksheet).
Caution DO NOT change the Phantom Number or Height values (Figure 210).
Figure 210 Area and BMC Values

Caution Enter Area and BMC data carefully on screen. The values appear in a different
order in the Cross-Calibration Calculator Spreadsheet.
AREA and BMC are displayed sequentially in Arrc.txt file.
BMD, BMC, and Area are in sequence in the Cross-Calibration Calculator
Spreadsheet.
4. If asked, click Continue > Yes to Accept the new ACF and BCF values from the Field Service
Calibration program.
5. Click Write to update the Arrc.txt file.
Figure 211 Click Write
6. Select Exit.
7. In Windows Explorer, browse to the C:\QDR\data folder.
8. Double-click on Arrc.txt to open the text file.
9. Verify that the information for your system matches the numbers in the file for:
• Serial Number
• Phantom Serial Number
• Area
• BMC
10. Record the results from the Arrc.txt file in Section I on Worksheet (Figure 212).

Figure 212 Sample Results from Arrc.txt
11. Close the Arrc.txt file.

12. EXIT the application with Shutdown.
13. Log in as QDR.
14. Perform several QC scans to verify normal operations.
3.21.5 System Backup of Cross-Calibrated System

1. Restart the system.
2. Log in as QDR.
Note For additional details about System Backup, refer to MAN-04725 DXA
Replacement CPU Upgrade Checklist or to Technical Bulletin TB-00540.
3.21.6 Print Reports of Scans

1. Perform a System Backup.
2. Name the system backup Initial CrossCal_serial number _date performed, and label the disk with
this information.
Note Place a copy of this cross calibration backup on the initial system backup disk
included with the system software.
3. Include the completed:

• worksheet
• scan averaging printouts
• service report for the customer file

Updated Label

3.21.7 Typical Cross-Calibration Calculator Output

Figure 213 Typical Cross-Calibration Calculator Output

3.22 Complete Installation Report

3.22.1 Sample Install Reports
Among the reports and documents provided to Technical Support as part of the Service Report (SR) for an
installation are:
• Scan Averaging Report (Figure 214) for both systems
• Plots for both systems
• Spreadsheet Printout
• QC Report
• Radiographic Uniformity Test (for Whole Body System only)
Figure 214 Scan Averaging Report

Corrective Service Procedures
4 Corrective Service Procedures

4.1 PC Re-image or Replacement
4.1.1 Summary of Re-image or Replacement Procedure
Summary of procedure to re-image a PC (for which no hardware changes may be required) and to replace
a PC.
System Backup
1. Perform system backup
2. Print option file
3. Copy any custom templates
4. Copy of canned text dictionary
5. Copy of HX Questionnaire template
6. HL7 Report Configurations and template
7. Copy Base line Scans
8. Copy Saved DX Reports
9. Copy Saved HX Reports
10. Capture any Physicians Reporting Rules
11. Capture Customer Express Workflow -Study Configurations
12. Capture Report tabs configurations
13. Capture Analyze tabs configurations
14. Capture Archive configurations locations
15. Capture Archive configurations
16. Capture Connectivity configurations in application for options
17. Capture PC network configurations.
18. Verify any DB Sync (Access) or (SQL Express) settings and configurations
19. Verify and or capture any startup scripts
Re-image the PC
1. To re-image PC do the following.
2. Set Boot Order in BIOS for boot from DVD
3. Start Boot Recovery
4. Set up Windows
Install Replacement PC Assembly and Configure the Network
1. Configure System Network configurations
2. Install printer driver only
3. Install MS Word if required
4. Install APEX application
5. Install base analysis protocol option
6. Install PV and DX Report if required
7. Install HL7 option if required
8. Install FRAX
9. Install BCA reporting if necessary
10. Install HX Questionnaire
11. Install option keys
12. Transfer base line scans

13. Transfer Saved DX Reports

14. Transfer saved HX Reports
15. Recover any Physicians reporting rules
16. Recover system backup
17. Verify Express Workflow on Study tab
18. Verify Archive location pool and configurations
19. Verify DICOM settings
20. Verify Report Configurations
21. Verify Analysis configurations
22. Install and or verify DB Sync (Access) or (SQL Express) configurations.
23. Verify any other configurations or screens shot taken
24. Verify reporting workflow functions
25. Perform system backup.
26. Software Reload Checklist.
27. Purpose Requirements.
4.1.2 Additional Considerations Prior to PC Re-Image or Replacement

New APEX 5.5/5.6 and DX Report 7.2/7.3 Templates are different than older versions. They have newer
functionality and using the older customer template may not work. Start with the new templates and then
slowly make changes.
Older version Custom Canned Text will have to manually transferred to new DX Report Canned text.
PV is no longer required to be installed on the scanner PC on APEX 5.5/5.6 Horizon systems. However, if
PV is installed on the scanner PC these systems, then DX Report must also be reloaded to function
correctly.
28. In APEX 4.5/4.6 and APEX 5.5/5.6 the Physicians Report Rules must also be backed up separately.
4.1.3 Checklist to Replace DXA CPU before Software Upgrade or Reload

When a DXA CPU is replaced for service issues or during an upgrade, or when a complete application
software reload is required there are issues with templates, dictionaries, configurations settings and files
missing afterwards.
Because a system backup does not capture the installed options configurations, custom templates, libraries
or resulting reports the customer will call with issues of the information missing or workflow issues after
the service has been completed.
Follow this checklist to ensure that all the information on the customer’s existing computer is captured
prior to performing any replacements, upgrades or software reloads. Copy all necessary files to a CDRW
or USB removable media.
Procedure Checklist Prior to Computer System

Replacement or Reload
• Perform a system backup.
• Option File:
• Go to C:\QDR\LogFiles and print the Options.txt file.
• Copy custom templates:
• For Dx Report - Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report\Templates
Copy all of the customer’s templates, *.dot files, located in \Program Files\Hologic\ Physician’s
Viewer\ Options\DX Report \Templates to the CDRW or USB removable media in a folder
named DXReport Templates.

• For Canned Text Dictionary – Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX

Report\Temporary
Copy the canned text.mdb file Program Files\Hologic\ Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report
\Temporary to the CDRW or USB removable media in a folder named DXReport Temporary.
• For Hx Questionnaire - C:\QDR\ HxQuestionnaire\ Template\ HologicHx.xml or custom named
file xxxxx.xml.
•Copy the HologicHx.xml file in C:\QDR\HxQuestionnaire\ Template\HologicHx.xml to the
CDRW or USB removable media in a folder named HXQuestionnaire Template.
• HL7 Report configurations - Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report
\Temporary
• Copy the HL7report.mdb in Program Files\Hologic\ Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX
Report \Temporary to the CDRW or USB removable media in a folder named DXReport
Temporary.
• Copy the HologicHL7.dot from C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\OfficeXX\ STARTUP to
the CDRW or USB removable media in a folder named OfficeXX Startup.
Note XX refers to the version of MS Word.
• Client configurations Programs > Hologic > HL7 Client - Capture Screen shots
• Base line scans. Does the customer have base line scans on the system?
• Copy from C:\QDR\Data folder all the *.axx, *.pxx, and *.rxx files to the CDRW or USB
removable media in a folder named Data.
• Saved DXReports
• Copy from C:\Program Files \Hologic\Physician's Viewer\ Options\DxReport\Output\
folder all of the *.dot files to the CDRW or USB removable media in a folder named
DXOutput.
Note PV7 now has a Backup and Recover function that will allow you to backup and
restore report rules, templates, CannedText and HL7 configuration files.
• Saved HXReports
• Copy from C:\QDR\HxQuestionnaire\Results all of the files to the CDRW or USB
removable media in a folder named HXOutput.
• Express Workflow configurations
• Go to Utilities > System Configuration > Study and capture a screenshot.
• Configurations on the Report tab: - Screen shots of each tab.
• Configurations on the Analyze tab: - Screen shot of tab.
• Configurations for Analyze and Reports: - Screen shot of tab.
• Configured Archive locations:
• Go to Utilities > System Configuration > Archive and capture screenshots of all the archive
location pool configurations.
• Verify the archive configuration:
• Did the customer have “Do Not Delete Scans” checked?
• Did the customer DICOM Store to PACS?
• Did the customer archive to a mapped archive location?

• Capture screen shots of these configurations to verify after reload.

• Capture all network configuration configurations on connectivity site survey.
• Capture all the DICOM connectivity configurations on connectivity site survey:
• Host computer (the computer where the Hologic application is installed) parameters:
• IP Address
• Subnet Mask
• Default Gateway IP Address
• Preferred DNS Server IP Address
• Alternate DNS Server IP Address
• Host name
• Domain or workgroup name
• Names and versions of all installed software shown in the Add/Remove
• Windows Firewall Exceptions list.
• Network Send Nodes that the DXA application connects to:
DICOM Store
Worklist
Q/R
MPPS
SCP
Physicians Viewer Send Nodes
Central DICOM Server
• Host DICOM Configuration:
AE Title
Station Name
Listening Port
• DICOM Send Modality
Worklist sets modality?
Modality defined?
• DBSync installed and configured?
• Network archiving?
Procedure Checklist after Computer System Replacement
or Reload
• Configure the Network TCP/IP. – Admin login
• Install the printer drivers only – Admin login
• Installation of Microsoft Word if required – Admin login
• Install the proper DXA application version – QDR login
• Install base analysis protocol – QDR login (holx)
• Install Physicians Viewer and DX Report option – QDR login
• Once the Physician Viewer has been reinstalled, rename the cannedtext.mdb file to
cannedtextORIG.txt in Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX
Report\Temporary.

• Copy the canned text.mdb from the folder DXReport Temporary on the CDRW or USB
removable media into the Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX
Report\Temporary folder.
• In the Program Files\Hologic\ Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report \Templates folder,
rename the *.dot files to *ORIG.dot.
• Copy the saved files from the folder DXReport Templates on the CDRW or USB removable
media into the Program Files\Hologic\ Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report \Templates
folder.
• Install HL7 Report option. If necessary. – QDR login
• Copy the HL7report.mdb file in the folder DXReport Temporary on the CDRW or USB
removable media to the Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report
\Temporary folder.
• Copy the custom named file xxxxx.dot or the HL7report.dot from the CDRW or USB
removable media into the Program Files\Hologic\Physician’s Viewer\Options\DX Report
\Templates folder.
• Copy the HologicHL7.dot from the folder named OfficeXX Startup on the CDRW or USB
removable media.into the C:\Program Files \Microsoft Office\OfficeXX\ STARTUP.
Note XX refers to the version of MS Word.
• Client configurations Programs > Hologic > HL7 Client - from the Screen shots
• Install FRAX. – QDR login
• Install BCA Reporting options. If necessary – QDR login
• Install Hx Questionnaire. – QDR login
• Once Hx Questionnaire has been reinstalled, rename the HologicHx.xml in the Template
folder
• Copy the HologicHx.xml from the folder named HXQuestionnaire Template on the CDRW
or USB removable media into the C:\QDR\HxQuestionnaire\Template\ folder.
• Install all the option keys. – QDR login
• Base line scans. Did the customer have base line scans on the system?
• Copy from the CDRW or USB removable media in the folder named Data to the
C:\QDR\Data folder all the *.axx, *.pxx, and *.rxx files.
• Saved DXReports. Did the customer have DXReports on the system?
• Copy from the CDRW or USB removable media in the folder named DXOutput to the
C:\Program Files \Hologic\Physician's Viewer\ Options\DxReport\Output\ folder all of
the *.dot files.
Note PV7 now has a Backup and Recover function that will allow you to back and
restore the saved reports, templates, CannedText and HL7 configuration files.
• Saved HXReports. Did the customer have HXReports on the system?

• Copy all of the files from the folder named HXOutput on the CDRW or USB removable
media to C:\QDR\HxQuestionnaire\ Results.
• Recover the system backup. – QDR login
• Verify the Express Workflow configurations.

• Verify the archive location pool configurations.

• Verify the archive deletion settings.
• Verify the DICOM Store to PACS configurations.
• Verify the Report configuration settings.
• Verify the Analyze configurations settings.
• If required map drives for network archiving or DBSync. – Admin login
• Verify any other screen shots taken from the original computer and configured on the new
computer as required.
• Verify workflow test of a report from the application to PV and then a DX Report output.
• Perform a system backup
Table 59 Connectivity Survey Form
Device IP Address AE Title Port Number Check if Not

Used
Bone Densitometer DEXA 104
default default
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Modality Worklist □
Provider
MPPS □
Provider
PACS Store □
Provider
Storage Commit Provider □
Query Retrieve Scans □

Provider
Central DICOM Server HOLX_SERVER 105
default default
DBSync
Network Archiving
Table 60 PACS Vendor and Outbound reporting to RIS or EMR Provider Information
Name Vendor:

Table 60 PACS Vendor and Outbound reporting to RIS or EMR Provider Information
Product Name System Product Name:
Version Version:
Contact Name: Contact Name:
Phone #: Email: Phone #: Email:
Table 61 Direct Connect, Physician Viewer Station
Device IP Address Network Host/Computer AE Title

Assigned Name
Physician Viewer HOLX_PV1
1
2
3
4
4.1.4 System Backup

Perform a System Back to copy the system database to removable media or to a directory on a computer
network.
1. Click System Backup in the main window.
2. Enter the backup location (or accept the default location).
3. Accept the default backup filename, or enter a different filename (not recommended).
Caution Changing the backup filename makes restoring the correct file difficult.
4. Click OK.
4.1.5 Restoring Windows® 7 (ASY-08135)

Warning: All data on the hard drive is destroyed once the disk restore process begins. Only
qualified Hologic service engineers should perform this procedure.
This procedure restores Windows 7 on a QDR system with computer part number ASY-08135.

Boot PC with ASY-Image Disk

1. Insert the Windows 7 Recovery Image Disk (SFW-01933) in the DVD drive and restart the system.
2. During the boot up process, press F10 to access the System Bios.
3. Select the Storage-Boot Order sub menu option.
4. Ensure that the CD\DVD drive is listed first.
5. Press F10 to accept these changes.
6. Select the File-Save Changes and Exit sub menu option.
Start Disk Restore

1. Reboot the system.
2. The message “Starting Acronis Loader…” is displayed. The Acronis screen is displayed.
3. Click Acronis One-Click Restore. A confirmation message is displayed.
4. Click Yes to continue. The restoration process starts automatically and completes in a few minutes.
5. Remove the disk from the DVD drive and click Exit. The Acronis window closes and the system
reboots. The Windows setup screen is displayed.
Set Up Windows
1. Accept the default settings for the country, time and currency, and keyboard layout. Click Next.
2. For the user name enter Admin and for the computer name enter HOLOGIC-PC. Click Next.
3. Enter password for all three fields (password, retype password, and password hint). Click Next.
4. Enter the Product Key from the Windows COA. Click Next.
5. Check I accept the license terms. Click Next.
6. Select Ask me later.
7. Set the local date, time, and time zone. Click Next.
8. Select Work network. Windows setup finalizes the settings and then Windows opens under the
Admin account.
9. Select Log Off. Login as Field Service.
10. Open the control panel and select Windows Update > Change settings.
11. Set the Important updates frequency setting to Never check for updates (not recommended). Click
OK.
12. Go back to the control panel home and select Action Center > Change Action Center settings.
13. Uncheck all messages except Network firewall and User Account Control. Click OK.
14. Log out of the Field Service account and log in with the QDR account.
15. Open the control panel and select Action Center > Change Action Center settings.
16. Uncheck all messages except Network firewall and User Account Control. Click OK.
17. Close the control panel and log out.
Re-Install Applications
The ASY-08135 Image Disk only contains the Windows 7 operating system. No pre-installed Hologic
applications are included on the disk.
1. Log in as QDR user.
2. Manually install Hologic applications such as Apex/QDR and Physician’s Viewer.
3. Reinstall any required non-Hologic software or files such as MS Word and custom DxReport
templates.

4.1.6 Install Replacement PC Assembly and Configure the Network

PC Replacement
Prerequisites
• A license key. The system prompts you for a license key during the installation. The license key is
provided for the application installation by tech support.
• A system with Microsoft Windows 7 installed.
Archive and backup
1. Log on as QDR User.
2. Archive all the scans on the system.
3. Perform a system backup.
4. Exit QDR without shutdown and close any other open applications showing in the taskbar at the
bottom of the screen.
5. Copy all the .pxx and .rxx files from the C:\QDR\data folder to a removable drive.
6. Log off QDR and log in as Field Service.
7. Go to Utilities > Report tab > DXReport Tab, click on Backup/Recover to perform a DXReport
Backup to the removable drive.
Figure 215 DX Report Tab

Figure 216 Click Backup/Recover
Note The DXReport backup captures the following reporting information listed in the
.zip file.

Figure 217 DXReport Backup Reporting Information
Install APEX 5.6 or later

Installation of new PC
1. Install the new PC, insert the CommCon and any optional Internal or External drives from the
original PC.
2. Log in as ADMIN.
3. Insert the APEX System Software
4. DVD into the DVD drive. The Auto Play dialog box is displayed.
5. In the General options section, click Open folder to view files.
A list of files on the installation DVD is displayed. Or browse the disk’s contents.
6. Install the CommCon drivers. Using Hardware Manger install the required drivers from the APEX
System Software > Device Driver folder on the APEX application DVD.
7. Reboot the PC.
Installation of SQL Server 2012 Express software
1. Log in as ADMIN.
2. Browse the APEX application DVD double-click on the SQL Server 2012 Express folder.
3. Right-click Setup.bat and select 'Run as administrator'.

4.
Note The installation program begins. The progress of the SQL Server 2012 Express
installation will be displayed in the command window. A message will be
displayed when it has completed. This may take several minutes so please be
patient.
5. Reboot the PC.

Install Printer Driver if Required
1. Log in as ADMIN.
2. Install the printer driver only. No other part of the printer applications should be installed.
3. Reboot the PC.
Configure the Connection to the Network.
1. Log in as ADMIN.
2. Input the network configuration settings information noted before removing the original PC.
3. Reboot the PC.
Install MS Word 2013 If Necessary
1. Log in as ADMIN.
2. Use the Word Restore disk to install MS Word 2013 program.
3. Use internet connection to license the MS Word 2013 program.
4. Refer to TB-00871_001 for MS Word 2013 field activation
5. .Reboot the PC.
Installation of APEX 5.6 Software
1. Log in as QDR User.
2. Go to the APEX application
3. DVD in the drive and locate Apex System Software folder.
4. Double click on the folder.
5. Double-click Setup.exe.
The installation program begins and setup information is displayed. Then the InstallShield Wizard
and then the Welcome screen is displayed.
Figure 218 InstallShield Wizard

Figure 219 Welcome Screen
6. Click Next. The License Agreement screen is displayed.

Figure 220 License Agreement Screen
7. Read the agreement.

8. Click Yes to accept the terms of the agreement.
9. The Select APEX Machine Type is displayed. Select Horizon Systems.
10. Click Next.
Figure 221 Select Horizon Systems
11. The Select Horizon Machine Type is displayed. Select the appropriate Horizon Model, click Next.

Figure 222 Select Horizon Machine Type
12. The Serial Number screen is displayed. Enter the serial number and Install key. Click Next.
Figure 223 Serial Number
13. The Choose Destination Location is displayed. Click Next to accept the C:\QDR folder as the
destination location. A progress bar displays while the program files are being installed.
14. The InstallShield Wizard Complete screen appears. Yes, I want to restart my computer now option
is selected.
Figure 224 Restart Computer
15. Remove the APEX applications DVD from the DVD drive. Click Finish.
16. The system reboots.


18. Navigate to the APEX Task Bar.
19. Click Help > About APEX. The About Hologic APEX Software screen appears.
Figure 225 About APEX
20. Is the correct Version installed displayed in the Version box?

21. Click OK.
22. Restore the scan files from the removable drive and system recovery.
23. Copy all of the .pxx and .rxx files from the removable drive to the C:\QDR\data folder.
24. Recover the system backup performed just prior to exchanging the PC's.
25. After reconcile completes
26. Exit APEX with Shutdown.
27. Restart the PC and login as ADMIN.
28. Go to
29. Utilities > Report tab > DXReport tab, recover the report backup .zip file from the removable drive.
30. Exit with Shutdown.
31. Perform system backup.
32. Restart the PC.
33. Login as QDR User.
34. Perform another System Backup. Name the back as Initial APEX 5.6 Backup xxxxxxxx.zip (=date
stamp).
35. Store the backup in a safe place.
Optional Hologic Connect and APEX Log Collector installations
1. Install and configure Hologic Connect. Refer to TB-00928_001
2. Install the APEX Log Collector.
3. Verify that two application short cuts are on the desktop.
4. Instruct user on use of the APEX Log Collector.
5. Instruct user on use of Hologic Connect.
Note When Hologic Connect is started and connection is made to the system by the
Help Desk, the APEX application will turn off the table communications. After
connection is terminated the Apex application must be restarted to use the table.

4.2 Network Configuration

4.2.1 DICOM Configuration and Testing
During system installation or upgrade, DICOM options and related network parameters need to be
configured and tested for proper operation.
Improper configuration and/or lack of testing negatively impacts Applications Training and customer
satisfaction.
Use the following procedures to configure and test DICOM Store, Query/Retrieve and Modality Worklist
options on systems with APEX application software.
Navigation within this document is based on the configuration table in the DXA Connectivity Site Survey.
DICOM Configuration
Use the following table to configure DICOM and related network parameters on a QDR bone densitometer
(DXA) system. Click on any parameter to see its configuration screen and how to navigate to it.
The example shown below is for a local network using Conquest on the FE laptop as a PACS. All
parameter values shown are examples; actual values at any given site may vary. You should use the actual
values from the Connectivity Site Survey for your site.
Table 62 Local network Sample
Device Check if
IP Address AE Title Port Number Not Used
Bone 192.168.75.101 DXA01 104

Densitometer
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 
Modality 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678

Worklist Provider
MPPS Provider 
PACS Store 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678

Provider
Storage Commit
Provider
Query Retrieve 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678
Scans Provider
Central DICOM 
Server
DICOM Host Configuration
To navigate to this screen:
From the APEX main screen, select Utilities > System Configuration > DICOM and click on the Host tab.
On this DICOM Configuration Screen (Figure 226) you must:
1. Configure the host QDR system AE Title and Port Number.

Station Name is optional and can be left blank.

Figure 226 DICOM Configuration
Worklist Provider Configuration

1. To navigate to this screen, from the Apex Main Screen, select Utilities > System Configuration >
DICOM
2. Click on Configure Worklist Provider (Figure 227).
3. On this screen, you must Configure Worklist Provider AE Title, IP Address, Port Number.

Figure 227 Worklist Provider
DICOM Store (Send) Configuration

1. To navigate to this screen from the APEX main screen, select Utilities > System Configuration >
DICOM. Click on the Send tab and then click Add Destination.
2. On this screen you must:,
• Configure PACS (or DICOM Store Provider) AE Title, IP Address, Port Number
• Enter a Destination Name (alias) for the PACS
• Define (using Check Box) the PACS
• (or DICOM Store Provider) as a Scan Archive location
j. Deselect the Unicode checkbox (Figure 228), unless character sets such as Japanese or Chinese are
present. Using Unicode causes some PACS systems to reject DICOM files.

Figure 228 Deselect Unicode Checkbox
DICOM Query Retrieve Configuration

To navigate to this screen:
1. From the APEX main screen, select Utilities > System Configuration > DICOM. Click on the Send
tab and then click Add Destination.
2. On this screen you must configure
• PACS (or Query Retrieve Provider)
• AE Title
• IP Address
• Port Number

Figure 229 DICOM Query/Retrieve Destinations.
IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuration

1. To navigate to this screen, from the Windows Desktop, select Start > Control Panel > Network
Connections.
2. Click on Local Area Connection > Properties, scroll down.
3. Click on Internet Properties (TCP/IP) to highlight it.
4. Click Properties.
5. On this screen you must, configure the:
• QDR system
• IP Address,
• Subnet Mask.

Figure 230 IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuration
DICOM Testing
Always test all DICOM services purchased on the customer network and PACS. Failure to do so may
result in loss of customer data.
If the customer network or PACS is not available for testing, use the following procedures to locally setup
and test DICOM services to verify proper operation of the Hologic modality. NOTE: Local testing is not a
replacement for testing on the customer network and PACS.
The example shown below is for a local network using Conquest on the FE laptop as a PACS. All
parameter values are examples; actual values at any given site may vary.
Click on any DICOM Service or linked Device in the table below for a detailed test procedure.

Table 63 DICOM Service or Linked Device
DICOM Service Device IP Address AE Title Port Number Check if

Not Used
Bone 192.168.75.101 DXA01 5010
Densitometer
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway
Modality Modality Worklist 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678

Worklist Provider
MPPS Provider
Store PACS Store 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678

Provider
Storage Commit
Provider 
Query/Retrieve Query Retrieve 192.168.75.100 PACS01 5678
Scans Provider
Central DICOM
Server 
Local Test Network and PACS Setup
1. Use an appropriate network cable to connect the QDR system directly to your laptop.
2. Set your laptop Local Area Connection IP Address to 192.168.75.100 and the Subnet Mask to
255.255.255.0.
3. Set the QDR system Local Area Connection IP Address to 192.168.75.101 and set the Subnet Mask to
255.255.255.0.
4. On both devices, create Windows Firewall exceptions for ports 104, 105, 5001, 5010 and 5678.
5. Configure Conquest AE Title and Port Number.
a. Start Conquest.
b. Click on the Configuration tab.
c. Configure the AE Title and Port Number parameters as shown below (leave other parameters at
default value).
d. When done, click Save Configuration.
e. On the Confirm Restart popup window, click Yes.
Configure Conquest Known DICOM Providers.
In the Conquest window,
1. Click on the Known DICOM Providers tab.
2. Configure the parameters as shown below.
3. When done, click Save This List.
4. On the Confirm Save popup window, click Yes.

Figure 231 Known DICOM Providers
Worklist Provider Test

Create a Test Modality Worklist File
1. On your laptop, start Windows Explorer.
2. Navigate to the C:\dicomserver\WorklistTest folder.
3. In this folder, open the qdr1.hl7 file.
4. Edit the parameters below in the qdr1.hl7 file.
5. When done, perform a Save As using qrqdrtest.hl7 as the filename to the
C:\dicomserver\WorklistTest folder.
• Procedure Start Date: change to today’s date in YYYYMMDD format
• Accession Number: change to 2222
• Patient Name: change to Worklist^Test^Patient
• Patient ID: change to 1111
1. Move the Test Modality Worklist file into the Conquest database.
2. On your laptop, arrange the desktop so that you can see both the Conquest and Windows Explorer
windows.
3. Drag and drop the QRQDRtest.hl7 file into Conquest.
4. Click on the Conquest window.
5. Click Yes in the Confirm popup window.
6. Configure APEX worklist parameters.
7. Start the APEX application.
8. On the APEX main screen select Utilities > System Configuration > DICOM.
9. In the System Configuration window, deselect the Input From File Enable check box.
10. Verify that the Modality and AE Title text boxes are blank
Delete any text present in either box.

11. Leave all other parameters at default value.

12. Click OK when done.
C-ECHO the Modality Worklist Provider.
1. On the APEX main screen, select Utilities > System Configuration > DICOM.
2. Click on the Configure Worklist Provider button.
3. In the Worklist Provider Configuration window click C-ECHO.
4. Verify that the C-ECHO result is SUCCESS.
Perform a Modality Worklist Query from APEX to PACS.
1. On the APEX main screen select Perform Exam.
2. In the Select a Patient for This Exam window,
3. Click on the Worklist tab.
4. Click Query.
5. When the query completes, click on QR Test, Patient to highlight it as shown below.
6. Click OK.
Figure 232 Select a Patient for this Exam
Enter the Worklist Test patient into the QDR database.

1. On the Warning No Patient Match screen, click OK.
2. On the Select/Create Patient For Exam screen, click New Patient. On the Patient screen,
3. Click OK.
Verify that the Modality Worklist Query/Retrieve Completed Successfully without any
Errors.
4. On the Patient Confirmation screen, deselect the Report 10 Year Fracture Risk For This Patient
check box,
5. Click OK.

6. In the Select Scan Type window (Figure 233), verify that the Patient Name is Worklist, Test Patient
and that the Patient ID is 1111.
This indicates a successful test.
7. When done, click Cancel.
Figure 233 Select Scan Type
DICOM Store (Send) Test

1. Set up the scan Archive parameters.
2. Start the APEX application.
3. On the APEX Main Screen, click Utilities > System Configuration > Archive.
4. Unless already selected, click on the Delete After archiving Twice radio button to select it.
Figure 234 Archive Tab

Create a Test Patient

1. On the APEX main screen, select Patients.
2. Click New Patient.
3. Configure the patient information exactly (Figure 235).
4. When done, click OK.
Figure 235 Patient Configuration
Set up the QDR system to perform a test scan.

1. On the QDR operator panel, press Center Table.
2. Place the Spine Phantom on the table and align it to the crosshair laser.
3. Perform an AP Lumbar Spine scan.
4. On the APEX main screen, select Perform Exam.
5. Select the QR Test, Patient.
6. Click OK.
7. On the Patient Confirmation screen, enter 123456789 into the Accession Number text box.
8. Click OK.
9. On the Select Scan Type screen, select AP Lumbar Spine.
10. Click Next.
11. Set the Scan Length to 6.0 inches.
Analyze the scan just performed
1. When the scan completes, click Analyze Scan.
2. On the Select Analysis screen, click Next.

3. In the Scan Analysis window, verify the analysis is correct.

4. Click Close.
Create a DICOM Report of the Analyzed Scan and Send it to PACS.
1. On the Exit Analysis screen, click Report.
2. On the Select Scan screen, verify the scan just performed is highlighted.
3. Click Next.
4. On the Print screen, click DICOM/IVA Report.
5. On the DICOM Report screen, click on PACS01 in the Destination List pane and then
6. Click Send.
Verify that the Report Sent Successfully to PACS.
1. In the DICOM Report Window, click View Queue > View Log. Verify that the status is Success for
Patient ID 123456789.
2. When done exit by clicking Close > Close > Cancel.
DICOM Query Retrieve Test
1. Set up a test patient that has been scanned as described inDICOM Store (Send) Test on Page 222.
2. In APEX delete the Test Patient scan and patient.
3. On the APEX main screen, select Utilities > Database Tools > Patient Management.
4. In the Database Manager window, click on QR Test, Patient to highlight it and
5. Click Manage Scans.
6. In the Select Scans window, click on the scan just performed as shown below
7. Click Erase Scans.
8. In the QDR popup window, click Yes.
9. In the Patients window, click Erase Patient.
10. In the QDR popup window, click Yes.
11. When done, click Close.
Figure 236 Select Scans

Verify that the QR Test Patient was Deleted

1. On the APEX main screen, select Patients.
2. In the Patients window, verify that the QR Test, Patient is not present in the Patient List.
3. Perform a Query.
4. Retrieve of the archived scan.
5. On the APEX Main Screen, select Archive > Query/Retrieve Scans.
6. In the DICOM Query Retrieve Studies window, enter 123456789 into the Patient ID text box
7. Click Query.
8. When the Retrieve pane populates (shown below), click on QR Test, Patient to highlight it and
click Retrieve.
9. When done, click Close.
Verify that the Query Retrieve of the archived scan completed successfully.
1. On the APEX main screen, select Scans.
2. In the Scan Drawer window, click on QR Test, Patient.
3. Click on the Analyzed Scans tab and
4. Verify that the Lumbar Spine scan you performed earlier displays.

4.3 FRU Remove and Replace Procedures

This section describes how to remove and replace the Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) in the Horizon to
safely perform a FRU removal or replacement, take care to follow the procedure precisely as written.
Note Whenever a component in the X-ray path is replaced, you must recalibrate and
rerun QC.
4.3.1 Recommended Tools

Table 64 Recommended Tools
Tool Size/Type
Hex driver 3/32-in.
Hex driver or wrench 5/32-in.
Nut driver 1/4-in.
Nut driver 3/8-in.
Nut driver 5/16-in.
Nut driver 7/16-in.
Screwdriver Narrow slotted
Screwdriver Phillips head
Screwdriver Slotted
Wrench 3/8-in.
Caution ESD PRECAUTIONS: To prevent damage due to ESD (Electrostatic

4.3.2 Electronics Tray FRUs

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs in the Electronics Tray/Carriage Drive area of
the system (Figure 238 and Figure 239). To remove any of the FRUs in the Electronics Tray assembly,
remove the 6 Phillips retaining screws and remove the cover. Next, remove the nut that holds the ground
wire to the cover ground lug.
4.3.3 Electronics Tray Printed Circuit Boards

To remove and replace the Distribution Board, Motor Controller Board, Power Supply or AY Drive Board,
refer to Figure 238 and Figure 239 and follow this procedure:

Figure 237 Electronic Tray FRUs*
* C-arm Y Belt not shown.

1. Move the C-arm all the way to the right.
2. Turn off the computer power and the main circuit breaker on the rear of the foot end pedestal.
3. Remove the cable covers and unplug the cables on the board to be replaced.
4. To remove the board, unscrew the Phillips screws holding the board.
Note Some boards have standoffs and/or plastic hold-down snaps.
5. To replace the board reverse the steps.

6. Restore the motor cable shield.
Note When replacing the AY Motor Controller board, make sure that you set the ID
switch to 7. When replacing the TZ Control Board, make sure that you set the
Normal/Service switch to the Normal position.

Figure 238 Horizon A Electronics Tray FRUs (Right Rear)
Figure 239 Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi Electronics Tray FRUs (Left Rear)
4.3.4 C-arm Y Belt

To remove and replace the C-arm Y-Belt:
2. Turn off the computer power and the main circuit breaker on the rear of the foot end pedestal.
3. At the encoder end of the belt, loosen the 2 bolts holding the tension block, remove the tensioning
nut, and remove and replace the belt.
5. Tighten the tension nut so that the spring compresses to 7/8 in. The bracket cutout can be used as a
measuring guide. (The inside of the washer should be flush with the bracket cut).


7. Perform the Calibrate MOTOR$AY procedure detailed in Section 20.3 MOTOR$AY (A, W)
Calibration on Page 218.
4.3.5 C-arm Y Motor or Gear Case

To remove and replace the C-arm Y-Motor or Gear Case:
2. Shut down the computer and then turn off the main circuit breaker.
nut and remove the belt.
4. At the motor end of the belt, remove the cable cover and unplug the motor cable from the Motor
Controller Board.
5. Remove the four Allen bolts, and nuts, holding the motor and gearcase.
Note The two bottom nuts are accessible with a ratchet wrench and extension.
6. Remove the motor first, then the gearcase.

7. If replacing the gearcase, install the pulley from the old gearcase on the new gearcase.
8. Replace the motor and gear case assembly making sure to align the gasket correctly. Snug the Allen
bolts, but do not over tighten.
9. Install the belt on both pulleys.
10. At the encoder end of the belt, install the tension spring and tensioning nut.
11. Tighten the tension nut so that the spring compresses to 7/8 in. The bracket cutout can be used as a
measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush with the bracket cut).
13. Restore the cable shield and ground strap terminations.
14. Restore power, boot the computer and login as Service.
4.3.6 C-arm Y Encoder

Before removing power from the system:
1. Remove both cable covers.
2. Unhook the center cable hold-down clip.
3. Free the encoder cable without unplugging it.
To remove and replace the Encoder:
1. Move the C-arm towards the center of the Scanner (so the encoder is accessible).
3. Unplug the encoder from the Motor Controller Board and pull out the cable.
4. Remove the coupling hardware holding the encoder to the belt drive.
5. Remove the encoder from the bracket assembly.
6. Replace the encoder on the bracket, install the coupling but do not tighten the screws.

Note When starting this procedure, make sure the encoder coupling setscrew is not
tightened.
4.3.7 Table Y FRUs (A, W and Wi Only)

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with the Table Y motion of the
Horizon.
1. Before removing power from the Horizon, move the table to the far left using the Motor Control
Pad. The Motor Control Pad can be accessed from the Horizon Main Menu screen by choosing
Utilities > Emergency Motion.
2. Shut down the computer and then turn off the main circuit breaker on the foot end pedestal.
3. Remove 2 screws from the right table rail end cover, and slide the cover off from the end.
Figure 240 Table Y FRUs
4.3.8 Control Panel (All models)

To remove and replace the Control Panel:
2. Remove 3 screws located under the Control Panel box.
3. Unplug the cable and ground strap (from the Control Panel to the Control Panel board) on the
Control Panel board and remove the panel.
4. To replace the Control Panel reverse the steps.

4.3.9 PCBs Under Right-Side of the Table

To remove and replace the boards under the table (TY Motor Controller Board or Control Panel Controller
Board):
1. Unplug the cables on the board to be replaced.
Note Some boards have standoffs and/or plastic hold-down snaps.
3. To replace the board, reverse the steps.
Note When replacing the TY Motor Controller board, ensure that the ID switch is set
to 5.
4.3.10 Table Y Belt

To remove and replace the Table Y-Belt:
Figure 241 Foot End Table Y FRUs
1. Center the table and remove the two screws that secure the tabletop in place.
3. Pull the tabletop to the left far enough to remove the right table rail end cover, and remove the
cover. Mark this as the right cover so that it is not confused later with the left cover (they are not
interchangeable).
4. Pull the tabletop to the right far enough to remove the left table rail end cover, and remove the
cover. Mark this as the left cover so that it is not confused later with the right cover (they are not
interchangeable).

10. Perform the procedure detailed inCalibrate TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi) on Page 122.
tightened.
4.3.11 Table Y Motor or Gearcase

To remove and replace the Table Y Motor or Gearcase:
1. Remove the belt Table Y Belt.
2. Remove the Table Y Belt as described above.
3. Unplug the motor cable from the Motor Controller Board.
5. Remove the motor and the gearcase.
bolts but don’t over tighten.
9. At the encoder end of the belt, install the tension spring and tensioning nut.
tightened.
4.3.12 Table Y Encoder

To remove and replace the Table Y Encoder:
1. Center the table and remove the two screws that secure the tabletop in place.
3. Pull the tabletop to the left far enough to remove the right table rail end cover, and remove the
cover. Mark this as the right cover so that it is not confused later with the left cover (they are not
interchangeable).
4. Pull the tabletop to the right far enough to remove the left table rail end cover, and remove the
cover. Mark this as the left cover so that it is not confused later with the right cover (they are not
interchangeable).
6. Remove the coupling holding the encoder to the belt drive.

tightened.
4.3.13 Table X FRUs

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with Table X motion of the system.
Figure 242 Table X FRUs
Table X Motor Controller PCB

To remove and replace the TX Motor Controller board:
1. Before removing power from the system, move the table up as far as it will go.
2. Remove 6 flat head Phillips screws from the upper pedestal cover and remove the cover.
4. Unplug the cables on the TX Motor Controller board.
6. To replace the board reverse the steps.
7. Restore the motor cable shield
Note When replacing the TX Motor Controller board, ensure that the ID switch is set
to 4.
Table X Belt
To remove and replace the Table X Belt located within the X Table Drive Assembly:
1. Before removing power from the system, move the table to the far left using the Motor Control Pad.
The Motor Control Pad can be accessed from the Main Menu screen by choosing Utilities >
Emergency Motion.
3. Remove 2 screws from the right table rail end cover, and slide the cover off from the end.
4. Remove the front endcap from the table X drive assembly (3 Phillips screws).

5. Remove the back Phillips screw from the right side cover (of the table X drive assembly) and slide
the cover out from the front. This provides access to the belt.
11. Perform the procedure detailed inCalibrate TX on Page 124.
Note When starting the MOTOR$TX calibration procedure, make sure the coupling
setscrew is not tightened.
Table X Motor or Gearcase

To remove and replace the Table X Motor or Gearcase:
1. Remove the Table X Belt as described above.
2. Remove 5 flat head Phillips screws from the upper pedestal cover and remove the cover.
3. Unplug the motor cable from the Motor Controller Board.
5. Remove the motor and the gearcase.
bolts but don’t over tighten.
9. At the encoder end of the belt, loosen the two bolts holding the tension block and install the tension
spring and tensioning nut.
12. Restore the cable shield and ground strap terminations.
Note When starting the MOTOR$TX calibration procedure, make sure the coupling
setscrew is not tightened.
Table X Encoder
To remove and replace the Table X Encoder located within the X Table Drive Assembly:
1. Before removing power from the system, move the table to the far left using the Motor Control Pad.
The Motor Control Pad can be accessed from the Main Menu screen by choosing Utilities >
Emergency Motion.
3. Remove 2 screws from the right table rail end cover, and slide the cover off the end.
4. Remove the front endcap from the X table drive assembly. The cover is held on with 2 hex screws.
5. Remove 6 Phillips screws from the right side cover (of the X table drive assembly) and slide the
cover out from the front. This provides access to the encoder and belt.

6. Remove 5 flat head Phillips screws from the upper pedestal cover and remove the cover. This
provides access to the Motor Controller Board.
8. Remove the coupling holding the encoder to the belt drive.
Note When starting the MOTOR$TX calibration procedure, make sure the encoder
coupling setscrew is not tightened.
4.3.14 Table Z FRUs (Horizon A Only)

This section describes how to remove and replace the FRUs associated with Table Z (up and down) motion
of the Horizon.
Figure 243 Table Z FRU (for Horizon A only)
Left Pedestal Right Pedestal

TZ Pedestal
To remove and replace either pedestal, refer to Figure 244 and complete the procedure that follows. The
procedure requires two pieces of 2 x 4 lumber, approximately 3 ft long, and two pieces of foam padding.
Figure 244 Installing the Rotary String Encoder
1. Remove the Electronics Tray covers.

2. Remove the flat head Phillips screws from the upper pedestal cover and remove the cover.
3. Remove the flat head Phillips screws from the lower pedestal cover and remove the cover.
4. Move the C-arm towards the pedestal to be replaced, but ensure that the service switches on the TZ
Motor Controller board are accessible.
5. Place two 2 x 4s on end, on top of the X-ray Source Assembly. The 2 x 4s should be oriented front to
back, on the X-ray Source Assembly, to support the table. Place foam padding between the 2 x 4s
and the table to protect the tape safety switch.
6. Push in the Emergency Stop switch.
7. On the TZ Motor Controller board, set the Normal/Service switch to Service and set the Direction
switch to Down.
8. Press the left and right switches together until the table just rests on the 2 x 4s.
9. If left pedestal remove the top bolts on the pedestal (9/16-in.). If the right pedestal remove the top
nuts on the pedestal (9/16-in.)
.
Note If removing the left pedestal, the left T-rail will become loose. Be careful not to
drop this T-rail.
If removing the right pedestal, the table’s foot end is floating and not captured
and can fall off the rail if the table is pulled toward the head-end.
10. Press the appropriate pedestal switch on the TZ Motor Controller board to lower the pedestal
completely.
11. Remove the pedestal power plug, the lower four pedestal bolts, and remove the pedestal.
12. Replace the pedestal and install the pedestal lower bolts and or nuts, but leave them loose for now.
13. Replace the power plug.
14. On the TZ Motor Controller board, set the Direction switch to Up.
15. Press the appropriate pedestal switch on the TZ Motor Controller board to raise the pedestal until it
just touches the T-rail.

16. Install the upper pedestal bolts leaving the bolts loose for now.
17. Using the switches on the TZ Motor Controller board, raise both pedestals and remove the 2 x 4s
and foam.
18. Measure from the inside of one T-rail to the inside of the other. It must be 65 in. at both the front and
back. If it is not, move the pedestal until the measurements are correct.
19. On the TZ Motor Controller board, set the Direction switch to Down.
20. Using the switches on the TZ Motor Controller board, lower both pedestals all the way down.
21. On the TZ Motor Controller board, set the Service switch to Normal. Press Reset (large black
button).
23. Launch Emergency Motion from the Utilities Menu in the application.
24. Move the C-arm to the right (head-end). Select Arm Right.
25. On the right side of the C-Arm, use a metric tape measure and measure from the front edge of the
table across the top of the table to the back edge of the right side of the C-arm.
26. Move the C-arm to the left (foot-end). Select Arm Left.
27. On the left side of the C-Arm, use a metric tape measure and measure from the front edge of the
table across the top of the table to the back edge of the left side of the C-arm.
28. With your hand force the foot-end of the table in or out to match the measurement taken at the head
end of the table.
29. Tighten the lower and upper pedestal bolts and nuts or the right (head-end) pedestal.
30. Repeat the measurement steps again to ensure these measurements are equal to one another from
the back of the C-arm to the front edge of the table.
Note If additional adjustment is needed, loosen the lower pedestal bolts on the right
(head-end) to make the adjustment.
31. Use the Emergency Motion to move the table out. Select Table Out.
32. Look at the clearance between the table rollers and top T-Rail on the foot end.
33. Use the Emergency Motion to move the table out. Select Table In.
34. Look at the clearance between the table rollers and top T-Rail on the foot end.
35. Adjust the foot end T-Rail until equal clearance is achieved at the table in and out positions.
36. Tighten the lower and upper pedestal bolts the left (foot-end) pedestal. Refer toCalibrate TZ on
Page 107 for details.
37. After you complete the calibration process, replace all covers and table pad.
4.3.15 Linear Rotary String Encoder

Installation
When replacing one of these encoders, verify that you have the correct part:
Table 65 Encoder Parts
Type of Encoder Part Number

Right Encoder ASY-06949
Left Encoder ASY-06949
Refer to Figure 243 and Figure 244 and follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the electronics tray covers.
2. Push in the Emergency Stop switch, then press and hold the Table Up switch to move the table all
the way up.

Warning: Shut down the computer, then turn off the main circuit breaker on the foot-end
pedestal.
3. Remove the flat head Phillips screws from the upper pedestal cover and remove the cover.
4. Remove the flat head Phillips screws from the lower pedestal cover and remove the cover.
5. Remove the linear encoder top screw (Phillips).
6. Remove the linear encoder bottom screw (access to the bottom Phillips screw is through the frame
hole).
7. Unplug the linear encoder cable from the TZ Drive board and pull the cable out.
Caution Do not allow the string to snap back into the encoder after being extended. This
can permanently damage the unit.
8. Route the new encoder cable through the path of the old encoder and plug it into the TZ Drive
board.
9. Install the rotary encoder at the bottom using the screw and two washers provided.
Note The bracket must sit on the top surface of the base frame before tightening.
10. Replace the linear encoder top screw by extending the string and fastening to the top using screw
and washers provided.
11. Turn on the instrument power, boot the computer and log in as Service.
12. Refer to the procedure inCalibrate TZ on Page 117 for details. When calibration and adjustment is
done, replace the pedestal covers.
Adjustment
Note Perform the following adjustment steps ONLY when the pedestal encoders are
NOT within the +/-2 counts specified (target value is 325 +/- 2).
13. Type Y, then press Enter.

A screen appears with content similar to the following:

Device State E_OK
Pedestal Mode OPERATIONAL
Table Status OK
Left Pedestal AT_TARGET
Right Pedestal AT_TARGET
Position 199649
Pos Limit Position 199930
Neg Limit Position 0
Lower Left 300
Upper Left* 3235
Lower Right 301
Upper Right 3234
Position Average 8
Driver Version 8.02
Device Version 2.30
Encoder Position* 3230
Encoder Neg Limit 383
Encoder Pos Limit 3234
A384;3235;383;3234
* Adjust both string encoder hubs until position equals 325 +/-2.
14. If adjustment of the right encoder is necessary, adjust the encoder by rotating the center hub until
the Encoder Position value is
325 +/-2.
15. Adjust the encoder by rotating the center hub until the 'Encoder Position' count value on the
monitor matches the 'Lower Left' count value.
16. Secure the three adjustment screws on the face of the encoder.
17. Repeat Steps 14 – 16 for the left encoder.
18. Return to Step 1 ofCalibrate TZ on Page 117 to recalibrate at the new encoder setting.
Note Upon recalibration, the 'Lower Right' and 'Lower Left' count values should
become virtually equal. If the 'Lower Left' and 'Lower Right' count values differ
by more than +/- 2 counts, readjust the encoder by rotating the center hub until
the 'Encoder Position' count value equals the 'Lower Left' count value +/- 2
count difference. Secure the three adjustment screws on the face of the encoder.
Return to Step 1 of theCalibrate TZ on Page 117 to recalibrate at the new
encoder setting.
4.3.16 Lower C-arm FRUs

This section describes how to remove and replace the X-ray Source and Filter Drum Assemblies located on
the lower C-arm (Figure 242), and Arm rotation FRUs (A only).

Figure 245 Lower C-Arm FRUs (010-0575 tank shown)
X-ray Source Assembly

The X-ray Controller is attached to the rear of the X-ray Source Assembly. The X-ray Controller and X-ray
Source Assembly together comprise a singe unit called the X-ray Source Assembly. The X-ray Source
Assembly is replaced as a complete unit.
Warning: The X-ray Source Assembly weighs 130 lb (59 kg). To prevent personal injury
two people are needed to safely remove the assembly.
X-ray Source Assembly Removal

The X-ray Source Assembly has an integrated X-ray Controller. To remove the X-ray Source Assembly:
1. Position the table as far up (A model only) and as far back as it will go for easier access to the X-ray
Source Assembly.
Caution Do not use the Table Lift function to raise the table. Use Emergency Motion or
pedestal switches on TZ control board only.
2. Select the Utilities > Service Utilities > System Diagnostics > Detectors tab.
3. Set Aperture to 7.

Figure 246 X-ray Source Assembly (Top View)
5. Remove the lower C-arm cover by removing 2 Phillips screws and sliding it out from the front.
6. Remove the 4 Phillips screws holding the Lead Shield Carriage Mounting Assembly and remove
the shield.
Remove the Filter Drum Assembly
7. Remove the Filter Drum Assembly.
Figure 247 Filter Drum Assembly
8. For A models only:

a. Lock the C-arm in place by securing the shipping brackets on each side of the arm.

b. Perform calibrations required after XRS replacement.

9. Remove the two screws securing the L-bracket from the front of the X-ray Source Assembly that
holds the X-ray Source Assembly to the C-arm (7/16 in.).
10. Carefully slide the X-ray Source Assembly out far enough to access the cable connections. Remove
the two cables and ground straps, then carefully slide the X-ray Source Assembly out of the C-arm
onto a pallet (requires 2 people).
11. Remove the Filter Drum support brackets from the top of the X-ray Source Assembly.
X-ray Source Assembly Replacement
1. Carefully slide the replacement X-ray Source Assembly back in place in the C-arm.
2. Replace the L-bracket.
3. Re-connect the three cables to the X-Ray Source.
4. For A models only: Remove the 2 shipping brackets on each side of the C-arm installed during
X-ray Source Assembly removal.
5. Install the X-ray Source Assembly Adapter Block, removed in an earlier step, on the replacement
X-ray Source Assembly.
6. Install the Filter Drum support brackets, removed in an earlier step, onto the X-ray Source
Assembly Adapter Block.
7. Replace the Filter Drum Assembly.
8. Install the Lead Shield Carriage Mounting Assembly.
Filter Drum/Aperture Removal and Replacement

This section describes how to remove and replace the Filter Drum/Aperture in Horizon™ systems.
Caution To safely perform Filter Drum/Aperture removal or replacement, take care to
follow the procedure precisely as written.
Whenever a component in the X-ray path is replaced, you must recalibrate and
rerun QC.
Table 66 Recommended Tools
Tool Size/Type
Hex driver 3/32-inch
Hex driver or wrench 5/32-inch
Nut driver 1/4-inch
Nut driver 3/8-inch
Nut driver 5/16-inch
Nut driver 7/16-inch
Screwdriver Slotted (1/4 in.)
Screwdriver Narrow slotted (1/8 in.)
Screwdriver Phillips head, 0
Wrench 3/8-inch

Caution ESD PRECAUTIONS: To prevent damage due to ESD (Electrostatic

Filter Drum Control Board

The Filter Drum Control Board controls the filter drum assembly to provide on-the-fly system calibration
and system integrity checks.
Filter Drum Removal

1. Power up the Horizon unit.
2. Release the Red Emergency Stop and use Emergency Motion from the console (recommended) or
use the computer to adjust the table for convenient access (Table 67).
Note In areas with limited physical access to the aperture and filter drum assembly,
on the Horizon C, lift the table insert to access the assembly. For W and A
systems, detach the table from its drive belt and push the table to the side
If the room doe not have enough clearance to push the table to one side, remove
the X-ray Source Assembly to access the aperture/filter drum assemblies.
Table 67 Table Adjustments for Filter Drum Access
Model Table Adjustment

Horizon A Raise the table move it back.
Horizon C Remove the table pad and remove the center section.
Horizon W Move the table up and to the side.
3. Power down the unit. Check that power switch position is down (Figure 248).
Figure 248 Power Off
4. Remove screws (2) from the C-Arm cover (Figure 249).

Figure 249 C-arm Screws Horizon Service Manual
5. Remove the top cover (Figure 250).

Figure 250 Remove Top Cover
6. From the front of the unit, loosen the mounting screws (4) to remove the lead shield (Figure 251).

Figure 251 Lead Shield
7. Unplug connectors J9 and J15 (labeled) from the aperture/filter drum controller board.
Figure 252 Removing Connectors
8. Remove the three (3) 3/32 in. Allen head screws that secure the filter drum assembly (Figure 253).

Figure 253 Filter Drum Assembly Screws
1. Remove the Filter Drum Assembly from the Horizon Unit.
Note Although the filter drum can be disassembled while attached to the Horizon
Unit, it is usually best, especially if the assembly will be replaced, to remove the
filter drum assembly and place it on the scanner table, a workbench, or other
convenient work area.
2. Remove the filter drum assembly from the Horizon unit (Figure 254).
Figure 254 Filter Drum Assembly Removed

4.3.17 Single-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly

(Ci and Wi Systems)
Table 68 Single-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly
Part Description
ASY-07159 ASSEMBLY, APERTURE/FILTER DRUM, SINGLE SLOT
Table 69 Aperture Plate Replacement Kit
Part Description
ASY-07557 KIT,HORIZON-CI/WI APERTURE REPLACEMENT
Figure 255 ASY-07159 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly Top View
Aperture Removal
1. Remove the four (4) 6-32 x .75 in. aperture screws (Figure 255).
Note Retain the plates for use during re-assembly.
2. Lift out the plate assembly.

3. To replace the aperture, perform the steps in Section Aperture Replacement on Page 247 and Section
on Page 280 of this document.
Aperture Replacement
1. Place the aperture assembly on top of the filter drum.
2. Orient the plate so that the short end is at the back of the filter drum assembly (Figure 256). The gap
at the back edge is 2.21 in (5.61 cm).

Caution The orientation of the plate is specific. The measurement from the slot to the
back edge of the plate is 2.21 in (5.61 cm). The distance from the front edge to
the slot is larger. If not, the table front to back alignment will be off. The back
edge of the beam will be cut off because the slot would be too far forward in the
beam path.
3. Tighten the four (4) aperture plate screws.

Figure 256 Aperture Offset

4.3.18 Multi-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly

(C, W and A Systems)
Table 70 Multi-Slot Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly
Part Description
ASY-07116 FILTER DRUM ASSEMBLY, HORIZON
Table 71 Field Replacement Kit for the Horizon Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly
Part Description
ASY-08683 FILTER DRUM, HORIZON, FRU
ASY-07098 ASSEMBLY, APERTURE/FILTER DRUM, NINE SLOT
Figure 257 ASY-07116 Aperture/Filter Drum Assembly Top View
Position the Table and Remove Screws

To replace these Field Replaceable Units (FRUs):
1. Center the table and position it for easy access to the assembly.
Note For Horizon A systems, it may be easier to position the table as far up and as far
back as it will go.

Figure 258 Circuit Breaker
3. Remove the lower C-arm cover by removing two Phillips dress screws on either side of the C-arm
cover and sliding it out from the front.
4. Remove the four (4) Phillips screws holding the Carriage Front Lead Shield and remove the shield.
Disassembling the Aperture

Disconnect Cables
1. Disconnect the Aperture Motor Cable from J12 on the Filter Drum Controller Board (Figure 259),
and then remove the cable from the cable clamp on the base plate.
Figure 259 Aperture Motor Jumper, J12
2. Disconnect the Aperture Position Cable from J2 on the Filter Drum Controller Board (Figure 260).

Figure 260 Aperture Position Connection, J2
Remove the Motor from the Front of the Assembly
Note The aperture assembly does not include a motor.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the aperture motor shaft to the aperture assembly (Figure 261).
Note This step frees the assembly and allow access to the screws below.

Figure 261 Aperture Motor Shaft Screws
Caution Upon completion of this step, the aperture assembly is no longer secured to its
mounting plate.
4. Refer to Figure 262 and remove the two screws (aperture belt side) and two screws (aperture motor
side) that secure the aperture assembly to the drum assembly.

Figure 262 Aperture Assembly Screws
Note You will need to slide the aperture assembly slightly to the left to access one of
the screws on the aperture motor side.
Remove the Aperture Plate

5. Make sure that all cables, clamps, and connectors are free from the board (Figure 263 and
Figure 264).
Figure 263 Loosen all Clamps and Connectors
6. Carefully lift the aperture plate off (Figure 264).

Figure 264 Lift the Plate Off
7. Place the plate in a safe area (Figure 265).

Figure 265 Set the Plate in a Safe Area

Align the Segments

Caution To ensure proper calibration, the old segments must be used with the new Filter
Drum Assembly. Always keep the replacement drum segments separated from
the original drum segments.
Insert the Drum Alignment Tool
8. Place the drum alignment tool (TLS-01886) in the notch on the inner and outer drum sections
perpendicular to and flush to the end plate (Figure 266).
Note The calibration key should be perpendicular to and flush with the end plate. The
end of the key with the flat surface should be towards the motor and the stepped
side facing down, so that it engages the slot in the end plate and slots in both
drums
Figure 266 Alignment Tool Placement
Number the Outer Drum Segments (1 – 6)

9. Remove the drum alignment tool without moving any drum segments.
10. With a marker, identify the first metallic (bone) segment of the outer filter drum with a number 1
(Figure 267).
Figure 267 Marking Segment
11. On the end plate, mark the location of Segment 1.

12. Rotate the drum with the segments in place, number each remaining segment, including the non-
metallic Lexan segment, and its location on the end plate.
13. Return to segment 1.
14. Loosen the screws and remove the segment.
15. Rotate the outer drum counter-clockwise to expose the screws that secure the next segment to the
drum.

16. Remove the segment and place it after segment 1 on the work table
17. Continue in order until each remaining segment (3 – 6) has been removed, then placed in sequence
on the work table.
Number the Inner Drum Segments (1 – 4)
18. With a marker, identify the first brass segment of the inner filter drum with a number 1.
19. Rotate the drum with the segments in place, number each remaining segment and its location on
the end plate.
20. Loosen the screws and remove the segment (Figure 21).
21. Removing Inner Segment
22. Rotate the outer drum counter-clockwise to expose the screws that secure the next segment to the
drum.
23. Number that segment 2 and remove it.
24. Continue in order until each remaining segment (3 – 4) has been numbered and removed.
Installing a Replacement Aperture Assembly

Install the Inner Drum Segments in the Replacement Aperture Assembly
perpendicular to and flush to the end plate in the location marked for segment 1 (Figure 268).
Figure 268 Drum Alignment Tool Placement for Installation
2. Align screw holes in the unmarked end plate to the approximate location of the screw holes in the
marked end plate (Figure 268).
3. Starting with segment number 1 (Figure 269), tighten the segments in order.

Figure 269 Install Inner Segment
Install the Outer Drum Segments in the Replacement Aperture Assembly

1. On the end plate in the location marked for segment 1, install segment number 1 (Figure 270).
Figure 270 Install Outer Segment
2. Install the remaining segments in order.

Installing the Replacement Assembly
1. Carefully remove the replacement aperture from its shipping fixture and position it on the aperture
mounting plate.
2. Reverse the above steps to complete the aperture replacement. Ensure that all cables are replaced
and all screws are tightened.
3. Replace the two aperture serial number labels with new labels from the kit:
a. LBL-02461 for a single aperture
b. LBL-02023 for the multi-slot aperture
Labels appear on the Filter Drum Assembly base plate (Figure 271) and on the back of the C-arm.

Figure 271 Filter Drum Assembly Base Plate Serial Number Location
4. Write the original aperture/filter drum serial numbers on the new labels.
5. Apply clear laminate 540-0111 over the serial numbers.
7. Perform the Calibrate Aperture Procedure detailed in the Horizon Service Manual, MAN-03310.
8. Replace all covers that were removed.
4.3.19 Serial Numbers and Date of Manufacture

New labels (Figure 272) are included with replacement assemblies (applies mainly to 4-slot, 9-slot
assemblies, and filter drum replacement).
on the back of the C-arm
Figure 272 Single-Slot Label

Figure 273 Multi-Slot Label
Two lines on the label must be completed.

Table 72 Serial Number and Date of Manufacture
Symbol Description Status

Serial Number Remains the same
Date of Manufacture Associated with the aperture
Table 73 Data Entered in Label Date of Manufacture Field
Repair Manufacturing Date

Aperture Plate Assembly Replacement Date of installation
Filter Drum Assembly without Aperture Change Stays the same
Label Placement
If an aperture assembly is being replaced, labels must be placed on the:
• Filter drum base plate.
• Back of the C-arm
If a drum assembly is being replaced, labels must be placed on the:
• Filter Drum base plate
• Back of the C-arm
4.4 Upper C-arm FRUs

This section describes how to remove and replace the Detector Assembly, ADC Board (A Only), Control
Panel, and Laser Assembly located on the upper C-arm. It also describes the procedure for replacing a
failing Detector Assembly.
4.4.1 Horizon A Detector Assembly Removal and Replacement

To remove and replace the Horizon A Detector Assembly (Figure 277):

Remove Covers
1. Shut down the computer
2. Turn off the main circuit breaker on the foot end pedestal.
3. Lift and remove the top C-arm cover.
4. Lift it carefully from the system.
5. Remove the 5/32 in. hex head screws (4) on both sides of the detector cover/shield (Figure 2).
Figure 274 Remove Screws on Either Side of Detector Cover/Shield
6. Remove the weight from the front of the C-arm (Figure 276).
Figure 275 Remove Weight
7. Slide the Detector Cover forward to clear obstructions and remove it (Figure 276).

Figure 276 Remove the Detector Cover

Figure 277 Detector Assembly (Upper C-arm Top Cover Removed)
8. Remove the upper C-arm back cover (Figure 278).

Figure 278 Remove Upper C-arm Back Cover
Remove Cables
9. Disconnect the cables (Figure 279) from A/D board:
a. three (3) from the Detector Board
b. one (1) ground to the chassis
c. one (1) from the A/D Board (Figure 280)
Figure 279 Detector Cables

Figure 280 Cable to AD Converter
Remove Detector Assembly

1. With a pencil, clearly mark the front (Figure 281) and back edges of the Detector Assembly on the
bottom plate.
Caution Do not use a permanent marker to mark the detector location.
Figure 281 Mark the Edges of the Detector Assembly

2. With a Philips screwdriver, start to loosen the Detector Assembly screws (Figure 282).
Figure 282 Loosen Detector Screws
3. With a needle-nose pliers, grip and remove the screws (4) that secure the Detector Assembly to the
upper C-arm base plate (Figure 283).
Figure 283 Use Pliers to Hold and Remove Screws from Detector
Caution Be sure to maintain a firm grip on the flat washer, lock washer and mounting
screw.
4. Lift the back of the detector slightly to clear obstructions.

5. Slide the Detector Assembly forward towards the front of the C-arm (Figure 284).
Figure 284 Slide and Lift Detector Assembly
6. Lift and remove the Detector Assembly from the C-arm.
4.4.2 Remove and Replace the Laser Assembly

Access the Laser Assembly
1. Place the Detector Assembly upside-down on a safe surface (Figure 285).
Figure 285 Place the Detector Assembly Upside-down
2. Remove the screws from the cover of the Detector Mounting Base Plate (Figure 286) to access the
laser assembly (Figure 287).

Figure 286 Remove Screws from the Detector Mounting Base Plate
Figure 287 Laser Assembly on Back of Cover
Remove the Laser Assembly

1. With a small Allen wrench, loosen the hex adjustment screws on the laser assembly (Figure 288).

Figure 288 Laser Assembly Adjustment Screws
Caution Small springs apply load from the laser to the cover. Do not lose them when
removing the adjustment screws.
Do not use power tools to remove the screws,
2. Remove the laser assembly (Figure 289).
Figure 289 Laser Assembly
Bottom Top
Laser Assembly Installation

1. Place the base plate over the laser assembly.
Caution Bring the base plate to the laser assembly to avoid losing the three (3) springs
mounted on the assembly.
2. Align the openings in the base plate to the screws in the assembly (Figure 290).

Figure 290 Position Base Plate over Laser Assembly
3. Hand-tighten to start the hex screws in the assembly (Figure 291).

Figure 291 Hand-tighten Laser Assembly Screws
Caution Always start the adjustment screws by hand. Do not use power tools to tighten
the screws.
4. Remount the detector assembly onto the base plate (Figure 19).
5. Align the laser detector base plate to the detector assembly cover.

Figure 292 Align the Laser Detector Base Plate to the Detector Cover
6. Tighten the detector base plate screws (Figure 293).

Figure 293 Tighten Detector Base Plate Screws
7. Place the board end of the Detector Assembly in the end of the C-arm (Figure 294).

Figure 294 Place the Detector Assembly in C-arm
8. Slide the assembly forward into place (Figure 295).

Figure 295 Slide Detector Assembly Forward in C-arm
9. Align the Detector Assembly to the pencil marks drawn before removal of the Detector Assembly.
10. Use a needle-nose pliers to start the screws holding the assembly.

Figure 296 Use Needle-nose Pliers to Start Screws
Caution Be sure not to grip the lock and flat washers when starting the screws.
11. Manually tighten the Detector Assembly screws with a screwdriver.
Caution Do not use power tools to tighten detector assembly screws.
12. Connect the ground wire.

13. Then attach the remaining four cables.
14. Power up the system to check that it is operational.
Mount Covers
1. Attach the weight to the front of the C-arm.
2. Replace the Detector Cover.
3. Replace the C-arm upper and lower covers.
Adjustments after Installation

Perform the calibrations detailed in Section 7 Calibrations after Detector Assembly or Laser Assembly
Replacement on Page 307.
4.4.3 Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi Detector Assembly Replacement and Removal

To remove and replace the Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi Detector Assembly:
Removal
2. Unplug the cables and remove the screws on the detector assembly and remove it from the system.
3. Lift off and remove top C-arm cover.
4. Remove the upper C-arm back cover.
5. Remove 4 5/32 in. hex head screws on either side of the detector cover/shield.
6. Remove the 4 Phillips screws that secure the detector assembly to the upper C-arm base plate.

Installation
1. Install the new detector assembly using the screws and cables removed in the previous step.
2. Turn on the Horizon power, boot the computer and login as Service.
3. Perform X-ray Beam Alignment (Section 22 Aperture Alignment and Calibration on Page 255).
4. Perform the Section 21.2 A/D Gain Control Adjustment on Page 226.
5. Perform the Laser Positioning Offset Adjustment (Section 21.1 Check Laser Positioning Offset on
Page 226).
6. Replace any covers that were removed and perform Detector Flattening (Section 21.6 Detector
Flattening on Page 240).
7. Perform the Field Service Calibration procedure (Section 21.4 Check Phantom Values on Page 228).
8. Perform a System Backup.
9. Perform a System Recover. Verify that the System Backup recovers without error.
10. Verify proper system operation.
Adjustments after Installation

11. Perform the calibrations detailed in Section 7 Calibrations after Detector Assembly or
Laser Assembly Replacement on Page 307.
4.4.4 Laser Assembly
To remove and replace the Laser, or Laser Detector Assembly:
Figure 297 Laser Assembly
2. Remove the top C-arm cover.
3. Remove the cables at the Detector Assembly.
4. Remove the 4 bolts holding the Detector Assembly (on rubber grommets) to the C-arm.
5. Remove the Detector Assembly.
6. To replace the laser only, loosen the laser clamping screw. To replace the laser assembly, remove the
three mounting screws.
7. Restore power, boot the computer and login as User.
8. To adjust the laser, loosen the laser clamping screw, turn the laser on and rotate it until the correct
alignment is seen.

9. Perform procedure in Section 21.1 Check Laser Positioning Offset on Page 226.
4.4.5 Analog to Digital Converter Board (A Model only)

To remove and replace the Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) Board refer to Figure 298 and follow the
procedure below:
Figure 298 Rear C-arm FRUs
1. The C-arm should be in the AP position.

3. Remove the C-arm covers.
4. Unplug the cables on the ADC board.
5. Remove 4 Phillips screws, and remove the ADC board.
6. To replace the ADC board reverse the steps.
8. Verify and adjust the A/D Gain (Section 21.3 Verify and Adjust the A/D Gain on Page 227).
9. Replace any covers that were removed.
4.4.6 Replacing EMI Cables

EMI cables are ribbon cables modified with braided shielding and ground lugs. When replacing, be sure
each ground lug is fastened to a ground connection, usually to the ground plane of the PCB at that end.
Use a star washer between the ground lug and the ground plane. Be sure the ground lug does not short out
any component on the PCB.
When dressing the cables, be sure the braided shield does not come in contact with any electrical
component or voltage source.

Figure 299 The EMI Compliance Cable
4.5 FRU Lists

The following tables provide the information necessary to identify and order the correct FRU.
Please note:
• The tables are listed by Figure, and then by Cable, Miscellaneous, Mobile, and then Special Tools.
• The “Used On” column indicates which Horizon model(s) the Part Number is used; “All” indicates
all Horizon models.
.
Table 74 Electronics Tray FRUs
Part Number Description Used On Horizon

PCB-01057 Assy, Distribution Board All
PCB-00930 PCB, Motor Cntrl ROHS All
ASY-06575 Assy, EMI Stepper Motor Omega All
MME-01930 Gear Box, 50:1 Reduction W/HW All
ASY-02097 DC Power Supply 24V, +-15V All
030-3090 DIN Rail Discovery A A
030-3129 DIN Rail, Discovery C/W C, Ci / W, Wi
PCB-00916 Assy PCB Table Z A
PWR-00204 Power Supply, 24V, 20 AMP, Horizon, TZ A
ASY-07100 Cable, AY Encoder All
255-0038 Belt Timing 249 Teeth 16 MM All
CBL-01846 Cable, Arm Y Drive All
CBL-01799 Cable, Signal to TZ Driver PCB A

Table 74 Electronics Tray FRUs (Continued)

CBL-01793 Cable, Right Pedestal Motor to TZ Drive PCB A
CBL-01794 Cable, Left Pedestal Motor to TZ Drive PCB A
ASY-06949 Cable, Rotary Linear Pot (2) A
MTR-00070 Pedestal, Table Lifting A
CKB-00073 Circuit Breaker, 7.5 AMP 250 VAC All
CKB-00071 Circuit Breaker, 20 AMP 100 VAC All
310-0053 Circuit Breaker, 15 AMP 120 VAC All
310-0044 Fuse 6 AMP, 250 VAC All
310-0086 Fuse 8 AMP, 120 VAC All
310-0014 Fuse 10 AMP, 100 VAC All
Table 75 Table TY FRUS

ASY-07104 Cable, TY Encoder A and W
CBL-01734 Cable, TY Drive
255-0022 Belt, Timing, 255 Teeth 16MM, W
010-0685 Tape Switch, Bottom
010-0686 Tape Switch, Front And Rear
Table 76 Table TX FRUs

255-0021 Belt, Timing, 161 Teeth 16mm W All
ASY-07103 Cable, TX Encoder All
CBL-01980 Cable, Signal to Oper Panel Horizon C, Ci / W, Wi
CBL-01736 Cable, Signal to Oper Panel Horizon A
CBL-01734 Cable, Signal to Table Y Drive A and W

Table 76 Table TX FRUs

CBL-01904 Cable, Signal to Table X Drive, Shield A
CBL-01664 Cable, Signal to Table X Drive, Shield C, Ci / W, Wi
ASY-07103 Cable, TX Encoder A
ASY-06837 Assy, Cont Pnl Tilt,Horizon-A A
PCB-01185 PCB, Control Panel Tilt Sense
FAB-09668 Keypad Assembly, Horizon-A
FAB-09667 Keypad Assembly, Horizon C, Ci/ W, Wi
030-1877 Roller, Bearing Cvr, Left Side (2x) All
250-0047 Bearing, Radial Ball, .625 Bore (2X)
FAB-10114 Roller, Capture (2X) All
229-0024 Retaining Ring, EXT, .625 Shaft (4X) All
253-0036 Linear Guide 1000 MM All
Table 77 Lower C-arm FRUs

PCB-00940 Assy, C-arm Interface Board All
ASY-07098 Assembly, Aperture/filter Drum, Nine Slot A, C, W
ASY-07159 Assembly, Filter Drum, Single Aperture Ci, Wi
ASY-07116 Assembly, Filter Drum, No Aperture All
PCB-00936 Filter Drum Control PCB All
ASY-08797 Service Kit, (ASY-07235) Xray Source, HF,160 KV, 12 MA All
250-0040 Bearing, RDL Ball/DB Shld .5ID (4X) All
030-1339 Carriage Roller (2X) All
253-0037 Linear Guide 1600 MM All
ASY-07536 Cable, AR Encoder A
CBL-01877 Cable, Signal to AR Drive A
CBL-01878 Cable, Signal to C-arm PCB A
CBL-01651 Cable, C-arm Power A
CBL-01650 Cable, X-ray Power A

Table 77 Lower C-arm FRUs (Continued)

CBL-01048 Cable, C-arm to Filter Drum Signal All
CBL-01599 Cable, C-arm to Filter Drum Power All
CBL-01804 Cable, C-arm to X-ray Signal All
Table 78 Upper C-arm FRUs
Part Number Description Used On

ASY-07004 Assy, Crosshair Laser Block All
ASY-06943 Assy, Detector, 216 Channel A
ASY-06971 Detector, 128 Channel, Assembly C, W
ASY-07157 Detector, 64 Channel, Assembly Ci, Wi
CBL-01979 Cable, DAS Communication C, Ci / W, Wi
CBL-01880 Cable, A/D Analog Data, MUX A
CBL-01879 Cable, A/D Digital Data MUX A
CBL-01620 Cable, A/D Power to Detector PCB A
CBL-01658 Cable, Laser Power All
Table 79 Computer and Isolation Module

ASY-09326 Assembly, Toroid Power w/Inrush Limiter All
MEL-00305 A/C Power Outlet Strip All
ASY-09334 Power Kit 100 VAC 50/60 HZ All
ASY-09333 Power Kit 120 VAC 50/60 HZ All
ASY-09335 Power Kit 220-240 VAC 50/60 HZ All
ASY-10398 PC, HP ProDesk 600 G2 MT, WIN7 All
SFW-02379 HP 600 G2 WIN7 Recovery DVD All
CMP-01162 18.5” Flat Panel Monitor All
CBL-01591 Cable, PC Power IEC 60320 to NEMA 5-15R All
CBL-01593 Cable, AC Power Mon+Print IEC 60320 All
Table 80 Computer Internal Assemblies

PCB-01009 PCB, COMCON PCIE All

Table 81 Cables

CBL-01979 Cable, DAS Communication C, Ci / W, Wi
CBL-01973 Cable, Filter Drum I/O,DB25,Twisted Pair All
CBL-01904 Cable, Signal to TX Drive A
CBL-01880 Cable, A/D Analog Data, MUX A
CBL-01879 Cable, A/D Digital Data MUX A
CBL-01878 Cable, Signal to C-arm PCB A
CBL-01877 Cable, Signal to AR Drive A
CBL-01846 Cable, Signal to AY Drive A
CBL-01804 Cable, X-ray Signal to C-arm PCB 37 Cond All
CBL-01799 Cable, Signal to TZ Drive PCB A
CBL-01736 Cable, Signal to Operator Controller Panel PCB A
CBL-01734 Cable, Signal to TY Drive A and W
CBL-01684 RS232 Data Cable Tank to C-arm Chassis All
CBL-01664 Cable, Signal to TX Drive C, Ci / W, Wi
CBL-01662 Ground Wire All
CBL-01661 Cable, Signal to C-arm PCB C, Ci / W, Wi
CBL-01659 Cable, Fan, C-arm All
CBL-01658 Cable, Crosshair Laser Power All
CBL-01655 Cable, DAS Communication A
CBL-01651 Cable, C-arm Power All
CBL-01650 Cable, X-ray Power All
CBL-01599 Cable, Filter Drum PCB 24V PWR ROHS All
ASY-06517 Kit, PCIE Cable, Interface 15’ All
Table 82 Miscellaneous

ASY-01899 Pwr Sys, Uninterruptable, 2 KVA 60 HZ All
ASY-01902 Pwr Sys, Uninterruptable, 2 KVA 50 HZ All

Table 83 Mobile

ASY-08331 Kit, Mobile Horizon A A
ASY-08330 Kit, Mobile Horizon C & W C, Ci, W, Wi
Table 84 Special Tools

099-0111 Aperture Alignment Pin All
099-0269 24 in. Digital Level All
TLS-02693 X-ray Leakage Test Tool All
099-0715 X-ray Test Pattern All
099-0716 Step Wedge Penetrometer All
180-0287 Tape Switch Eliminator Jumper All
TLS-05376 X-ray Fan Beam Alignment tool All
TLS-01886 Filter Drum Alignment Key All
TLS-02698 Aperture Alignment Block All
TLS-03999 APEX Service Dongle All

Alignments and Calibrations After FRU Replacement or System Repair
5 Alignments and Calibrations After FRU

Replacement or System Repair
5.1 Determining Alignment and Calibration Requirements
When making a repair, perform the calibration steps in Table 85 required for the replaced part.
Table 85 Calibration Requirements for Parts Replacement
Part Replaced Calibration Procedures Required

X-ray Controller/HVPS 1. X-ray Beam Alignment (side-to-side and front-to-back)
2. Aperture Calibration
3. A/D Gain Adjustment
4. Radiation Leakage
5. Detector Flattening
6. Field Service Calibration (Area, BMC and BMD)
7. Dose to Patient
8. BCA Calibration Scans
9. Table-top Radiographic Uniformity
Laser or Detector Assembly 1. X-ray Beam Alignment (side-to-side and front-to-back)
2. Laser Alignment
Aperture Assembly 1. Aperture Calibration
4. Dose to Patient
Filter Drum Assembly 1. Filter Drum Assembly Calibration
2. X-ray Beam Alignment (side-to-side and front-to-back)
3. Aperture Calibration
5. Radiation Leakage
8. Dose to Patient
Motors 1. Motor Calibration for the motor replaced

Calibrations after HVPS Assembly Replacement
Table 85 Calibration Requirements for Parts Replacement (Continued)
Part Replaced Calibration Procedures Required

Table TZ Pedestals 1. TZ Motor Calibration
2. Lateral Alignment Test
3. If the table height is adjusted:
a. Detector Flattening
b. Field Service Calibration (Area, BMC, BMD)
c. BCA calibration scans
d. Table-top Radiographic Uniformity
6 Calibrations after HVPS Assembly Replacement

shown:
• High Gain = 2
• Low Gain = 1
• X-Ray Mode = 3

• Aperture = 7


rays On.

graph.






Assembly Skew.

6. Turn off X-rays.

beam remains flat.

2. Turn on X-rays.
Details Window.



1. Turn off x-rays.


5. Turn on x-rays.
back.
8. Tighten screws.


calibration.
Calibration.

encoder positions.
Slope Value
4. Click Continue.


numbers.


Detector Assembly.


5. Set Pulse to 1.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mode to 3.
7. Press <Enter>.
Detector assembly.


6.2.1 Principles

parts out of beam.
F07).
6.2.3 Detector Flattening

parts out of beam
turn on the laser.

models).
Main Menu screen.
12. Click Continue.

6.3 Field Service Calibrations

test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.

Calibration.

Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
follow the appropriate procedure below in Section 0.9 Instruments using Body Composition Analysis (BCA)
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.

Arm so that the bone segments are facing the rear of the table as shown. Except for the rotation, do
not move the phantom in any other direction.


10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
19. Now, select the QC Scan performed in step Section 3.11.2 Perform QC Scan on Spine Phantom, (C, Ci)
With BCA Calibration Scans and Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (A, W and Wi) on Page 199.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.

Calibrations after Detector Assembly or Laser Assembly Replacement
7 Calibrations after Detector Assembly or Laser

Assembly Replacement
shown:
• High Gain = 2
• Low Gain = 1
• X-Ray Mode = 3
• Aperture = 7


rays On.

graph.



7.1.3 Check Laser Positioning Offset

Center the table and arm using Center Table button on the Control Panel or the Utilities > AP Reposition
feature in the software.
1. Turn on the laser and position the spine phantom to the laser at center table position.
2. At the Horizon Main Menu screen, click Perform Exam.
3. Create a test patient biography.
4. Select AP Lumbar as the scan type.
6. Click Next.
7. Select Array mode.
8. Change length of scan to 6.0 inch.
10. After scan starts and you can see the leading edge of the L4 spine in the image, click the Reposition
Scan button.
11. Using the mouse, move the leading edge of the L4 spine image is horizontally in the center and
slightly below the bottom edge of the scan area blue line indicator.
12. Click the Restart Scan button and let the arm reposition.
13. At the Start Scan screen, turn on the laser.
14. Locate the 3 laser adjustment screws, small hex-head (Allen) screws, under the C-arm. Adjust these
screws until the laser crosshair is on the cross-lines of the spine phantom.

Caution Do not move the phantom.
15. Restart the scan and verify that the leading edge of L4 spine is displayed between lines 30 – 35 in the
acquiring image.
16. Click the Restart Scan button and let the arm reposition.
17. Click Cancel scan.
18. Press center table on the control panel.
19. Move the phantom back to Laser Cross hairs at center table position.
20. Click Perform Exam and select the test patient biography just used.
21. Select AP Lumbar as the scan type.
23. Click Next.
24. Select Array mode.
25. Change length of scan to 6.0 inch. Click Start Scan.
26. Verify that L4 is displayed in the acquiring image between lines 30 – 35 and the spine is centered in
the image.
7.2 A/D Gain Control Adjustment

Detector Assembly.

5. Set Pulse to 1.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mode to 3.
7. Press <Enter>.


Detector assembly.

parts out of beam
turn on the laser.

models).
Main Menu screen.
12. Click Continue.



test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.

Calibration.

Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.



10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.

7.5 Test Scan Modes

parts out of beam.
scan mode.

the OK button.



parts out of beam.
table mat in place.
table surface.



parts out of beam.
array AP scan mode.
7.10 Perform QC

alignment.


paperwork.

Calibrations after Aperture Assembly Replacement

8 Calibrations after Aperture Assembly

Replacement
8.1 Calibration
calibration.
Calibration.

encoder positions.
Slope Value
4. Click Continue.


numbers.



parts out of beam
turn on the laser.
models).
Main Menu screen.


12. Click Continue.


test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.


Calibration.
Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.



10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.

8.4 Test Scan Modes

parts out of beam.
scan mode.

the OK button.



parts out of beam.
table mat in place.
table surface.



parts out of beam.
array AP scan mode.
8.9 Perform QC

alignment.


paperwork.


8.12 Calibrations after Filter Drum Assembly Replacement

8.13 Filter Drum Assembly Calibration
The Filter Drum assembly requires a calibration process. Because there is no pre-determined alignment
between the optical encoder disk and the filter drum, calibration is necessary to establish the position of
the encoder index, relative to a known feature of the filter drum. The Horizon filter drum assembly
requires calibration if you have:
• replaced the filter drum board.
• replaced a motor.
• replaced an encoder.
• in any way changed the relationship of the encoder to the drum (e.g., if the set screw holding the
drum to the motor shaft gets loosened, intentionally or otherwise).
Note If installed, the aperture assembly must be removed in order to access the filter
drum. (Required Tool TLS-01886.)
1. The DXA system must be powered on. Exit APEX without shut down, and start APEX in Service
Mode. On the filter drum controller board, press SW1 to reset the board.
2. Remove the aperture assembly to access the filter drums.
a. Remove two screws for motor bracket.
b. Remove four screws (2 front, 2 rear) for filter drum.
c. Remove aperture assembly.
d. Unplug two cables on the board that go to aperture.
e. Remove strain relief.
3. On the new filter drum controller board, move the Run/Calibrate DIP switch (SW2-4) to the ON
position. ON position is towards connector J3. ON is to the right in the orientation shown in
Figure 351. OFF is to the left (Figure 351).

Figure 351 Filter Drum Controller Board
4. Momentarily press the CAL push-button switch (SW3), (Figure 351). Both drums will rotate slowly
for three revolutions, and then power is removed from the drum motors so the drums can be
rotated freely.
5. When the drums have stopped rotating, manually rotate the Inner and Outer drums to the
calibration position, where the slots in the hub of each drum lines up with the slot in the end plate
at the rear drum motor end plate (Figure 107).

Note The Home position is not the same as the calibration position. The leading edge
of outer drum aluminum is at top center of rotation with leading edge of the
brass (inner drum) just slightly behind. It is important that this visual check be
made following calibration. If not, repeat the alignment procedure - steps 3
through 10.
Figure 352 Drum Home Position
Insert the Drum Alignment Tool

perpendicular to and flush to the end plate (Figure 353).

Note The calibration key should be perpendicular to and flush with the end plate. The
end of the key with the flat surface should be towards the motor and the stepped
side facing down, so that it engages the slot in the end plate and slots in both
drums
Figure 353 Alignment Tool Placement
1. Insert the calibration key (part number TLS-01886 (Figure 354) into the slots in the hubs of both
drums and the rear end plate, forcing the slots in the drums to align with the slot in the rear end
plate (Figure 355).
Figure 354 Alignment Key
Note The calibration key should be perpendicular to and flush with the end plate.
The end of the key with the flat surface should be towards the motor and the
stepped side facing down so that it engages the slot in the end plate and slots in
both drums (Figure 355).

Figure 355 Key Placement
2. Momentarily press the CAL push-button switch (SW3) (Figure 356).

3. LED 2 and LED 3 (Outer and Inner drum Lock indicators) will flash momentarily (Figure 356).

Figure 356 LED Indicators
4. Remove the calibration key.

5. Move the Run/Calibrate DIP switch (SW2-4) to the ‘OFF’ position.
6. Momentarily press the Reset push-button switch (SW1). Drums will rotate to the Home position.
(Figure 357).
Note he Home position is not the same as the calibration position. The leading edge of
outer drum aluminum is at top center of rotation with leading edge of the Brass
(inner drum) just slightly behind. It is important that this visual check be made
following calibration. If not, repeat the alignment procedure - steps 3 through
11.
7. Re-install the aperture plate/drive assembly.

Figure 357 Home Position


shown:
• High Gain = 2
• Low Gain = 1
• X-Ray Mode = 3
• Aperture = 7


rays On.

graph.






Assembly Skew.

6. Turn off X-rays.

beam remains flat.

2. Turn on X-rays.
Details Window.



1. Turn off x-rays.


5. Turn on x-rays.
back.
8. Tighten screws.


calibration.
Calibration.

encoder positions.
Slope Value
4. Click Continue.


numbers.


Detector Assembly.


5. Set Pulse to 1.
6. Set
a. Hi Gains to 2.
b. Lo Gains to 1.
c. X-ray Mode to 3.
7. Press <Enter>.
Detector assembly.


8.15.1 Principles

parts out of beam.
F07).
8.15.3 Detector Flattening

parts out of beam
turn on the laser.

models).
Main Menu screen.
12. Click Continue.


test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.

Calibration.

Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.



10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.


test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.

Calibration.

Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.



10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.

Calibrations after Motor Replacement
9 Calibrations after Motor Replacement

Perform Motor Calibration for the replacement motor.
9.0.1 Motor Calibration

Determine the Calibration Sequence
.
Note Proper calibration of the motors depends upon other motor calibrations. You
must calibrate motors in the following order: TZ, AY, TY, TX, AR, and
Aperture. Proper motor calibration depends on all motors always being
calibrated in the order shown.
The motor controller board control and drive the table and C-arm movements. Calibrate motors in the
following order: AY, TY, TX.
Use Table 86 to determine the calibration procedures you need to perform for each Horizon model.
Perform the calibration procedures identified for each motor (√) in order from left to right.
Table 86 Calibration Procedures
Model TZ AY TY TX AR
A √ √ √ √ √
W NA1 √ √ √ NA1
Wi NA1 √ √ √ NA1
C NA1 √ NA1 √ NA1
Ci NA1 √ NA1 √ NA1
1. Not applicable to the system.
Perform the Calibration

1. Log into Windows as field service or admin user.
2. Exit APEX without shut down and launch APEX in Service Mode (with service dongle if required).
3. From the Main Menu screen, select Utilities > Service Utilities > System Diagnostics.
4. Select the tab for the motor you want to calibrate.
Table 87 shows the position range specifications and resolutions for each motor.
Table 87 Motor Position Range Specifications and Resolution
Motor Range (in encoder ticks)

TZ 325 ± 2 on the right and left
AY 3750 ± 5
TY 3750 ± 5
TX 1000 ± 5
AR 250 ± 5

Note Perform the motor calibration in the order shown below. In the Tests section
click Calibrate. See the instructions for each motor:
• 1.3.2 Tz Motor Calibration on Page 4
• 1.3.4 Calibrate MOTOR$TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi) on Page 10
• 1.3.5 Calibrate MOTOR$TX on Page 12
• Section Calibrate MOTOR$AR (Horizon A) on Page 390
5. Reboot the system after all motor calibrations are completed.
Note Some motor calibration changes are not applied until the system is re-booted.
Calibrate MOTOR$TZ
Check Calibration Values
Caution Drive both pedestals at the same time. If the pedestals are not synchronized, the
board will stop functioning.
Figure 388SW6 on the Tz Motor Driver Board
5. Observe the encoder counts on the diagnostics display.
Use a metric ruler to carefully measure the travel distance of the table. This is a
critical measure for proper system function.

Adjust the Encoders

7. Adjust the right string encoder until the value is 325 ± 2.
8. Unplug the right encoder cable from the TZ control board.
9. Unplug the left encoder cable and plug the cable into the right encoder cable connector location on
the TZ control board.
10. Observe the encoder count on the diagnostics display.
11. Adjust the left string encoder until the value is 325 ±2.
12. Return the left and right encoder cables to their original connectors.
Reset Switch to Normal and Verify Limits
15. Verify that the unit is within limits (325 ± 2).
16. If the value exceeds 325 ± 2, adjust the encoder following the instructions on the screen.
• the left pedestal lower and upper encoder limits
the left lower and right lower values need to be 325 ± 2 counts.
Adjust the Encoder if it Exceeds Specifications
18. If the values are not within specifications, adjust the appropriate pedestal encoder.
19. On the Tz PCB, disconnect the right string encoder connector (J-9). Move the left string encoder
connector from J-7 to J-9.
set to in Step 5.
24. Use the up/down service switches (SW2 and SW3) to move the pedestal to a position at least one 1
in. above the lowest position.

If red LEDs are on, use the up/down service switches to move the pedestals to
the top of travel and back down to the bottom of travel and then set the pedestals
to position 1 in. above the lowest position.
Caution Ensure that the Tz PCB is not in Service Mode.

Calibrate MOTOR$AY (A, W)

Caution To ensure correct C-arm travel, ensure that the lower carriage frame and AR
Motor cover is in place before performing AY Calibration.
Figure 389 Remove AR Motor Cover
1. With AY at the left mechanical stop (Figure 3), click Cancel.

Figure 390 Click Cancel at Left Mechanical Stop
2. Verify that the starting position is correct (3750 ± 5).

3. Click Calibrate (Figure 4).

4. When AY reaches the right mechanical stop, click OK (Figure 5).

Figure 392 Click OK at Right Mechanical Stop
The program moves the C-arm and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive
and negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form Y
= Intercept + Slope * X.
Caution If the slopes are not within the specified range:

1. Check that the encoder is properly attached to the mounting bracket and
coupling.
2. If the encoder is properly connected, Check the encoder.
For encoder adjustments, see Adjust the Encoder if it Exceeds Specifications on
Page 382

Figure 393 AY Motor Calibration Scan
The Table (AY Motor) Calibration dialog box displays the calibration parameter values.
6. Check that the parameters meet specifications. For more information, see MOTOR$AY Calibration
Parameters.
The last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 3750 ± 5 ticks. To adjust this
value, refer to Section MOTOR$AY Calibration Parameters on Page 385.
7. Click Save.
Note Because the encoder is underneath the X-ray Source Assembly, adjusting it can
be counter-intuitive.
1. For example, if a value of 3770 appears (20 ticks above the correct calibration
position at the left physical stop), move the C-arm all the way to the right.
2. If the value on the right is 500, adjust it to 480 to reduce the corresponding
value on the left stop.
3. Hit Calibrate to move the C-arm to the left stop. The value should be
reduced by 20 ticks.
MOTOR$AY Calibration Parameters
Values are separated by commas within calibration fields.motor_direction determines whether the
positive step direction is the reverse of the direction of increasing encoder values. The value is 0 if the
direction is not reversed and 1 if the direction is reversed. This value is set from the corresponding
parameter in the MOTOR_XX.PRO file and is a constant for each motor. The direction of increasing
encoder values must agree with the system coordinates. The positive step direction is set by the wiring
harness for the stepper motor.
(1)Tolerance. The position tolerance for absolute moves in encoder ticks. The calibration program
sets this field to the value found in the corresponding calibrate_position field in the
MOTOR_XX.PRO file.
(2,3)NumberOfSteps,StepDistance. The number of motors steps corresponding to the step
distance in µm. The ratio of these two numbers determines the step size (41187/2288  18 µm). The
calibration program sets these fields to the values found in the corresponding calibrate_position

fields in the MOTOR_XX.PRO file. These values are a property of the mechanical design of the
system and should never change.
(4,5)NumberOfTicks,TickDistance. The number of encoder ticks corresponding to the tick distance
in µm. The ratio of these two numbers (61339/209  293 µm) determines the encoder calibration.
These numbers can change from calibration to calibration, however, the ratio should remain
approximately the same.
(6)EncoderOffset. The value subtracted from the encoder readback to set the origin of motion. The
origin of AY, TY, and TX motion is the extreme right mechanical stop. This value should be the same
as the NegLimit value.
(7,8)NegLimit,PosLimit. The encoder readings for the negative (right) and positive (left)
mechanical stops.
pos_limit_position is the limit of motion, in µm, in the positive direction.
neg_limit_position is the limit of motion, in µm, in the negative direction.
Note Because the encoder is underneath the X-ray Source Assembly, adjustment can
seem counter-intuitive. When we perform calibration, pressing Esc as the
C-arm travels left should stop it at 3750 ± 5.
If, for example, the C-arm stops at 3770, 20 stops greater than it should be, we
need to send the C-arm all the way to the right to determine where it stops.
If the C-arm stops at 500 on the right, we need to reduce the travel by 20 to 480.
We then must recalibrate, press Esc as the C-arm travels left, and then check the
left stop once again to see if the C-arm has stopped at 3750 ± 5.
Calibrate MOTOR$TY (Horizon Models A, W, Wi)

Caution If installing a whole-body system in a room that is less than 10 ft wide, to
calibrate a TY Motor,
1. Remove the two screws attaching the AY bracket to the table top.
2. Calibrate as normal.
The bracket will hit the end stops to complete the Calibration Process. Failure to
do this will cause the table to be driven into the wall.
The TY motor moves the table to the outer left mechanical stop.
1. When the TY motor reaches the outer left mechanical stop, click Cancel and verify that the starting
position is correct (3750 ±5).


Figure 394 Click Cancel when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop
2. Start Calibrate again (Figure 395).

3. When TY reaches the left mechanical stop (Figure 396), click OK.
Figure 396 Click OK when TY Motor Reaches Left Mechanical Stop
4. When TY reaches the right mechanical stop (Figure 397), click OK.
Figure 397 Right Mechanical Stop
The Motor Calibration Scan screen is displayed.

The program moves the C-arm and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive and
negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form
Figure 398 TY Calibration Plot
6. If the slopes are not within the specified range:

The Table (TY Motor) Calibration dialog box displays the calibration parameter values.
7. Check that the values meet specifications.
The values for the motor_direction, calibrate_position, pos_limit_position and neg_limit_position fields
are determined for MOTOR$AY.
The last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 3750 ± 5 ticks. Adjust this value if
necessary (Adjust the Encoders on Page 382).
8. Click Save.

Calibrate MOTOR$TX
The TX motor centers the table and C-arm.
1. Select the TX Motor tab.
2. Click Calibrate.
3. A dialog box prompts moving the C-arm to 0° degrees (Figure 13).
Figure 399 Motor$TX Calibration
Caution The arm must be at 0°.
Move C-arm to 0 Degrees
Note This message only applies to Horizon A systems. Use a digital level to set the C-
arm to 0° ± 0° for the A systems.
Ignore this message for other models.
4. Click OK.
5. When the TX motor reaches the outer mechanical limit, click Cancel (or press Esc) and verify that
the starting position is correct (1000 ±5).

6. Start Calibrate again and when TX reaches the outer mechanical limit (Figure 13), click OK.
Figure 400 Outer Mechanical Limit
The program moves the table and draws an encoder versus distance calibration grid. The positive
and negative linear fit parameters are displayed at the top left and top right of the plot in the form

Figure 401 TX Calibration Plot

b. If the brackets and encoder coupling are connected correctly, replace the encoder.
The MOTOR$TX Calibration dialog displays calibration parameter values.
9. Check that the values meet specifications. The values for the motor_direction, calibrate_position,
pos_limit_position and neg_limit_position fields are determined as described for MOTOR$AY. The
next-to-last value on the calibrate_position line in the dialog box must be 1000 ± 5 ticks.
10. Click Save.
Calibrate MOTOR$AR (Horizon A)

Confirm that the table is level front-to-back.
Caution Confirm that the table is level front-to-back before calibrating MOTOR$AR.
Unlevel tables cause positioning tolerance errors on whole body, lateral, and
IVA scans.
2. Place the digital level on the table at the foot end. The digital level
3. value must be 0.0°.
4. Move the level to the head of the table.
5. Confirm that the level is still at 0.0°.
If the level result is not 0.0°, adjust the leveling ft until the result is 0.0°.
Continue the Calibration Procedure
The program moves the TY and AY motors to center positions, then moves
the TZ motor to topmost position.
6. Remove the C-arm X-ray Source Assembly cover.
7. Level the X-ray Source Assembly to 0.0° ± 0.1°.
a. Place the digital level on the top of the X-ray Source Assembly (Figure 402).

Figure 402 Level Placement on X-ray Source Assembly
b. b. Use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until the level is 0.0° ±
0.1°
8. Click OK.
9. When the AR motor reaches the AP mechanical limit (Figure 403), click Cancel.
Figure 403 AR Motor AP Mechanical Limit
10. Check the position value. It must be 250 ± 5. Adjust if necessary.

If calibration parameter values are not within the specified range:
2. Manually rotate the encoder until the reading is 250 ± 5 (245 – 255).
5. Start Calibrate again and when AR reaches the click OK.
a. When prompted, level the X-ray Source Assembly to 0.0° ± 0.1° again.
b. Place the digital level on the top of the X-ray Source Assembly.
c. Use the Table IN/OUT switch on the operator panel to move the C-arm until the level is 0.0° ±
0.1°.

d. Remove the level.

Figure 404 Table IN/OUT
Figure 405 Level the C-arm to 83°

Figure 406 AR Calibration Parameter Display

Only follow these procedures if calibration parameter values are not within the specified range.
Adjust the Position Value
2. Manually rotate the encoder until the reading is within the range designated for the motor.
Adjust encoder versus distance calibration slopes
1. Rerun the calibration.
2. If the slopes are still not in range, check the encoder and check that the belt tension is correct.

Calibrations after Table TZ Pedestals Replacement
10 Calibrations after Table TZ Pedestals

Replacement
10.0.1 Tz Motor Calibration
Figure 407SW6 on the Tz Motor Driver Board
5. Observe the detector counts on the diagnostics display. Adjust the right string encoder until the
value is 325 ± 2.
7. Calibrate to see whether the unit is within limits (325 ± 2).
8. If unit exceed limits, on the Tz PCB, disconnect the right string encoder connector (J-9).
9. Move the left string encoder connector from J-7 to J-9.
set to in Step .
15. Use the up/down service switches (SW2 and SW3) to move the pedestal to a position at least one (1)
inch above the lowest position.

If there are red LED's on, use the up/down service switches to move the
pedestals to the top of travel and back down to the bottom of travel and then set
the pedestals to position 1 in. above the lowest position.


17. Ensure that the Tz PCB is not in Service Mode.
19. Follow the instructions on the screen. You will need a metric ruler.
Carefully measure the travel distance of the table. This is a critical measure for
proper system function.
• the left pedestal lower and upper encoder limits, and
the left lower and right lower values need to be 325 ± 2 counts and within 2 counts of each other.
The range of motion for the two pedestals (i.e., the upper encoder limit-lower encoder limit)
should be less than or equal to 40 counts of each other. These values should be within 20 counts
of each other.
21. If the value is not within specifications, adjust the appropriate pedestal encoder.
22. Shut down the computer.
23. Turn off the circuit breaker at the back of the system.
24. Turn system on.
25. Log in as QDR.
26. Run the following scans to test, all of which should pass:
a. QC Scan
b. BCA calibration scans
c. Table Top Radiographic Uniformity (TTU).
10.1 Perform Lateral Alignment and Flatness Test (Horizon A)

Note This procedure applies to the A system only. Use this procedure to verify lateral
alignment.

2. Start APEX software in Service Mode.
3. Perform Daily QC if necessary.
4. From the Main Menu, select Exam.
5. Click Perform Exam (Figure 408).
Figure 408 Select Perform Exam
6. Select New Patient (Figure 409).

Figure 409 New Patient
7. In the Patient window (Figure 410), enter Flat/Lat Verification in Last Name.
8. Click OK.
Figure 410 Patient Window
9. Enter a height and weight for the patient in the Patient Confirmation Window (Figure 411).
10. Click OK.

Figure 411 Patient Confirmation Window
11. At the Select Scan Type screen, select AP/Lateral (Figure 412).
Figure 412 Select AP/Lateral
13. Click Next.

14. Select AP/Lateral Exam as the scan type.
15. Select Array (a) (Figure 413).

16. Click Next.

Figure 413 Select Array (a)
17. At the Select Lateral Scan Mode for AP/Lateral Exam screen, select Fast Array (f).
18. Click Next.
Figure 414 Select Fast Array (f)
19. Follow the instructions (Figure 415) regarding patient (spine phantom) alignment with the laser.
20. Click Continue.
Figure 415 Alignment Warning

21. Place two sheets of paper against the left and right edges of the phantom (Figure 416).
Figure 416 Paper against Right Edges of Phantom
22. When done, click Continue.

23. On the Scan Parameters screen, set the scan length to 6.0 in. (Figure 417).
Figure 417 Scan Length
25. After the scan has been completed, on the Analyze Setup screen (Figure 418), select Choose
Analysis Method.
26. Select Lumbar Spine from the pull-down.
27. Click Next.

Figure 418 Select Lumbar Spine
Note If Lumbar Spine is not available from the drop down menu, you must load base
analysis protocols from the application disk first.
28. Select Global ROI, select Line Mode (Figure 420).

29. Set the ROI width to 113 and ROI height to 105.
Figure 419 Global ROI Line Mode
30. Click Whole Mode.

31. Move the Global ROI so that its bottom line is against bottom edge of image (Figure 420).

Figure 420 Global ROI Whole Mode
32. If image adjustment is necessary to visualize the bone, select the SUN symbol to
open the Image Toolbox (Figure 421).
33. When done, click the Sun symbol to switch back to the Global ROI Toolbox.
Figure 421 Global ROI Toolbox
34. Click Line Mode.

35. Select the top line of the Global ROI and move it to the vertebral space that separates L1 and L2
(Figure 422)
Figure 422 Move Top Line of Global ROI to Vertebral Space

Figure 423 Select Whole Mode
37. Center the Global ROI left to right on the vertebrae.

38. In this order, click Bone Map > Vertebral Lines > Results > Start Position.

Figure 424 Bone Map
Figure 425 Bone Map Vertebral Lines

Figure 426 Bone Map Results
39. Verify that the angle displayed under the image (near the bottom of the screen) is less than ± 2
degrees (Figure 427).
arm so that the bone segments are facing the rear of the table as shown (Figure 428).
Except for the rotation, do not move the phantom in any other direction.

Figure 428 Paper Guides
41. Click Close.

until the C-arm and table move to the Lateral position.
(Figure 429) until the C-arm and table move back to the AP position.
Figure 429 Lateral Enable Switch
45. From the Exit Exam screen, select Analyze Scan (Figure 430).

Figure 430 Analyze Scan
46. From the Analysis Setup screen, select Choose Analysis Method.
47. Select Supine Lateral from the pull-down menu (Figure 431).
Figure 431 Supine Lateral Analysis Method
48. Click Next.

49. Select Global ROI (Figure 432).

Figure 432 Analysis Method
50. Select Line Mode. Select the bottom line of the Global ROI and make the sides vertical (Figure 433).
Figure 433 Line Mode
51. Verify the left edge of the ROI is at the left edge of the image.

Figure 434 Whole Mode
53. Using the right arrow key, count the number of steps required to align the left edge of the Vertebral
Boundaries ROI (the middle vertical line in Figure 434) to the left edge of spine.
54. Record the number of steps taken here: ______________.
55. The steps will be less than 6 when properly calibrated.
56. If the number of steps taken was 6 or less, click Cancel on the scan analysis screen, click Yes and Exit
to confirm analysis exit and proceed to Step 66.
57. If the number of steps exceeds 6 steps, you must adjust the table height.
58. Click Cancel on the scan analysis screen,
59. Click Yes and
60. Exit to confirm analysis exit and proceed to Step 61.
61. Click Utilities > Service Utilities > Table Height.
62. Refer to Figure 435.
a. Subtract the actual number of steps recorded in Step 53 from the number 10.
b. Enter the difference into the text box as a positive number to lower the table (Example for this
image: +4).
c. Record value entered into the text box ______________. Click Next when done.

Figure 435 Set the Height of the Table Top
63. From the APEX or QDR main screen, select Exit, Exit QDR without shut down and click OK.
64. Re-boot the system and login as user Field Service. When the APEX or QDR main screen displays,
select Exit, Exit QDR without shut down and click OK.
65. Start APEX or QDR software in Service Mode.
66. Detector Flattening (Big Flat) must now be run since the table height has been changed. Click
Utilities > Service Utilities > Detector Flattening and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note The Table Height Utility parameter limits are ±5 to raise or lower the table;
however, actual limits may be less for any given system. If the limits are
exceeded, the Lateral Position setup cannot function and a Table Height Out
of Limits or similar error message will display. If this is the case, enter
countering numbers until values are within limits (indicated by no error
message).
For Example: you entered +5 and the Table Height Out of Limits or similar
error message displayed. To counter, enter -2. This will result in you having
input the value +3. Any time you run the Table Height utility, you must always
re-run Detector Flattening (Big Flat).
67. Select Perform Exam and select patient Flat/Lat Verification in the last name field and
68. Click OK.
69. Click OK.
70. Repeat Steps 14 through 54.

parts out of beam
turn on the laser.

models).
Main Menu screen.
12. Click Continue.


test scan.
• Scan Thickness
calibration.
systems only.

Calibration.

Support if needed.
and Wi)
2.0.
performed.
Uniformity.

and the tank.
on Page 13.

(C/Ci and W/Wi)
properly.



Next>>.
click Continue.



10. Click Next.
12. Click Next.
20. Click Next.


4. Click Next

previous two steps.
3. Click Next>>.
date and time).
Start Date blank.

Software Installation and Upgrades
11 Software Installation and Upgrades

11.1 Microsoft Word Installation
11.1.1 Introduction
Installation of MS Word 2013 requires initial connectivity to the internet to activate the product. This
connection requires that a Microsoft account be established with Microsoft to associate the product with.
This account information is required to be able to reinstall the MS Word 2013 product on the same
computer or any future replacement computers.
Note Some of the screens may change in appearance over time as Microsoft updates
and patches the Word 2013 program.
Procedure:
1. Power up computer.
2. Select Admin then enter the Password as password.
3. From the APEX software select Exit then Exit Without Shutdown to shut down the APEX software.
Network Setup
1. Plug the internet connection cable into the back of the PC.
2. If available connect to site's available network in room. Go to next section.
3. Alternatively: Use a MiFi wireless cellular adaptor for internet connectivity. If functional, use with a
USB direct cable connection to the MIFI or on data enabled I-phone.
a. Or, obtain a CMP-00813 Wireless USB Adapter.
b. Turn on the MiFi hotspot.
c. Insert the Netgear Resource CD into the DVD drive run setup.
d. If the Netgear setup program starts automatically, go to step h.
e. If the Netgear setup program does not start automatically, click Start > Run > Browse.
f. Double-click autorun.exe.
g. Follow prompts, insert USB Netgear when instructed to.
h. When the Netgear installation is complete it will display a list of available wireless networks.
i. Select the one that corresponds to your MiFi hotspot.
j. Select manually configure from the next window.
k. Enter the password for the MiFi hotspot.
l. Verify you have internet access.
m. Reboot the PC.
n. Select Admin then enter the Password as password.
o. From the APEX software select Exit then Exit Without Shutdown to shut down the APEX
software.
11.1.2 APEX Reporting Engine

Use this procedure to install the APEX™ Reporting Engine V2013 on your APEX system. The APEX
system uses the Reporting Engine to generate Dx Reports in Microsoft® Word.

Note For APEX Versions 4.x, install the APEX Reporting Engine V2013 only if you
have purchased the Physician’s Viewer™ Report Writer option.
For APEX 5.5 and higher, the installation of Physicians Viewer™ and the
DXReport option is not required on the DXA scanner. The option is now built
into the APEX application.
The APEX Reporting Engine V2013 can be loaded on the scanner PC or on another PC that can be used as
a remote viewing station.
• Load APEX Reporting Engine V2013 on the scanner PC for Hologic Applications Training
purposes.
Caution Do not activate the software on the scanner, if the software is being installed on
the Docs computer.
• Confirm the final APEX Reporting Engine V2013 installation location.

The following instructions assume that APEX Reporting Engine V2013 will be loaded onto the scanner PC.
Prerequisites
Your system must have:
• a DVD drive
• a product key
• the APEX Reporting Engine V2013 Recovery DVD
Note APEX Reporting Engine V2013 Recovery must be loaded prior to the APEX
software, or if required Physician’s Viewer and DXReporting options software.
Install APEX Reporting Engine V2013

1. Install APEX Reporting Engine S/W, SFW-02208
2. Log onto the system computer as Admin.
3. Insert the APEX Reporting Engine V2013 Recovery Disk into the drive.
4. From the Desktop, right-click Start, click Computer.
5. Double-click on the D: Drive.
6. Double-click on Setup.
7. At Read the Microsoft Software License Terms, if you wish to use Microsoft® Word, select I agree
the terms of this agreement.
8. Click Continue.
9. If the User Account Control prompt Do you want to make changes to this computer appears, click
Yes, or
10. At the next screen click Install Now.
11. At the Continue Online prompt, click Close.
12. Click X in the upper right corner to return to the Desktop.
13. Click Start.
14. Click All Programs.
15. Click on Office 2013, click Word 2013.
16. At the First Things First screen, select Ask Me Later.
17. Click Accept.
18. At the Welcome to your new office prompt, click Next.
19. At the Sign In and get the most out of office screen, click No thanks, maybe later.

20. At the Meet OneDrive screen, click Next.

21. Click No Thanks.
22. Click All Done.
Activate APEX Reporting Engine V2013

1. Activate the APEX Reporting Engine S/W.
2. Connect the local network cable to the computer.
Note In bottom right corner of the screen, ensure that internet access is active.
If no network connection is available, use the radio button for phone activation.
3. Contact Service support for the Product Key code.

4. Click Start.
6. Click on Office 2013,
7. Click Word 2013.
8. In MS Word, click on Open Other Documents.
9. Select Account.
10. In the Activation Required prompt, click on Change Product Key.
11. Enter the Product Key code.
12. Click Install.
13. Click X in the upper right corner to return back to the Desktop.
14. Click Start
16. Click on Office 2013.
17. Click Word 2013.
18. Click Open Other Documents. Select Account.
Verify Product Activated prompt appears.
19. Click Start, Exit without Shutdown.
20. Disconnect the local network cable from the computer.
Change Word Account Settings

The Word Account settings must be changed for each User Account Login.
1. In Word 2013 using the drop-down commands at the top, click File then Account.
2. To disable updates, click Update Options, then Disable Updates.
3. To sign off of Word Account (Figure 440), click Sign off.

Figure 440 Account Information
4. Click Yes (Figure 441).

5. Log off/Log in as recommended.
Figure 441 Remove Account
Install or Re-install of the Reporting Applications

1. Install or re-install the APEX application as an update on QDRsystem.
2. On Standalone use or remote PC's, install the Physician Viewer
3. Install DX Report Writer option software.
Set Trusted Center Settings
1. Open Microsoft Word 2013 by selecting Start > All Programs > Microsoft Office 2013 > Word 2013.
2. Click on Blank Document.
3. From File > Options > Trust Center menu, select Trust Center Settings.
4. From the Macro Settings section, select Disable all macros except digitally signed macros.
5. Select Trusted Locations.
6. Click Add new location.
7. Click Browse and select C:/Program Files/Hologic. Click OK.
8. Check off Subfolders of this location are also trusted. Click OK.
9. Click Add new location.
10. Click Browse and select C:/ProgramFiles/MicrosoftOffice15 /root/Office15.
11. Click OK.
12. Check off Subfolders of this location are also trusted. Click OK.
13. Click OK. Click X in upper right corner to exit from the MS Word 2013.
14. Re-launch MS Word 2013 to assure no errors or message popup.
15. Click OK. Click X in upper right corner to exit from the MS WORD 2013.

16. When the MS Word 2013 installation is complete, uninstall the Netgear software through Control
Panel > Programs and Features by clicking on the Netgear software and selecting Uninstall. Follow
the on screen prompts.
17. Reboot the PC.
18. Log in as QDR.
11.2 APEX Installation

11.2.1 Install APEX 5.6.0.x or Later
Installation of New PC
1. Install the new PC, insert the CommCon and any optional Internal or External drives from the
original PC.
2. Insert the APEX application disc in the DVD drive.
3. Click Setup from the disc.
4. Enter the administrative password: password to log in as Admin
Figure 442 User Account Control
5. Select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound under Devices and Printers.
6. Click on Device Manager (from Category view) or Control Panel > Device Manger (from Icon
view).
7. Right-click on Other devices > Other PCI Bridge and select Properties.
8. Select the Drive tab.
9. Click Update Driver.
10. Select Browse My Computer and click Browse.
11. Navigate to the DVD drive to the APEX System Software > Device Driver folder.
12. Click OK.
13. Click Next.
14. Select Install this software anyway on the Windows Security popup screen.
15. After the driver installs, the Hologic CC Card interface card is recognized by Windows.
16. Click Close.
17. Turn off the PC.

Set the DXA PC Name

1. Boot the PC and login as Admin.
2. Click Windows Start.
3. Right-click on Computer.
4. Select Properties.
5. Under the Computer name, domain, and workgroup setting, click Change Settings.
6. Rename this computer.
7. Click Change.
8. Type DXAXXXXXX (XXXXXX = serial number of the system) for the computer name,
9. Click OK.
10. In Member of, select the appropriate configuration.
11. Click OK to close the Systems Properties window.
Installation of SQL Server 2012 Express Software

1. Log in as Admin.
2. Browse the APEX application DVD double click on the SQL Server 2012 Express folder.
3. Right-click Setup.bat and select 'Run as administrator'.
Note The installation program begins. The progress of the SQL Server 2012 Express
installation will be displayed in the command window. A message will be
displayed when it has completed. This may take several minutes, so please be
patient.
4. Press any key to continue.
5. Turn off the PC.
Install Printer Driver if Required

1. Log in as Admin.
2. Install the printer driver only. No other part of the printer applications should be installed.
3. Reboot the PC.
Configure the Connection to the Network.

1. Log in as Admin.
2. Input the network configuration settings information noted before removing the original PC.
3. Reboot the PC.
Install MS Word 2013 if necessary.

1. Log in as Admin.
2. Use the APEX REPORTING ENGINE FOR REPORT WRITER disk to install MS Word 2013.
3. Use an internet connection to license the MS Word 2013 program.
4. Refer to TB-00871_001 for MS Word 2013 field activation.
5. Reboot the PC.
Installation of APEX 5.6 software

2. Go to the APEX application DVD in the drive and locate Apex System Software folder.
3. Double-click on the folder.
4. Double-click Setup.exe.

The installation program begins and setup information is displayed. Then the InstallShield Wizard
and then the Welcome screen is displayed.
Figure 443 InstallShield Wizard
Figure 444 Welcome Screen
5. Click Next. The License Agreement screen is displayed (Figure 445).

Figure 445 License Agreement Screen
6. Read the agreement.

7. Click Yes.
8. Accept the terms of the agreement.
9. The Select APEX Machine Type (Figure 446) is displayed.
10. Select Horizon Systems.
11. Click Next.

Figure 446 APEX MachineType
12. The Select Horizon Machine Type is displayed.

13. Select the appropriate Horizon Model(Figure 447), click Next.
Figure 447 Select Horizon Machine Type
14. The Serial Number screen (Figure 448) is displayed.

Figure 448 Serial Number Screen
15. Enter the serial number and Install key.

16. Click Next.
17. The Choose Destination Location is displayed.

18. Click Next to accept the C:\QDR folder as the destination location. A progress bar displays while
the program files are being installed.
19. The InstallShield Wizard Complete (Figure 449) screen appears.
Yes, I want to restart my computer now option is selected.
Figure 449 InstallShield Wizard Complete
20. Remove the APEX applications DVD from the DVD drive.
21. Click Finish.
The system reboots.
23. Navigate to the APEX Task Bar and click Help > About APEX.
The About Hologic APEX Software screen (Figure 450) appears.
Figure 450 About APEX
The correct installed Software Version should be displayed in the Version box.
24. Click OK.
Restore the Scan Files from The Removable Drive and System Recovery
1. Copy all of the .pxx and .rxx files from the removable drive to the C:\QDR\data folder.
2. Recover the system backup performed just prior to exchanging the PC's.
3. After reconcile completes, Exit APEX with Shutdown.
4. Restart the PC and login as Admin.
5. Go to Utilities > Report tab > DXReport tab.
6. Recover the report backup .zip file from the removable drive.

7. Exit with Shutdown.

File Restoration
1. Restore to the appropriate location any Physicians Reporting Rules that were previously saved.
2. Restore to the appropriate location any History Questionnaire that was previously saved.
Install Any Other Option Needed
1. Refer to the option.txt file in the system backup to verify that all options keys are installed in the
APEX.
2. Install the FRAX option from the SFW-01211 disk.
3. From the Admin login install the printer drivers only for the site printer.
Note Physicians Viewer V7.3 and DX Report V7.3 are provided to install as upgrade
to remote viewing station used at site.
Neither are required to be installed with APEX 5.6.0.3 systems.
The functionality for VFA analysis and DX Reporting is built into the APEX
application.
Perform System Backup

1. Restart the PC.
2. Login as QDR User.
3. Perform another System Backup. Name the back as Initial APEX 5.6 Backup xxxxxxxx.zip (=date
stamp).
4. Store the backup in a safe place.
Optional Hologic Connect and APEX Log Collector Installations

1. Install and configure Hologic Connect (Refer to TB-00928_001.)
2. Install the APEX Log Collector.
3. Verify that two application short cuts are on the desktop.
4. Instruct user on use of the APEX Log Collector.
5. Instruct user on use of Hologic Connect.
Note When Hologic Connect is started and connection is made to the system by the
Help Desk, the APEX application will turn off the table communications. After
connection is terminated the Apex application must be restarted to use the table.
6. Install Hologic Connect.
11.3 Physician’s Viewer Installation

11.3.1 Preliminary Steps for Physician’s Viewer Installation
Use these instructions to update from a previous version of Physician’s Viewer™ or to install Physician’s
Viewer Version 7.0 on a computer with no previous version.
Note Physician’s Viewer and Central DICOM Server are two separate applications
that exist on the same installation disk. This section applies only to the
installation of Physician’s Viewer.

Note Physician’s Viewer cannot be installed on a computer that has Central DICOM
Server installed. Prior to installing Physician’s Viewer, ensure that Central
DICOM Server is not installed.
Note If you want to sync Physician’s Viewer to a Central DICOM Server, both
Physician’s Viewer and Central DICOM Server must be properly configured.
1. If this computer has QDR™ system software installed, log in as QDR User and then exit QDR
without shutdown.
11.3.2 Physician’s Viewer Setup

1. Insert the Physician’s Viewer/Central DICOM Server CD into the CD drive.
2. Using Windows Explorer, go to the CD drive and open the Physician’s Viewer folder.
3. Double-click setup.exe. Figure 451 displays.
Figure 451 Install Program as Other User
If this computer does not have QDR

system software installed, this screen
will not appear and Steps 4 and 5 are
not necessary.
Proceed to Step 6.
4. At this screen you will need your System Administrator (normally an MIS person) to type in the
password.
5. When the password is provided, click OK. Figure 452 displays.

Figure 452 Preparing for Install
6. Wait until Figure 453 appears.

Figure 453 Welcome to InstallShield
7. Click Next. Figure 454 appears.

Figure 454 License Approval
8. Read the license agreement.

9. Click I accept…
10. Click Next to accept the agreement. Figure 455 appears.
11. Configure the DICOM AE Title and Port.
Note If you don’t know, or aren’t sure, what the Local DICOM Port and Local
DICOM AE Title should be, accept the defaults. These can be changed later
during configuration.
Please note that DICOM Server is a service associated with Physician’s Viewer.
DICOM Server is not the same as Central DICOM Server, which is a separate
application.
Figure 455 Physician’s Viewer Configuration

Note:

Figure 456 Ready to Install Program
13. Click Install. A progress bar (Figure 457) displays while the program files are being installed.
Figure 457 Installing Hologic Physician’s Viewer

Figure 458 InstallShield Wizard Completed
15. Click Finish to complete the installation.

DX Report Option- (REPORT WRITER) Installation Instructions
1. Insert DXReport Writer Disk.
2. Click Start, then Computer.
3. Select the D:\ drive.
4. Select the DXReport Option folder and select Setup.exe. (If required use Admin privileges and
Admin password to install the application).
5. Follow screen prompts. At user account prompt, click Yes.
6. When complete remove the CD form the drive and return to the case.
HL7 Installation Instructions
7. Click Start then Computer.
8. Select the D:\ drive. Select the HL7 Report Option folder. Select Setup.exe. (If required use Admin
privileges and Admin password to install the application). Follow screen prompts. At user account
prompt, click Yes.
9. At Compatibility Assistant screen, click this program installed correctly.
10. When completed, remove the disk from the drive and return the FRAX Installation Instructions to
the case.
11. Install disk into CD drive.
12. Click Start then Computer.
13. Select D:\ drive. Select Setup.exe. (If required use Admin privileges and Admin password to install
the application).
14. Follow screen prompts.
15. At user account prompt, click Yes.
16. When completed remove the disk from the drive and return to the case.
17. Start APEX by double clicking QDR Icon on desktop.
18. Click Utilities > System Configuration > Report tab.
19. Verify that the FRAX box is enabled in the lower left part of the screen.
20. Print screen by hitting the PrtScn key and then paste into WordPad or Paint; and then print.

21. Print DXReport

22. Open Physicians Viewer.
23. Deselect Unread Only check box
24. Select a study from the list provided.
25. Click DXReport.
26. After MS Word 2013 opens, Select File > Print > HP Printer.
27. Click Print to print out the DXReport.
28. Close MS Word 2013 and close Physicians Viewer.
29. Reboot the computer and login as QDR.
30. Verify all reporting functions in a normal customer workflow.
Transfer MS Word 2013
1. To transfer Word 2013 from one PC to a replacement PC:
2. To re-install Word 2013 on the same PC:
a. Use telephone, call this number: 1-800-754-8300
b. Requires the email that the product was activated with.
11.3.3 DNS Server Setup

1. Click Start and select Control Panel (Figure ).
Select Control Panel
2. In the Control Panel (Figure ), click on Network and Internet to open the Network ands Sharing
Center (Figure ).

Control Panel
Network and Sharing Center
3. In the view of active networks, click on Local Area Connection (Figure ).

Local Area Connection

4. In the window Local Area Connection Status (Figure ) click on Properties.

Local Area Connection Status
Local Area Connection Properties
In this window,
1. select Use the following DNS server addresses and
2. enter the IP Address for the preferred DNS server and the Alternate DNS Server.
For a list of Free and Public DNS Servers, see Table 88 and Table 89.

Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
3. Click OK.
4. Restart the computer and login as QDR.
Note The IP Address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway may be configured to a
static IP address if assigned by the facility.
11.3.4 Running Hologic Connect with APEX software

1. Launch APEX application from the desktop icon.
When a remote session is started with the site, Figure is displayed on the DXA system.
APEX Remote Detection
2. Request the customer to click OK to close the popup message.

3. Verify that the Remote Connection icon and Driver Off-line icons are displayed in the date and
time window on the APEX desktop (Figure ).
Remote Communication and Driver Off-line Icons

Note The application must be restarted after the remote session is ended.
11.3.5 Optional APEX Enable Remote Desktop on System

1. Click Start Menu > Control Panel > System and select Remote (Figure ).
Remote
2. Enable Remote Desktop connection by checking Allow connection from computer running any
version of Remote Desktop (less secure).
3. Click OK.
4. Close the System Properties window and the Exit box to close the control panel.
Note The configuration of the Remote Desktop connection option in Windows may
not be permitted by the IT department of the facility.
Table 88 Free and Public DNS Servers

Provider Primary DNS Server Alternate DNS Server
Level31 209.244.0.3 209.244.0.4

Google2 8.8.8.8 8.8.4.4
DNS.WATCHH3 84.200.69.80 84.200.70.40
Comodo Secure DNS 8.26.56.26 8.20.247.20
OpenDNS Home4 208.67.222.222 208.67.220.220
DNS Advantage 156.154.70.1 156.154.71.1
Norton ConnectSafe5 199.85.126.10 199.85.127.10
GreenTeamDNS6 81.218.119.11 209.88.198.133

Table 88 Free and Public DNS Servers

Provider Primary DNS Server Alternate DNS Server
SafeDNS7 195.46.39.39 195.46.39.40
OpenNIC8 107.150.40.234 50.116.23.211
SmartViper 208.76.50.50 208.76.51.51

Dyn 216.146.35.35 216.146.36.36
FreeDNS9 37.235.1.174 37.235.1.177
censurfridns.dk10 89.233.43.71 91.239.100.100
Hurricane Electric11 74.82.42.42
puntCAT12 109.69.8.51
1. The free DNS servers listed above as Level3 will automatically route to the nearest DNS server operated by
Level3 Communications, the company that provides most of the ISPs in the US their access to the Internet
backbone.
2. Google also offers IPv6 public DNS servers: 2001:4860:4860::8888 and 2001:4860:4860::8844
3. DNS.WATCH also has IPv6 DNS servers at 2001:1608:10:25::1c04:b12f and 2001:1608:10:25::9249:d69b. In an
uncommon but much appreciated move, DNS.WATCH publishes live statistics for both of their free DNS
servers. Both servers are located in Germany which could impact performance if used from the US or other
remote locations.
4. OpenDNS also offers DNS servers that block adult content, calledOpenDNS FamilyShield. Those DNS
servers are 208.67.222.123 and 208.67.220.123. A premium DNS offering is also available, calledOpenDNS
Home VIP.
5. The Norton ConnectSafe free DNS servers listed above block sites hosting malware, phishing schemes, and
scams, and is called Policy 1. Use Policy 2 (199.85.126.20 and 199.85.127.20) to block those sites plus those
with pornographic content. Use Policy 3 (199.85.126.30 and 199.85.127.30) to block all previously men-
tioned site categories plus those Norton deems "non-family friendly." Be sure to check out the list of things
blocked in Policy 3 - there are several controversial topics in there that you may find perfectly acceptable.
6. GreenTeamDNS "blocks 18 categories which include malware, botnets, dangerous websites, adult related
content, aggressive/violent sites as well as advertisements and drug-related websites" according to their
FAQ page. Premium accounts have more control.
7. Register here with SafeDNS for content filtering options in several areas.
8. The DNS servers listed here for OpenNIC are just two of many in the US and across the globe. Instead of
using the OpenNIC DNS servers listed above, see their complete list of public DNS servers here and use
two that are close to you or, better yet, let them tell you that automatically here. OpenNIC also offers some
IPv6 public DNS servers.
9. FreeDNS says that they "never log DNS queries." Their free DNS servers are located in Austria.
10.The censurfridns.dk DNS servers are uncensored, operated by a privately funded individual, and are
physically located in Denmark. You can read more about them here. IPv6 DNS servers are also available at
2002:d596:2a92:1:71:53:: and 2001:67c:28a4::.
11.Hurricane Electric also has an IPv6 public DNS server available: 2001:470:20::2.
12.puntCAT is physically located near Barcelona, Spain. The IPv6 version of their free DNS server is
2a00:1508:0:4::9.
Note Primary DNS servers are sometimes called preferred DNS servers and
secondary DNS servers are sometimes called alternate DNS servers. Primary
and secondary DNS servers can be mixed and matched to provide another
layer of redundancy.

Table 89 US Based Open NIC DNS Server List by State

Status Open NIC Hostname Owner ST CO
DNS IP Address
normal 23.226.230.72 ns1.wa.us.dns.opennic.glue Fusl WA US
Logs: Logging completely disabled. Other: fvz-rec-us-wa-01
normal 107.150.40.234 ns7.mo.us.dns.opennic.glue SwedFTP MO US
Logs: Obfuscated every half hour. Other:
normal 75.127.14.107 ns5.ny.us.dns.opennic.glue SwedFTP NY US
normal 198.46.156.50 ns17.il.us.dns.opennic.glue SwedFTP IL US
normal 107.170.95.180 ns6.ny.us.dns.opennic.glue Dev Null NY US
Logs: No
Other: Be nice.
logs kept.
normal 74.207.241.202 ns19.ca.us.dns.opennic.glue Fusl CA US
Logs: Logging completely disabled. Other: fvz-rec-us-ca-01
normal 104.237.136.225 ns39.tx.us.dns.opennic.glue Fusl TX US
Logs: Logging completely disabled. Other: fvz-rec-us-tx-01
normal 74.207.232.103 ns4.ga.us.dns.opennic.glue Fusl GA US
Other: fvz-rec-us-ga-01
Logs: Logging completely disabled.
normal 104.237.144.172 ns1.nj.us.dns.opennic.glue Fusl NJ US
Logs: Logging completely disabled Other: fvz-rec-us-nj-01
11.4 Central DICOM Server Installation

11.4.1 Preliminary Steps to Central DICOM Server Installation

Note Central DICOM Server can only be installed on a computer running the
Windows XP Pro or Windows 7 operating system.
Central DICOM Server cannot be installed on a computer that has Physician’s
Viewer installed. Prior to installing Central DICOM Server, ensure that
Physician’s Viewer is not installed.
Central DICOM Server is typically installed on a separate, server computer
that runs 24 hours a day, seven days a week. If the server computer has QDR
system software installed, log in as QDR User and then exit QDR without
shutdown, before installing Central DICOM Server.
11.4.2 Central DICOM Server Setup

1. Insert the Physician’s Viewer/Central DICOM Server CD into the CD drive.
2. Using Windows Explorer, go to the CD drive and open the Central DICOM Server folder.
3. Double-click setup.exe. Figure 459 displays.
Figure 459 Install Program as Other User
If this computer does not have QDR

system software installed, this
screen will not appear and Steps 4
and are not be necessary.
Proceed to Step 9.
4. At this screen you will need your System Administrator (normally an MIS person) to type in the
password. When the password is provided, click OK. Figure 460 displays.

Figure 460 Preparing to Install
Figure 461 appears only if Physician’s Viewer software is installed.

5. Click OK
6. Click Finish.
You must uninstall Physician’s Viewer software from this computer.
7. When done, reboot the computer.
8. Restart Central DICOM Server installation.
Figure 461 Hologic DICOM Server Installer Information

Figure 462 Hologic DICOM Server InstallShield Wizard

Figure 463 Hologic DICOM Server License Agreement
11. Read the license agreement.

12. Click I accept… then
13. Click Next to accept the agreement. Figure 464 appears.

Figure 464 Hologic DICOM Server Configuration
Note If you don’t know, or aren’t sure, what the Local DICOM Port and Local
DICOM AE Title should be, accept the defaults. These can be changed later
during configuration
Figure 465 Hologic DICOM Server Ready to Install the Program
15. Click Install. A progress bar displays (Figure 466) while the program files are being installed.

Figure 466 Installing Hologic Central DICOM Server
16. Wait until the Figure 467 appears.

Figure 467 Hologic Central DICOM Server InstallShield Wizard Completed
17. Click Finish to complete the installation.
11.5 Configure the CentralDICOMServer

Two programs, Central DICOM Server and Physician’s Viewer, share the same Window’s service:
CentralDICOMServer. Because the service is shared, Physician’s Viewer and Central DICOM Server
cannot be installed on the same computer.
The CentralDICOMServer.exe program has no user interface and no setup dialog. The program
automatically starts at boot and runs only in the background as a Windows process. Therefore, the only
way to configure CDS for a computer running the CentralDICOMServer.exe program is the procedure
below:

Note For Physician’s Viewer, the CentralDICOMSever parameters are set up during
installation and called DICOM Server.
If the CDS parameters need to be changed after Physician’s Viewer is installed, the same procedure is used.
Note Contact Technical Support if the default Physician’s Viewer configuration does
not suit your installation requirements:
For example:
• DICOM Central Server with multiple remote PV installs
• IT at the site needs to change ports to reduce data transfer
11.5.1 Procedure
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to C:\Program Files (x86)\Hologic\Physician's Viewer (Figure 468).
Figure 468 Browse to Physician’s Viewer
2. Double-click DicomServerConfig.exe.
3. In the Hologic DICOM Server Configuration window (Figure 469), configure the parameters as
necessary.
4. When done, click OK.

Figure 469 Hologic DICOM Server Configuration
11.6 Hologic Connect Installation and Configuration

Hologic Connect (SFW-02053 – SW-03942) is released and available for use on systems running APEX V4.6,
V5.6, V 6.0 and higher.
11.6.1 Purpose
These instructions are provided to guide in the installation and configuration of Hologic Connect.
Features of Hologic Connect on APEX V4.6/V5.6 include the following
• Allows remote access to APEX software

• Disables the scanner control when agent is accessed
• Allows configurations to be modified in APEX GUI
The customer must provide DNS server addresses. If DNS servers are not provided, use of a Free and
Public DNS Servers are listed in Table 88 and Table 89.
If the Site does not have or the Public DNS servers do not work, an edit of the HOST file may be required to
connect. Contact dxasupport@hologic.com for information to edit the HOST file.
Hologic Connect requires outbound on the following ports 443 and 17022.
Hologic servers to reach:
Table 90 Hologic Servers
Location Site
Primary Connect.hologic.com 209.202.167.57
US - East Coast: ghsom1.axeda.com 209.202.157.179

Table 90 Hologic Servers
Location Site
US - West Coast: ghsj1.axeda.com 152.8.82.253
UK: ghuk1.axeda.com 89.234.8.217
Japan: gas-bo6.axeda.com 209.202.186.30
Australia: gas-bo7.axeda.com 216.34.120.236
Note If you need to uninstall the APEX software, the Hologic Connect client will
have to uninstalled first.
11.6.2 Hologic Connect Installation

1. Start with a clean install of APEX V4.6 / V5.6 or above on a DXA Windows 7 computer.
2. Insert Hologic Connect software disk SFW-02053 into the drive.
3. Right-click on Setup.exe.
4. Select Run as administrator.
5. Enter Admin as the password.
Note Hologic Connect will only install with APEX software versions 4.6, 5/6, or 6.0.
If a warning appears (Figure ) indicating that the correct version of the software
has not been installed, the APEX software must be upgraded before Hologic
Connect will install correctly.
Hologic Connect Software Warning
Note After you click on setup.exe there will be a delay after the preparing to install
screen in the installation popup display. This is normal. Be patient and wait
approximately 2 min.
6. Click Yes to restart the system when the Hologic Connect Installer Information Screen (Figure )
prompts you to restart.

Hologic Connect Installer Information Screen
Upon restart, the Hologic Connect Configuration Icon (Figure ) will appear on the desktop.
Hologic Connect Configuration Icon
11.6.3 Hologic Connect Service Verification

To verify that the Hologic Connect Service is installed and running:
1. Open the Control Panel from the Start Menu.
2. Select Administrative Tools.
3. Select Services for the list of active services (Figure ) to appear.
List of Services
4. Scroll down the list of active services and verify that Hologic Connect:
a. appears in the list of services, and
b. its status is Stopped.

11.6.4 Hologic Connect Configuration

1. Double-click on the Hologic Connect Configuration icon to launch the application and open the
Hologic Connect Control Panel (Figure ).
Hologic Connect Control Panel
2. On the Control Tab change the model to Horizon.

3. Input the system serial number in the Hologic Connect Serial Number field.
4. The systems configured DNS Server IP addresses will be listed.
Note If the site does not have a DNS Server you may have to use a public DNS server.
See list at bottom of document.
5. Click on Site Details tab (Figure ).

Contact Information
• Fill in the Contact Information.

• Required fields are:
• Customer Name
• Location
• Address 1 – input the serial number of system here
• City
• State/Province
• Postal Code
• Country Option fields are:
• Address2 – input site address here
• Phone
• Email
6. Click Apply.
Please restart the following services: Hologic Connect appears.
7. Exit the Hologic Connect Control Panel.
8. Exit the APEX application without shutdown.
9. Restart the computer and login as QDR.
10. Launch Hologic Connect Configuration.
11. Select Control.
12. Click Start.
The Hologic Connect status will change to green, and the Start button will be replaced with Stop and
Restart.
13. Close the Hologic Connect Configuration window.

Software Tools — System Diagnostics
12 Software Tools — System Diagnostics

System Diagnostics provides the ability to run tests and calibration procedures that require low-level
access to the scanner. To start System Diagnostics:
1. Log on in Service mode and start the APEX software.
2. Click Utility > Service Utilities > System Diagnostics and the System Diagnostics window appears
with the Global tab active.
12.1 SD Global Tab

Refer to Figure 470 and Table 91 for a description of the controls on the Global Tab.
Figure 470 SD Global Tab

Table 91 SD Global Tab Controls
Control Description
Common Data Block
Online Click the Online button to toggle the state of the HolxQdr driver between
Online and Offline
Emergency Stop When ON, indicates the Emergency Stop button is pressed
Interlock Inhibit When ON, indicates an interlock inhibit error condition is raised in the
HolxQdr driver
Collision Imminent When YES, the hardware has moved to a position that the HolxQdr driver
has flagged as dangerous
Control Panel Click the Control Panel button to enable, or disable, the control panel
ComCon Version Displays the version number for the Communications Controller board
firmware
Number of ComCon Displays the number of Communications Controller interrupts received
Interrupts
Missed ComCon Interrupts Displays the number of Communications Controller interrupts that have
been lost
Number of DOS Interrupts Displays the number of DOS interrupts received
Tests Block
Link Addresses (Check to When run, the Communications Controller (C/C) card is queried at each of
select the test) the first eight addresses on the serial bus and results are displayed in the
Test Results window.
A successful query result is displayed as E_OK and a failed query is
displayed as E_TIMEOUT_I. Queries can be expected to fail for devices that
are not physically present on the system (e.g. the TZ motor on Horizon C
and W systems).
If the test as a whole fails (an error other than a query failure), the error
message is displayed.
Emergency Watchdog When run, this test verifies that A/C line frequency interrupts are received
(Check to select the test) from the C/C. If so, a number of C-arm queries are sent to the C/C, and then
stopped. Results are displayed in the Test Results window.
If the test completes successfully, PASSED is displayed along with the time it
takes for an emergency stop condition to be asserted following the last C-
arm query.
If the test fails, the error code identifier string for the error condition is
displayed with no timing data.
Run Selected Tests Click to run the selected tests
12.2 SD C-arm Tab

Refer to Figure 471 and Table 92 for a description of the controls on the C-arm Tab.

Figure 471 SD C-arm Tab
Table 92 SD C-arm Tab Controls1
Control Description
C-arm Data Block
Device State Displays the device state code for the C-arm as an error code identifier
string. Possible values include:
E_OK - the C-arm is functioning normally.
E_EMULATE_I - the C-arm is being emulated.
E_NOT_READY_I - the C-arm has not yet recovered from a reset
E_UNEXPECTED_RESPONSE_I - the last query to read the C-arm status
failed
Xray Signal Level Displays the current X-ray energy level. Possible values include:
XRAY_OFF, XRAY_LO and XRAY_HI represent instantaneous states while
the X-rays are pulsing
XRAY_NONE indicates X-rays are off
Filter Wheel Click the Filter Wheel button to turn the filter wheel ON (spinning) or OFF
Filter Drum Position Displays the current position of the filter wheel as a single string.
“Hi” or “Lo” indicates HI_FILTER (brass section of the inner drum in the X-
ray beam) or LO_FILTER (air section of the inner drum in the X-ray beam)
“Bone”, “Tiss” or “Air”, indicates Bone (aluminum), Tissue (plastic) or Air
segment of the outer drum is in the X-ray beam
“H0” or “H1” indicates which half of the filter drum is nearest the X-ray
source
“P0”, “P1”, “P2” or “P3”, indicates which of the four X-ray pulses per filter
drum phase is currently taking place
Xrays Click the Xrays button to turn X-rays ON or OFF

Control Description
Hi Voltage Click the Hi Voltage button to turn high voltage ON or OFF
Warm Up Click the Warm Up button to turn the X-ray warm-up current ON or OFF
Laser Click the Laser button to turn the positioning laser ON or OFF. Note: Only
works when Enable Laser is DISABLED.
Enable Laser Click the Enable Laser button to turn keypad control of the laser ON or OFF
Laser Duration To change the length of time the laser stays on, enter a new number in the
edit box and press Enter (only applies when the laser is turned on from the
keypad, i.e., when Enable Laser is ENABLED).
Filter Abort When the Filter Abort button is ENABLED a filter error will cause an abort.
When the Filter Abort button is DISABLED a filter error will not cause an
abort.
HiLo Abort When the HiLo Abort button is ENABLED a High-Low error will cause an
abort. When the HiLo Abort button is DISABLED a High-Low error will not
cause an abort.
Filter Errors Displays a count of how many times the filter drum was out of phase with
the X-ray generator
HiLo Errors Displays a count of how many times the X-ray signal level was wrong for
the phase
Frequency Displays the line current frequency
Cycle Interval Displays the time interval between system interrupts
Warm Up Delay To change the warm-up delay, enter a new number in the edit box and press
Enter
Hi Voltage Delay To change the X-rays On high voltage delay, enter a new number in the edit
box and press Enter
Driver version Displays the version number for the driver
Device version Displays the version number for the C-arm microprocessor
Xray Error Displays a status code for the X-ray generator as an error code identifier
string. E_OK indicates the X-ray generator is functioning normally.
Pulse Per Seg Displays the number of Xray pulses in each segment
Xray On Phase: Click one button in each sub-control to identify the filter wheel position
(filter, segment, pulse and drum half) at which X-rays will be turned on:
Filter Click HI or LO for desired filter
Segment Click BONE, AIR or TISSUE for desired segment
Pulse Click 0, 1, 2 or 3 for desired pulse
DrumHalf Click 0 or 1 for desired drumhalf

Control Description
Xray Order Indicates the voltage level of the corresponding X-ray pulse during one filter
wheel segment
AC Line High Displays the instantaneous state of the AC line, which may be high (TRUE)
or low (FALSE).
Filter Drum Locked Displays TRUE when the filter drum is locked (preventing it from spinning),
displays FALSE when the filter drum is not locked
Brass Segment Displays TRUE when the filter drum brass filter is in the X-ray beam,
displays FALSE when the brass filter is not in the X-ray beam
Aperture Position Displays the position of the aperture plate in mils
Attenuator Position Displays the simulated position of the attenuator in mils
Xray Mode The edit box displays a numeric code value indicating X-ray voltage, power
and timing. Click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value
displayed in the edit control and change the X-ray voltage, power and
timing accordingly.
mA kVp Monitor Clicking the mA kVp Monitor button turns monitoring on very briefly
(fraction of a second) and the mA and kVp values are updated.
If X-rays are turned on, the monitor turns on (for almost a second) then off,
and the mA and kVp values are continuously updated during that time.
When X-rays are turned off, the monitor turns on (for almost a second) then
off, and the mA and kVp values are continuously updated during that time.
An error is generated if X-rays fail to turn on, or turn off.
mA Displays the X-ray current in milliamps (as reported by the C-arm
microprocessor)
kVp Displays the X-ray voltage in kilovolts (as reported by the C-arm
microprocessor)
Tests Block
Emergency Relay When run, this test first verifies that an emergency stop condition does not
exist. Then it sends an emergency stop command to the C-arm and verifies
that an emergency stop condition is asserted.
If the test completes successfully, PASSED is displayed. If the test fails, the
error code identifier string for the error condition is displayed.
Laser When run, this test turns on the laser positioning light and prompts: “Did
the positioning light in the C-arm turn on?”
Clicking Yes causes the test to proceed to the next step.
Clicking No ends the test with a failed status and error result.
The test then turns off the laser positioning light, and prompts: “Did the
positioning light in the C-arm turn off?”
Clicking Yes causes the test to be successfully completed.
Results are displayed in the Test Results window.

Control Description
High Voltage When run, this test turns on the C-arm high voltage relay and prompts: “Did
the high voltage contactor (relay) turn on?”
Clicking Yes causes the test to proceed to the next step.
The test then turns off the C-arm high voltage relay, and prompts: “Did the
high voltage contactor (relay) turn off?”
Clicking Yes causes the test to be successfully completed.
Drum Synch When run, this test stops the filter drum, then starts the filter drum and
measures the time it takes the drum to synchronize to the A/C line
frequency.
Aperture When run, this test moves the aperture plate in both directions, checks the
encoder readings, and computes the distance per step. Then it moves the
aperture plate to the position of each aperture slot and records the encoder
reading.
Calibrate Aperture Click to run the aperture calibration.
The aperture calibration procedure begins by moving the aperture plate
over its entire range and collecting X-ray levels at each point. A graph of X-
ray intensity versus plate position is displayed (Aperture Calibration Scan)
during data collection. When data collection is complete the Continue
button is enabled.
When Continue is pressed the peaks and minima in the intensity graph are
computed. Offsets in mils, for each peak, are labeled as “Steps” and are
graphed against the measured encoder values. This plot is displayed
(Aperture Calibration Plot) and the Continue button is enabled. When
Continue is pressed the peaks and minima in the intensity graph are
determined and displayed (Aperture Calibration Peaks). The Continue
button is enabled.
When Continue is pressed a table of the positions of peaks and minima
intensity is displayed (Aperture Calibration Data). The peaks represent the
positions of the aperture slots. The operator is queried as to whether the
results should be saved or discarded.
Commands Block
Move Absolute To move the aperture plate to a specific position, enter a number in the
Move Absolute edit box and click Move Absolute. The number is
interpreted as a location of the aperture plate, in mils.
Move Relative To move the aperture plate a specified distance from the current position,
enter a number in the Move Relative edit box and click Move Relative. The
number is interpreted as a distance to move the aperture plate, in mils. The
distance may be positive or negative.

Control Description
Emulate Click the Emulate button to set the C-arm emulation mode to the value
selected in the list box. The list box values are:
NONE - no emulation
FULL - emulate all C-arm devices
DRUM - just emulate the filter wheel
Note: The box does not display the current emulation state (there is no way
to read it).
Return Code: Following the execution of a Move Absolute, Move Relative or Emulate
command, the Return Code field displays the value returned by the
command, either E_OK or as an error code identifier string.
1. For descriptions of controls on the Common Data Block see Table 91.
12.3 SD TZ Motor Tab

Refer to Figure 472 and Table 93 for a description of the controls on the TZ Motor Tabs.
Figure 472 SD TZ Motor Tab
Table 93 SD TZ Motor Tab Controls
Control Description
TZ Motor Data Block

Table 93 SD TZ Motor Tab Controls (Continued)
Control Description
Device State Displays the device state code for the motor. Possible values include:
E_OK - the motor is functioning normally
E_EMULATE_I - the motor is being emulated
E_INVALID_PARAM_I, E_TOO_LONG_I, E_NOT READY_I or
E_WAITING_I - the last query to read the motor status failed
Pedestal Mode Displays the TZ motor mode as either OPERATIONAL or
MANUAL. The TZ motor only accepts commands when the mode is
OPERATIONAL.
Table Status Displays the status of the MOTOR_TZ system. The possible values are:
ACTIVE, TIMEOUT, BADALIGN, OK, INACTIVE,
SERVICE, CALIBRATE and RESET.
Pos Motion Switch Click to start the motor moving in the positive direction
(ENABLED). The motor continues to move until the button is
pressed again. Click again to stop the motor (DISABLED).
Neg Motion Switch Click to start the motor moving in the negative direction
(ENABLED). The motor continues to move until the button is
pressed again. Click again to stop the motor (DISABLED).
Left Pedestal Displays the status of the left pedestal. The possible values are
RUNNING, STALLED, STOPPED and AT_TARGET.
Right Pedestal Displays the status of the right pedestal. The possible values are
RUNNING, STALLED, STOPPED and AT_TARGET.
Current Position Displays the table position in microns.
Pos Limit Position Displays the table’s upper limit position (greatest allowed position
reading) in microns.
To change the upper limit position, enter a new number in the edit
box and press Enter.
Neg Limit Position Displays the table’s lower limit position (smallest allowed position
reading) in microns.
To change the lower limit position, enter a new number in the edit
Encoder Position Displays the position reported by the encoder, in encoder ticks.
Encoder Neg Limit Displays the lower pedestal encoder limit, in encoder ticks.
Encoder Pos Limit Displays the upper pedestal encoder limit, in encoder ticks.
Position Average The edit box displays the number of encoder readings that are
averaged per position reading.
To change, enter a new number in the edit box and press Enter.
Driver Version Displays the version number for the driver
Device Version Displays the version number for the motor controller microprocessor
Current SQDRIVER.INI Displays the upper left and right, and the lower left and right, pedestal
Limits (ticks) encoder limits (in encoder ticks).

Table 93 SD TZ Motor Tab Controls (Continued)
Control Description
Tests Block
Motor Encoder When run, this test moves the TZ motor in both directions, and
measures the encoder distance.
Calibrate Click to run the TZ motor calibration.
The calibration routine moves the table to its lowest position, and prompts
the operator to mark the position before continuing. When complete,
click OK.
Next, the calibration routine moves the table to its highest position and
prompts the operator to measure and enter (in cm) the distance moved.
When complete, click OK.
The operator is then queried as to whether the entered value is correct. If
correct, click Yes.
Finally, a complete set of motor calibration values are displayed and the
operator is queried as to whether the results should be saved.
Click Save, or Cancel, when prompted.
Commands Block
Move Absolute To move the motor to a specific position, enter a number in the Move
Absolute edit box and click Move Absolute. The number is interpreted as a
location of the motor, in microns.
Move Relative To move the motor a specified distance from the current position, enter a
number in the Move Relative edit box and click Move Relative. The number
is interpreted as a distance to move the motor, in microns. The distance may
be positive or negative.
Emulate Change the value in the list box and click the Emulate button to set the
motor emulation mode to ON or OFF. Note: The box does not display the
current emulation state (there is no way to read it).
Return Code Following the execution of a Move Absolute, Move Relative or Emulate
command, the Return Code field displays the value returned by the
command, either E_OK or as an error code identifier string.
12.4 SD AR, AY, TX and TY Motor Tabs

Refer to Figure 473 and Table 94 for a description of the controls on the AR, AY, TX and TY Motor Tabs.
The tab page, for each of these motors, contains the same information and controls (as applied to that
motor). This section describes the AR Motor Tab but the information applies to the AY, TX and TY Motor
Tabs as well.
Tab pages for all motors are included in the APEX System Diagnostics window even though some motors
are not present on some APEX models. For these cases motors are emulated. However, some operations
cannot be performed on emulated motors so the controls for these operations are disabled on the tab page
for that motor.

Figure 473 SD AR Motor Tab
Table 94 SD AR (AY, TX, TY) Motor Tab Controls1
Control Description
AR (AY, TX, TY) Motor Data Block
Motion State Displays the current state of the motor. The values are:
NONE - stopped
ACCEL - coming up to speed
STEP - at speed
DECEL - stopping
Device State Displays the device state code for the motor. Possible values include:
E_EMULATE_I - the motor is being emulated
E_EMERGENCY_STOP_I - the Emergency Stop button is pressed
E_INTERLOCK_INHIBIT_I - no A/C line interrupts have been
received for too long a period, and the system has been shut down
E_NOT_READY_I - the motor has not yet recovered from a reset
E_INVALID_PARAM_I or E_TIMEOUT_I - the last query to read the
motor status failed

Table 94 SD AR (AY, TX, TY) Motor Tab Controls1 (Continued)
Control Description
Motion Error Displays the error code value for the motor. Possible values include:
E_NO_MOTION_I - the motor has failed to move in response to a
command
E_MOTION_REVERSED_I - the motor has moved in the wrong
direction
E_TOLERANCE_I - the motor stopped too far from the target position
Pos Motion Switch Click to start the motor moving in the positive direction (ENABLED).
The motor continues to move until the button is pressed again. Click
again to stop the motor (DISABLED).
Neg Motion Switch Click to start the motor moving in the negative direction (ENABLED).
The motor continues to move until the button is pressed again. Click
again to stop the motor (DISABLED).
Pos Limit Switch Displays the current state of the positive limit switch. The values are:
NONE - not at a limit
SOFT - at a position limit
HARD - at a switch limit
BOTH - at both kinds of limit
UNKNOWN
Neg Limit Switch Displays the current state of the negative limit switch. The values are:
NONE - not at a limit
SOFT - at a position limit
HARD - at a switch limit
BOTH - at both kinds of limit
UNKNOWN
Position Displays the current motor position in microns (µm) (for the AR
Motor, the position is displayed in arc seconds) and in encoder ticks.
Move State Displays a string indicating the current status of most recent move
command. The possible values are:
DONE - last move completed successfully
START - move started by background thread
ACTIVE - move acknowledged by foreground thread
STOP - move stopped by background thread)
ABORT - move stopped by foreground thread
FAILED - last move failed
First Rate The current stepping rate for the motor at start-up, in microns (µm)
(for the AR Motor, arc sec) per second, is displayed in the edit box and
in steps per second in the static text field.
To change the initial stepping rate, enter a new number in the edit box
and press Enter.

Control Description
Final Rate The current stepping rate for the motor at full speed, in microns (µm)
(for the AR Motor, arc sec) per second, is displayed in the edit box and
in steps per second in the static text field.
To change the final stepping rate, enter a new number in the edit box
and press Enter.
Hold Power Displays the “resting” power level for the motor. Possible values are
OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH and MAX.
To change the resting power level, enter the first letter of a power level
in the edit box or click the spin control
Step Power Displays the active power level for the motor. Possible values are OFF,
LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH and MAX.
To change the active power level, enter the first letter of a power level
in the edit box or click the spin control
Accel Distance Displays the distance in microns (µm) (for the AR Motor, arc sec)
allowed for the motor to accelerate to full speed.
To change the acceleration distance, enter the new number in the edit
Accel Type Click the Accel Type button to set the acceleration profile to:
PARA - parabolic
EXP - exponential
LIN - linear
Min Motion The edit box displays the minimum time delay to wait to see if the
motor has moved, in power line cycles.
To change the minimum time delay, enter a new number in the edit
Motion Detect Click Motion Detect to toggle the state of motion detection between
ENABLED and DISABLED
Pos Limit Position The greatest allowed position reading, in microns (µm) (for the AR
Motor, arc sec), is displayed in the edit box and in encoder ticks in the
static text field.
To change the greatest allowed position value, enter a new number in
the edit box and press Enter.
Neg Limit Position The smallest allowed position reading, in microns (µm) (for the AR
Motor, arc sec), is displayed in the edit box and in encoder ticks in the
static text field.
To change the smallest allowed position value, enter a new number in
the edit box and press Enter.
Driver Version Displays the version number for the driver
Device Version Displays the version number for the motor controller
Position Average The edit box displays the number of encoder readings that are
averaged to get a position reading.
To change, enter a new number in the edit box and press Enter.

Control Description
Rate Scale Factor Displays the scaling factor used in computing the actual stepping rate
for the motor
Step Status Displays a string indicating the current stepping status. The possible
values are:
STOPPED
ACCEL - accelerating
SLEW - stepping at a constant rate
DECEL - decelerating
BUSY - the motor controller is re-calculating the acceleration profile
RESET
Direction Displays a string indicating the direction the motor is moving in, or, if
it is stopped, the direction it would move in. The possible values are
POS (positive) and NEG (negative).
Input Switches Displays a hexadecimal number encoding the values of the general
purpose input switches (read back from the motor controller
microprocessor).
Accel Steps Displays the number of steps used for acceleration from FirstRate to
FinalRate.
Number of Steps Displays the total number of steps to take in the current move
(including AccelSteps).
Tests Block
Motor Encoder When run, this test moves the motor in both directions, and measures
the encoder distance.
Step Size When run, this test moves the motor in both directions, and measures
both the distance moved and the number of steps moved. It computes
the step size in each direction from these measurements.
Step Rate When run, this test moves the motor in both directions, and measures
both the time required to move and the number of steps moved. It
computes the step rate in each direction from these measurements.

Control Description
Calibrate Click to run the motor calibration.
For all motors except AR, the calibration routine begins by moving the
motor to its maximum limit, and prompting the operator to indicate
when the limit has been reached. AR motor calibration moves to
specified intermediate positions before moving to the limits, but the
operator is prompted in the same manner for each position. Click OK,
or Cancel (to exit calibration) when prompted.
Next, for all motors except the TX motor, the calibration routine moves
the motor to its minimum limit, and prompts the operator to indicate
when the limit has been reached. TX motor calibration skips this step.
Click OK, or Cancel when prompted.
Next, the calibration routine moves the motor from its minimum limit
to its maximum limit and back, in small increments. During this
operation a graph of encoder readings versus position is displayed.
When the graph is complete, the calibration routine calculates and
displays regression lines for the graphed data. Click Continue, or
Cancel when prompted.
Finally, a complete set of motor calibration values are displayed and
the operator is queried as to whether the results should be saved. Click
Save, or Cancel when prompted.
Commands Block
Move Absolute To move the motor to a specific position, enter a number in the Move
Absolute edit box and click Move Absolute. The number is interpreted
as a location of the motor, in microns (µm) (arc seconds for the AR
Motor).
Move Relative To move the motor a specified distance from the current position, enter
a number in the Move Relative edit box and click Move Relative. The
number is interpreted as a distance to move the motor, in microns
(µm) (arc seconds for the AR Motor). The distance may be positive or
negative.
Emulate Change the value in the list box and click the Emulate button to set the
motor emulation mode to ON or OFF.
Note: The box does not display the current emulation state (there is no
way to read it).
Return Code: Following the execution of a Move Absolute, Move Relative or
Emulate command, the Return Code field displays the value returned
by the command, either E_OK or as an error code identifier string.
12.5 SD Detectors Tab for X-Ray Survey

The X-ray Survey is a 32-bit utility that tests the functions of X-ray generation and detection for the system.
This utility is used by Hologic manufacturing and service engineers only.

12.5.1 Invoking X-ray Survey from APEX

1. Log on in Service mode and start the APEX software. (with dongle if necessary)
2. Click Utility > Service Utilities > X-ray Survey and the X-ray Survey window appears with the
Detectors tab active (Figure 474).
Figure 474 APEX Ver 3.2 (or higher) System Diagnostics Window
Main Display
Display Controls Close utility
12.5.2 The Utility Window

The utility window is labeled Device Control and contains a set of tabs (for X-ray Survey the Detectors tab
is active).
The utility window has three parts:
1. The Main Display shows either a bar-graph or numeric fields for each detector depending on which
Display button is selected.
2. The Display Controls that affect the data shown in the main display. Not all controls are used by the
field engineer.
3. The Close button which exits the utility.
12.5.3 The Main Display

The Main Display provides data in two forms depending upon which display button is selected.

Figure 475 Main Display Controls
AW-00335_001-0902
When the Graph button is active and the system is producing X-rays, the data is presented in a bar graph
(Figure 476). Scale markings on the bottom of the graph indicate detector numbers. Scale markings aling
the sides indicate the numeric value of the column height. A label alone the left half of the graph indicates
which numeric value for the column is being displayed (for field engineering purposes this will always be
Volts). A label above the right half of the graph indicates which drum segment is being displayed (for feild
engineering purpose this will always be Air Segment). The bar graph shaded green is the hi voltage, the
bar graph shaded red is lo voltage.
Figure 476 X-ray Data as a Bar Graph
AW-00335_001-0903
When the Table button is active and the system is producing X-rays, numeric data is displayed
(Figure 476). A label above the left half of the graph indicates which value is being displayed (for field
engineering purpose this will always be Volts). The display has a vertical scroll bar on the right because
only a sixth of the data for all of the detectors is showing at one time.

Figure 477 X-ray Data as a Raw Data
AW-00335_001-0904
12.5.4 The Display Controls

The Display Controls can be broken into four columns:
• Controls starting with X-rays (F2) OFF/ON
• Controls starting with Test Signals
• Controls starting with Display
• Controls starting with Status Bits
Controls Starting with X-rays

Figure 478 Controls Starting with X-ray
These controls include:
X-rays (F2) button OFF/ON

The default setting of this button is OFF. Clicking this button will produce X-rays from the system.
Keyboard F2 can also be used (toggles X-rays ON and OFF). When X-rays are ON warning lights on the
scanner will go on and the Main Display will look like either Figure 476 or Figure 477 depending on the
setting of the Display button (see below). When the X-ray (F2) button is ON the Filter Wheel button is
grayed out and cannot be used.
Warning: While the X-ray button is ON the system is producing X-rays, take proper
precautions.
Filter Wheel button OFF/ON

The default for this button is ON. The Field Engineer will not use the Filter Wheel
button and it should always remain ON. This deals with testing the system in
different mode.
Note The next set of controls have the label Filter Wheel Off Phase which indicates the
state of the Filter Wheel. These controls (HI/LO, BONE/AIR/TISSUE, 0/1/2/3
and 0/1) indicate where the Filter Wheel will stop when it is not moving.
HI/LO buttons
The default for these buttons is HI. The Field Engineer does not use the
HI/LO buttons and they should always remain the default.
Bone/Air/Tissue Buttons
The default for these buttons is BONE. The Field Engineer will not use the BONE/AIR/ TISSUE buttons
and they should always remain the default.

0/1/2/3 buttons
The default for these buttons is 0. The Field Engineer will not use the 0/1/2/3 buttons and they should
always remain the default.
0/1 buttons
The default for these buttons is 0. The Field Engineer will not use the 0/1 buttons and they should always
remain the default.
12.5.5 Label Information

This area also provides information on the Hi Voltage Setting (either ON or OFF), Frequency (50 or
60Hz), Filter Errors (a count of how many times the filter drum was out of phase with the X-ray generator)
and HiLo Errors (a count of how many times the X-ray signal level was wrong for the phase).
12.5.6 Controls starting with Test Signals

Figure 479 Controls starting with Test Signals
AW-00335_001-0906
These controls include:
Test Signal button OFF/ON

The default setting of this button is OFF. When this button is ON a test signal is sent to all of the detectors.
Activity will be shown on the main display (Figure 476 or Figure 477).
Pulse 0/1/2/3
The default setting of this button is 1. This indicates what data is displayed and not what the scanner is
doing. The Field Engineer will not use the Pulse 0/1/2/3 buttons and they should always remain the
default.
Drum Half 0/1

The default setting for this button is 0. This indicates what data is displayed and not what the scanner is
doing. The Field Engineer will not use the Drum Half 0/1 buttons and they should always remain the
default.
Hi Gain
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 11. Changing Hi Gain changes the displayed detector values
for the Hi portions of the current segment. The associated actual gain values are shown in the following
table.

Note Hi Gain is disabled when X-rays are on.
Table 95 Hi Gain Values
Gain Code A/D Gain MUX Gain Total Gain

0 1 2 1
1 1 2 2
2 1 4 4
3 1 8 8
4 2 1 2
5 2 2 4
6 2 4 8
7 2 8 16
8 4 1 4
9 4 2 8
10 4 4 16
11 4 8 32
Lo Gain
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 11. Changing Lo Gain changes the displayed detector values
for the Lo portions of the current segment. The associated actual gain values are shown in Table 95.
Note Lo Gain is disabled when X-rays are on.
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 8. The default mode is 3. This control determines the voltage,
current and duty cycle for the X-ray generator. Most scans use X-ray Mode 3, Horizon A Whole Body uses
1, Horizon W Whole Body uses 3 and IVA (single energy) uses 6.
The following table shows the full set of defined X-ray modes.
Note X-ray Mode is disabled when X-rays are on.
Table 96 X-ray Modes
X-ray Mode Pulse Cycle Peak Ma Average Ma High KV Low Kv

0 0 -- -- -- --
1 50% 3 0.75 140 100
2 50% 10 2.5 -- 100
3 50% 10 240 100

Table 96 X-ray Modes
X-ray Mode Pulse Cycle Peak Ma Average Ma High KV Low Kv

4 50% 3 0.75 -- 80
5 50% 3 0.75 140 80
6 100% 10 5.0 140 --
7 50% 10 2.5 140 --
8 100% 10 5.0 -- 100
Aperture
This is a spinner control with a range of 0 to 13. This controls the slit through which the X-rays pass to limit
the dimensions of the X-ray beam. This control allows the selection of a specific aperture in the system and
can be used to test aperture movement. The number next to the spinner is the physical position of the aperture.
Note: This control is slow. If you touch it (any control) before it settles, you will get an error.
Average Voltage
This displays the average voltage across all detectors for the Hi Air segment
12.5.7 Controls starting with Display

Figure 480 Controls starting with Display
AW-00335_001-0907
12.5.8 Display
This has two buttons: GRAPH and TABLE. This controls what is seen on the Main Display. In GRAPH the
Main Display shows as a bar graph (Figure 476) with scale markings on the left side according to how
Scale is set (see below). It shows the lo (red tinted) and the hi (green tinted) voltages. In TABLE the Main
Display shows the data from the detectors as numeric data.
Note “lo” = X-rays generated with low kV, “hi” = X-rays generated with high kV.
12.5.9 Scale
This has three buttons: RAW, LOG and VOLTS. The Default is VOLTS. The Field Engineer will not use
RAW or LOG and the button should always remain the default (VOLTS). This control sets up the scale
markings on the Main Display when the Display is set to GRAPH and changes the units for the numeric
value when the TABLE is displayed.

Segment
This has three buttons: BONE, TISSUE and AIR. The default is AIR. This controls the data segment that are
displayed in the GRAPH. The Field Engineer will not use either BONE or TISSUE and the button should
always remain the default (AIR).
Zoom In and Zoom Out

By default, the GRAPH is displayed at minimum resolution When either function reaches its maximum
the button will be grayed out. Zoom In increases the resolution, meaning that less of the total data range is
displayed on the graph but differences in bar heights are magnified. The horizontal scale isn't affected and
all detectors are displayed regardless of the zoom value. Zoom Out will reverse what Zoom In has done.
Data Current Settings

This reports the Hi and Lo settings of the dark current for Bone, Tissue and Air.
Subtract Dark Current OFF/ON

The default for this button is OFF. Dark current is a residual reading for any equipment that has current.
Hologic allows 1 volt to compensate for dark current (Figure 476). Clicking on this button will remove the
dark current from the Main Display bar graph. The Field Engineer will not use Subtract Dark Current and
it should always remain the default.
Controls starting with Status Bits

Figure 481 Controls starting with Status Bits
AW-00335_001-0908
Status Bits
Detector values come back from the scanner as sixteen bit numbers, traveling through some parts of the
hardware on sixteen separate wires. The Status Bits field displays the most recent value for each bit, and
color-codes whether that bit has ever changed. Red bits have not been changed, green bits have. The Reset
button sets all the bits to red. If a particular bit never turns green under any circumstances, the
corresponding wire may be broken.
Reset
The Reset button re-starts the process of computing the means and standard deviations for each filter-
segment. It resets the number of samples to zero. It also resets the bits in the Status Bits display.
Select Detector
This is an edit box that displays specific data about the selected detector. Select Detector has a default of
108 (the middle of the bar graph as shown in Figure 476). This displays both the currently selected detector
(number) and allows a new detector to be selected by inserting a number in the edit box. A new detector
can also be selected by dragging the vertical blue line on the Main Display bar graph (Figure 482). The
number displayed in the edit box will be automatically updated to reflect the line position.

Figure 482 Moving the Detector

Click and drag this blue
line to change detectors.
AW-00335_001-0909
Show Details
Show Details defaults to off. When clicked, a small window pops up containing detailed information
about one detector, in tabular form (Figure 483). This information includes the current (most recent) value,
mean value, standard deviation and number of samples (values used to calculate the mean and standard
deviation) for each of the six filter segments. The pop-up window can be dragged wherever the user wants
and remains until Show Details is actively released.
Figure 483 Show Details Window
12.6 SD D.A.S. Tab

Refer to Figure 484 and Table 97 for a description of the controls on the D.A.S. Tab.

Figure 484 SD D.A.S. Tab
Table 97 SD D.A.S. Tab Controls1
Control Description
D.A.S. Data Block
Device State Displays the device state code for the DAS as an error code identifier string.
Possible values include:
E_OK - the DAS is functioning normally.
E_EMULATE_I - the DAS is being emulated.
E_EMERGENCY_STOP_I - the Emergency Stop button is pressed
E_INTERLOCK_INHIBIT_I - no A/C line interrupts have been received for
too long a period, and the system has been shut down
E_NOT_READY_I - the DAS has not yet recovered from a reset
E_TOO_LONG_I, E_TIME_OUT_I, E_BAD_BLOCK_I,
E_INVALID_ADDR_I, or E_CANCELLED_I - the last query to read the
DAS status failed
Total Readings Displays the number of detectors being read. Note: this value is only
updated in the drivers when the detectors are read. They are read when the
Detectors property page is being displayed, but not when the DAS property
page is being displayed. The result is that this field displays 0 as a value
until the operator views the Detectors property page.
First Channel Displays the array index of the first detector being read.
To change the first detector, enter a new number in the edit box and press
Enter.

Table 97 SD D.A.S. Tab Controls1 (Continued)
Control Description
Last Channel Displays the array index of the last detector being read.
To change the last detector, enter a new number in the edit box and press
Enter.
Hi Gain Displays the current gain value for high voltage X-rays, as a code value.
A: displays the A/D gain multiplier
M: displays the MUX gain multiplier
To change the high voltage gain, enter a new number in the edit box or click
the up/down arrows to raise/lower the selected high voltage gain (code
value).
Lo Gain Displays the current gain value for low voltage X-rays, as a code value.
A: displays the A/D gain multiplier
M: displays the MUX gain multiplier
To change the low voltage gain, enter a new number in the edit box or click
the up/down arrows to raise/lower the selected low voltage gain (code
value).
Device version Displays the version number for the DAS microprocessor
Sample Mode The current DAS sample mode is indicated by the active (pressed) button:
SINGLE or DUAL.
To set the DAS sample mode, press the button for the mode desired.
Test Signal Press the Test Signal button to toggle the state of the test signal between ON
and OFF
Control Description
Tests Block
Test Signal When run, this test reads the detectors, turns on the ADC test signal and
reads the detectors again. It verifies that the detector values increased.
Performance Test When run, this test measures detector output with X-rays off, then measures
detector output with X-rays on, and calculates a performance factor for each
detector.
Upon completion, the operator is prompted to save the performance factors
and the bad detector data.

Table 97 SD D.A.S. Tab Controls1 (Continued)
Control Description
Plot Results Click Plot Results to display a series of plots of the Performance Test results
(Performance Test must be run before the Plot Results button becomes
active). The plots are:
Plot 1: PERFORMANCE TEST - plots NOISE / (SIGNAL - OFFSET) per A/D
Channel
Plot 2: NOISE - plots mean values of Noise measurements (in volts)
Plot 3: NOISE - plots Standard Deviations of Noise measurements
Plot 4: SIGNAL - plots mean values of Signal measurements
Plot 5: SIGNAL - plots Standard Deviations of Signal measurements
Plot 6: OFFSET - plots mean values of Offset measurements
Plot 7: OFFSET - plots Standard Deviations of Offset measurements
Commands Block
Emulate Click the Emulate button to set the DAS emulation mode to the value
selected in the list box. The list box values are:
NONE - no emulation
COMCON - emulate the DAS on the ComCon card
SPECIAL - emulate the DAS on the PC, with diagnostic information in
channels 0-6
PC - emulate the DAS on the PC
Note: The box does not display the current emulation state (there is no way
to read it).
Return Code: Following the execution of an Emulate command the Return Code field
displays the value returned by the command, either E_OK or as an error
code identifier string.
12.7 SD Panel Tab

Refer to Figure 485 and Table 98 for a description of the controls on the Panel Tab.

Figure 485 SD Panel Tab
Table 98 SD Panel Tab Controls1
Control Description
Panel Data Block
Device State Displays the device state code for the Panel as an error code identifier string.
Possible values include:
E_OK - the Panel is functioning normally
E_EMULATE_I - the Panel is being emulated
E_INVALID_PARAM_I, E_TOO_LONG_I, E_NOT READY_I or
E_WAITING_I - the last query to read the panel status failed
Reset Displays the state code of the hardware reset flag, either TRUE or FALSE
Blink Rate To change the blink cycle time, enter a new number (milliseconds) in the edit
Tape Switch Displays TRUE if the collision detection tape has registered a collision, or
FALSE if it has not
Switches The Switches column displays the current state (either OFF or PRESSED) of
each of the following switches: C-arm Left, C-arm Right, Table In, Table Out,
Load/Unload, Home, Enable and Laser.

Table 98 SD Panel Tab Controls1 (Continued)
Control Description
Lights The Lights column displays the current command state (either ON, OFF or
BLINK) for each of the following lights: C-arm Left, C-arm Right, Table In,
Table Out, Load/Unload, Home and Enable.
Click the up or down arrow on the spin control for each light to change the
state of that light.
Device version Displays the version number for the Panel microprocessor
Tests Block
Switches When run, this test prompts the operator to press the switches on the control
panel one switch at a time and observe that a light turns on or off in
response. It then prompts: “Did all the switches operate properly?” Click
Yes or No.
Lights When run, this test sets all the lights on the control panel to the flashing
state. It then prompts: “Are the lamps on the control panel flashing?” Click
Yes or No.
Emergency Stop When run, this test prompts the operator to press the Emergency Stop
switch.
Emergency Strip When run, this test prompts the operator to press the emergency strip
switch located underneath or on the side of the table.
Commands Block
Emulate Click the Emulate button to set the Control Panel emulation mode to either
ON or OFF. Note: The box does not display the current emulation state
(there is no way to read it).
Return Code: Following the execution of an Emulate command the Return Code field
displays the value returned by the command, either E_OK or as an error
code identifier string.
12.8 SD State Machine Tab

Refer to Figure 486 and Table 99 for a description of the controls on the State Machine Tab.

Figure 486 SD State Machine Tab
Table 99 SD State Machine Tab Controls1
Control Description
State Machine Data Block
Device State Displays the state machine status code. Possible values are:
NO_STATE - nothing loaded
PROGRAM - state program loaded
TASK - task table loaded
READY - state program and task table loaded
EXEC - running
BREAK - stopped by break
ABORT - stopped by abort
ERROR - stopped by error
Number of Tasks Displays the number of loaded tasks
Number of Buffers Displays the number of buffers allocated
Size of Buffers Displays the number of bytes per buffer
Number of Registers Displays the size of the array of registers
Size of Program Displays the number of bytes in the loaded program
Buffer Address Displays the address of the currently selected buffer (in standard memory
address format)

Table 99 SD State Machine Tab Controls1 (Continued)
Control Description
Flags The Flags control consists of a row of sixteen buttons (one for each flag in
the Flags array). Click a button to toggle the corresponding flag bit between
T (set) and F (cleared).
Tasks The Tasks control consists of a column labeled “Task[x]:”, where x ranges
from 0 to 7, and adjoining columns labeled “Index and “Status.”
The Index column displays the index of the current instruction for the
corresponding task. The index is the offset of the instruction in the Program
array.The Status column displays the status of the corresponding task. The
status is an error code identifier string.
Program Address Displays the address of the loaded program (in standard memory address
format)
Time Out Enable Displays whether or not the state machine tests for the time out condition.
Possible values are TRUE and FALSE.
Register Address Displays the address of the Registers array (in standard memory address
format)
Register[x] Displays “Register[x]:” where x is the index of the currently selected
register in the Registers array.
To change the value of the currently selected register, edit the value in the
edit box or select a new value from the drop-down list.
1. For descriptions of controls on the Common Data Block see Table 91 on Page 452.
12.9 Emergency Motion

Emergency Motion is used on all APEX versions and is accessed from the Main Menu by selecting Utilities
> Emergency Motion. This program provides the Field Service Engineer with a method for moving all
motors even in conditions where a detected software error condition would normally prevent any
movement of the motors. This program can be used as a quick means of checking most motor control
functions.

Preventive Maintenance
13 Preventive Maintenance
This section lists the procedures that should be performed by trained service personnel at least once per
year, and preferably at six-month intervals
Use and complete form CSD-0042-F06 Bone Densitometer PM Checklist while performing the Preventive
Maintenance.
Note The Horizon system meets applicable FDA radiation performance standards
through its useful and expected life provided no components or parts are
removed from the system and no unauthorized adjustment or unauthorized
replacement of certified components is performed.
13.1 Customer Preventive Maintenance

Hologic requires that the customer run a daily QC scan of the spine phantom supplied with the Horizon,
and add that scan to the QC database. If the CV of the database exceeds 0.8% the customer is asked to
inform Hologic Field Service.
The customer is further advised to perform a weekly backup of the patient database (System Backup) and
archive QC scans along with their patient scans.
Regular cleaning by the system operator of certain components, such as the table pad, is recommended.
Refer to Clean the System section in MAN-04871 FLEX Horizon User Guide.
13.2 Field Service Preventive Maintenance

Hologic recommends that the following procedures be performed by trained service personnel at least
once per year and preferably at six-month intervals. Refer to CSD-0042-F06 Preventive Maintenance
Checklist for the approved PM checklist for Horizon systems.
13.2.1 Preventive Maintenance Summary

System Backup and QC
1. With the systems running, archive any scans that have not been archived.
2. Run a system backup.
3. Check the QC plots for any problems (like drift).
Caution Do Not Recalibrate The Machine. Call Technical Support if drift or a shift is
noted.
4. In the QDR > LogFiles folder, check the ERROR.LOG file for any errors.
Disk Cleanup
1. Exit QDR without shutdown.
2. Then run the Windows utility Disk Cleanup.
Cleaning and Mechanical Checks

Power Down to perform mechanical tasks such as:
• guide rail maintenance
• filter, surface, screen cleaning
• cleaning the fans, paying special attention to the computer fan.
• cleaning all exterior metal surfaces and wipe off the rails.
• cleaning the monitor screen, keyboard, and mouse ball rollers.
• cleaning the inkjet printer rollers and ink cartridge electrical contacts with isopropyl alcohol.
• ensuring that all cable connections are tight.

Adjust Motor Drive Belts

1. Check and adjust, if necessary, all motor drive belts. Replace any worn or damaged belt as
necessary.
Note Detailed instructions for drive belt replacement and adjustments can be found
in the Remove and Replace section of this manual.
For each drive belt (C-arm Y, C-arm R, Table X, and Table Y) perform the following:
1. Loosen the 2 mounting bolts holding the tension block.
a measuring guide (the inside of the washer should be flush with the bracket cut). For the AR
tension spring, adjust to 7/8 in. from the inside of one washer to the inside of the other.
3. Tighten the two mounting bolts holding each drive belt’s tension block.
Note It is not necessary to perform the MOTOR calibration procedures after
tensioning the motor drive belts.
Perform Alignment Checks

To perform:
• alignment checks
• radiation checks
• test scans
1. Power up the system and log in as Service and enter Service Mode.
2. With X-rays on acquire screen captures of the X-ray Survey bar graph screen with the X-ray beam
alignment tool installed and with the alignment tool removed. Print both screen captures and
include with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
3. Measure scatter, leakage, and patient dose as described in the INSTALLATION section of this
manual. Report any decrease in dose that exceeds 10% of the dose at installation.
4. Check X-ray beam alignment as described in the ALIGNMENT AND CALIBRATION section of this
manual. DO NOT ADJUST THE ALIGNMENT. Call Technical Support.
5. On A and W system models, perform the Table Top Radiographic Uniformity test. Print a copy of
the test results and include it with the other paperwork being returned to Hologic.
6. Run 10 spine scans and check calibration. Do not recalibrate.
7. Print copies of the
• baseline phantom scan
• recent phantom scan
• results of scan averaging for the 10 spine scans in Step 6.
8. Compare these printouts with those from the last PM for possible problems, and send the printouts
to Hologic to be kept with the service records for this system.
9. From the Main Menu, select QC > QC Data Management > Plot.
a. Set up the QC Plot to include QC scans from at least the last two years.
b. Display and print a copy of the BMD, BMC, Area, HiAir, LoAir, K, and D0 plots to be included in
the paperwork being returned to Hologic.
10. During a scan, verify that pressing the red Emergency STOP switch immediately stops all C-arm
motion, table motion, and X-ray production. X-ray production should be monitored by a Victoreen
450P or equivalent.

11. Test all tape switches. The tape switches are located along the length of the front and back of the
table, and mounted on the frame under the table. Verify that pressing a tape switch immediately
stops all C-arm motion, table motion, and X-ray production. X-ray production should be monitored
by a Victoreen 450P or equivalent.
Note The front (table) tape switch is disabled until the C-arm is at 0°, so this switch
should be checked with the C-arm at a position greater than 30°.
Obtaining kV and mA Readings on Horizon C-arm PCB

Horizon C-arm interface board PCB-00940 Rev 006 and higher have test points to obtain the kV and mA
readback from the Spellman Tank.
The kV and mA readings on the C-arm PCB do not have a 1:1 correspondence with the readings displayed
on an oscilloscope. The Spellman tank uses a 0-9 VDC measuring scale that must be converted to actual
KV and mA. To get the actual kV value, divide the kV readback value by 0.05625. To obtain the actual mA
value, divide the mA readback value by 0.75.
(US) Use these calculated values when completing the Radiation Report.
The tolorance range is +/-10 % on the wave form readings.
There are no adjustments available for the waveforms in the field. After double checking that the scope
setups are correct and the wave forms are out of tolerance contact technical support to discuss replacement
of the HVPS tank assembly.
Instructions
1. Log in as Field Service,
2. Select the Exit icon and select Exit Without Shutdown.
3. Launch into the service application with the white tool bag icon.
4. Go to Utilities > System Diagnostics > Detectors.
5. Set up x-rays to
6. Hi Gain 2, Low Gain 1, Xray Mode 3, Aperture 7.
Use the following to observe the kV and mA wave forms on the c-arm board test points (Figure 2) on the
C-Arm Interface Board (Figure 487), MAmon, SRCgnd, KVmon:
Figure 487 Board Test Points

Figure 488 Test Points
Measure kV
1. Connect oscilloscope 10X probe ground connection to SRC gnd.
2. Connect the oscilloscope 10X probe
3. channel 1 to kV mon.
4. Configure the oscilloscope:
5. set time to 5.00ms
6. voltage to 1 volt/division
7. DC Coupled
8. move the ground trace line to bottom of screen
9. Press F2 to turn on X-rays.
10. Observe the oscilloscope max kV pulse amplitude (Figure 489).
KVP: Divide the voltage displayed on the scope screen by 0.05625 to obtain the actual kV.

Figure 489 Example: 7.7V /0.05625 = 136.9 kVP
Measure mA
11. Move oscilloscope 10X probe channel 1 to mA mon.
12. Configure the oscilloscope: Change time to 10.0mS
13. Press F2 to turn on X-rays observe oscilloscope max 10mA pulse.
14. Press F2 to turn off x-rays.
15. Change set up to Hi Gain 2, Low Gain 1, Xray Mode 1, Aperture 7.
16. Press F2 to turn on X-rays observe oscilloscope max 3mA pulse (Figure 490).
mA: Divide the displayed voltage by 0.75 to obtain the actual mA.
Figure 490 Example: 2.3V /0.75 = 3.06 mA

Virus Check
1. Run a virus checker that is approved by Hologic for use on bone densitometer systems.
2. Refer to MAN-00508 for details about approved virus check software products.
13.2.2 Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance

On all Horizon models, a guide rail and two guide bearings (AY) are located at the lower back of the C-
arm (Figure 491). Another guide rail and two guide bearings (TX) are located on the right side running
front to back just below the table (Figure 492).
1. Clean the AY and the TX guide rails using a dry, clean cloth.
Caution Do Not use solvents such as alcohol or WD-40. If a solvent is needed to remove
dirt and/or gum buildup on the rail, be sure to thoroughly dry the rail before
moving the bearings. The solvent may harm the bearing grease.
Figure 491 Guide Bearing and Rail (AY)
Guide Bearing
Fitting Cap
Seal
Guide Rail

Figure 492 Guide Bearing and Rail (TX)

2. Grease the guide bearings.

The bearings must be greased every 100 km (62 mi) of travel, depending on usage. This may range
between one and two years. The following table lists more information about the grease to be used.
Table 100 Grease for Bearings
Generic Brand Names Manufacturer

EP-2 Lithium Beacon 325 ESSO
soap-based grease Alvania Grease RA Shell
Mobilux Grease No. 2 Mobil
Isoflex Super LDS 18 Kluber
Consult Hologic Technical Support for more information on obtaining the proper tools, material, and
procedure.

PCB Summary Information
14 PCB Summary Information

Table 101 Distribution Board PCB-01057
LED’s1 Signal Voltage Source1 Jumpers
D15 On +7VDC Internal Voltage Regulator J1 (panel) Out
D181 Off TZ Drive - - J3 (dist) Out
D13 On +3.3VDC Internal Voltage Regulator J2 (C-arm) Out

Internal Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Supply
D7 On +15VDC Internal Low Voltage Power CB Drive Normally
Supply
D9 On -15VDC Internal Low Voltage Power 5 TZ In
Supply
D11 - +24VDC Internal Low Voltage Power 4 TY In
Supply
D61 Off TY DRIVE 3 TX In
D31 Off TX DRIVE 2 AR In
D21 Off AR DRIVE 1 AY In
D11 Off AY DRIVE
1. Voltage indicators = green; motor drive status = red. If red led is on, there is a failure in the PCB. The CB
should be tripped.
Table 102 PCIe Communications Command Board Communications Controller PCB-01009
Jumpers
LED1 PWR_OK

Table 103 Stepper Motor Controller PCB-00930
Signal Signal Source Jumpers and Switches

D3 On +VM External Signal Dist. JP4 PIN 1 - 2 In
D6 On +5VDC Internal Voltage JP4 1-2 Normal In
Regulator
- - -3.3V Internal Voltage JP4 2-3 Test Out
Regulator
D13 MEN On Note: All 4 LED’s are On
D15 CPU Flash solid when the selected
D11 DIR Off motor drive is engaged
D10 STEP Off Set to...

Stepper motor (AR) SW1 6
Stepper motor (AY) SW1 7
Stepper motor (TX) SW1 4
Stepper motor (TY) SW1 5
Table 104 TZ Drive (A Only) PCB-00916
LEDs Voltage /
Signal Source Jumpers
LED10 On +5VDC Int. Voltage JW1 (NORMAL) In
Regulator
LED9 On +24VDC Ext. Signal Dist. JW3 (TEST) Out
LED8 Flash STATUS - - NORMAL/ SERVICE NORM
(4 LED group)
LED11 ON +3.3VDC Int. Voltage
Regulator
Table 105 64-Channel Detector Array Assembly (Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi) PCB-00889
Source Connection Source
+15VDC External ADC PCB

-15VDC External ADC PCB
+3.3VDC Internal Voltage Regulator
+12VDC Internal Voltage Regulator
-12VDC Internal Voltage Regulator

Table 106 128-Channel Detector Assembly (Horizon C and W) PCB-00875
LED’s Voltage Voltage Source
D3 On +12VDC Int. Voltage Regulator

D2 On -12VDC Int. Voltage Regulator
D1 On VCC Int. Voltage Regulator
Potentiometer R271 (A/D GAIN CNTRL)
Table 107 216-Channel Detector Array Assembly (Horizon A) PCB-01143
Source Connection Source

+15VDC External Distribution PCB
-15VDC External Distribution PCB
+5VDC External Distribution PCB
Table 108 ADC (Horizon A) PCB-00941
LEDs Voltage Voltage Source Jumpers
D3 On VCC Internal Voltage Regulator J2 (GROUND) Out

D3 On +5VDC Internal Voltage Regulator J1 GND Out
D2 On +12VDC Internal Voltage Regulator J3 RUN MODE 2-3 In
D1 On -12VDC Internal Voltage Regulator JP3 (64 CHAN 1-2) In
- - +7VDC External C-arm Int. Board
- - +/-15VDC External C-arm Int. Board
Potentiometer R6 (A/D GAIN CNTRL)

Table 109 C-arm Interface PCB-00940
LED’s Signal Voltage Source Jumpers

D1 On +28VDC External Signal Dist. JP7
D10 On VM External Signal Dist. JP8
D11 On +5VDC Internal Voltage Reg. W3 NORMAL(1-2) In

TEST (2-3)
D15 On +7VDC Internal Voltage Reg. W1 SYS-RESET In
- - +15VDC External Signal Dist.
- - -15V DC External Signal Dist.
D17 ON 3.3VDC JP3A Redundant for Tank
D12 On LOCKED
D13 Flashing DRUM AT TOP
X-ray
D7 Off X-ray ENABLE
D6 Off X-ray FAULT

Troubleshooting
15 Troubleshooting
Contact the HelpDesk for assistance with any hardware and software issue. Do not order major parts until
you have performed a thorough diagnostic. Then contact the HelpDesk about the issue.
Provide the following information:
• serial number
• model of the unit
• software version
• installation site
• error message number
Note Before ordering any replacement parts, always verify that the system is properly
calibrated. The calibration process can help to identify mechanical problems.
15.1 Hardware and Software Issues

This list is intended to help diagnose and isolate hardware and software issues.
15.1.1 Motion Errors

Motion errors are often caused by obstructions impeding the path of the table or C-arm or component
failure.
• A motor that has not been properly calibrated may cause hardware to move beyond a safe range of
operation
• A cover or an object might impede motor travel
To diagnose a motion error:
1. Listen to the system as it performs the task and identify any noises that might help identify the
cause of the problem.
2. Look for any obstructions that might prevent the equipment from operating correctly.
3. Verify that the component related to the motion has been calibrated correctly.
Table 110 Motion Errors

Symptom When Error Message Check
AY Movement Issue During Whole Body None Obstructions, points of contact,
Scan loose hardware.
Verify that requested motion passes
calibration.
Component failure (like an
encoder, motor, motor driver
board, or power supply).
Verify that ASY-09517 not needed.
C-arm/Signal Distribution Cable.
C-arm does not move During Arm Motion None Obstructions, points of contact,
loose hardware.
calibration.
Verify that ASY-09517 not needed
Motor Control Board

Troubleshooting
Table 110 Motion Errors (Continued)

C-arm stops rotating During IVA Scan Please position Protocol correctly followed and
patient within patient positioned correctly.
specified tolerance Obstructions, points of contact,
loose hardware.
calibration.
AR Motor
AY Motor
C-arm stops rotating With Heavier None Obstructions, points of contact,
Patients loose hardware.
calibration.
Tx Motor
Tz Motor
AR Motor
AY Motor (not likely)
cables
Clicking and Arm moving to None Identify the cause of noise:
Vibrating Lat or AP mechanical obstructions. AR Driver
motor or transmission.
Intermittent Table or Intermittent Table and/or Arm Obstructions, points of contact,
C-arm Error Outside loose hardware.
Specifications Verify that requested motion passes
calibration.
Encoder Calibration
Motion Positioning Local Motion Latest APEX revision
Positioning Error Active
No AC Interrupts Startup, or No AC Interrupts Emergency Stop, Green Instrument

Intermittent Power Switch position (in OFF
position (not illuminated))
X-ray Source Assembly, DIN Rail,
Fuses, and Relays
C-arm Interface Board
Unable to Position Are patients being properly
within Specified positioned on table
Tolerance Tz Encoder
Also check Section 15.2 System
Index Errors on Page 500
No Pedestal Motion None Tz low voltage power supply (24V)
Tz Calibration
Tz Motor Controller
Pedestals

Troubleshooting
Table 110 Motion Errors (Continued)

Pedestal Noise During Table Motion None Pedestal, Encoder
Table Motion During Table Motion None Table Rail Hardware
Binding and Noise
Ticking from XRC Emergency Stop Settings on Motor Drive Board:
Active Check the motor driver boards are
not addressed to the same IRQ
switch settings
Y Drive Cable

Troubleshooting
Table 111 System Shutdown

Symptom When Error Message Issue Check
System Locks During None Software Issue Reload Software
Up Questionnaire
System Lockup After Boot None Windows Check Software

and Shutdown Crashes Check Computer
System During Scan None Bad Tank Check X-ray Source

Shutdown Assembly
Intermittent X-ray Firing Out Aperture/Filter Calibrate Filter Drum

Of Order Drum Control
Board Error
Prior to Scan Unknown Error Bad Computer Computer, re-image as
necessary
System During Forearm Out of Position Calibration Software version
Stoppage Scan Tx and Ay Calibration
Aperture
Table Motion During Table None Table Rail Check Table Rail Hardware
Binding and Motion Hardware Loose
Noise
Table Shutdown After Pressing Locus Tx Error Bad Motor Motor Control Board
Center Table Control Board
During Archive None Antivirus Set Antivirus Exclusions for
Software the QDR Application
During Exams None Application Was Reload Software
Turning Off
Intermittent Remote Access IT Remote Remote Software
Message Connection Deployment and Patches
Intermittent None Faulty Tank/ X-ray Source Assembly/XRC
XRC
Also check
Section 15.2
System Index
Errors on
Page 500

Troubleshooting
Table 112 Scanning Issues

Cannot Run During Scan or No AC E-Stop, Green Check E-Stop position
Scans QC Attempt Interrupts Instrument Check for Green Instrument
Power Switch Power Switch in OFF
Bad X-ray position (not illuminated)
Source Toroid, Power, and Cables
Assembly Check X-ray Source
Assembly
Forearm Scan During Forearm Out of Position Calibration Calibrate Aperture
Positioning Scan
Error
Horizontal Lines During Whole None AC Power Issues Incoming AC Power
in Scans Body Scan Non-dedicated power
External devices plugged
into power supply; e.g. laser
printer
Bad ground
System does not Intermittent Dcalprot Error Bad X-ray X-ray Source Assembly
Generate X-ray Source
Assembly
System Locks up During Patient None Incompatible Use Recommended Media
Scan Archive Media
During Scan None Bad X-ray X-ray Source Assembly
Source
Assembly
System Timing Intermittent X-ray Controller Bad X-ray Aperture, Filter Drum
Interrupts Is Not Source Calibration
Generating Assembly AC Power Supply
System Timing X-ray Source Assembly
Interrupts Cables
Whole Body During Whole None Out of Recalibrate Tz, Tx, Ar Motors
Stops on Third Body Scan Calibration
Pass
During Whole None Out of Recalibrate Tz, Tx, Ar Motors
Body Scan Calibration
X-ray Stops During Scan X-ray Controller Bad X-ray Cables
Is Not Source X-ray Source Assembly
Generating Assembly
System Timing
Interrupts

Troubleshooting
Table 113 Drive and Monitor Issues

DVD Drive not N/A None Bad Connection Check drive connections
Working to DVD Drive Reconnect Drive
Flickering Intermittent None Bad Monitor Check Cables

Monitor Check Monitor
Check Video Boards
Monitor Image Intermittent None Bad Monitor Check Cables
Loss Check Monitor
Check Video Boards
Table 114 QC Errors

Collision Alert During Daily QC Table and Arm Table and C-arm Was system shut down with
Error Outside Safe out of position the table and arm in the
Operating Limits Patient ON/OFF position.
Center the table.
Pedestals
Cables
Failing Body During QC None Object in scan Phantom positioning
Composition QC area Aperture
Bad X-ray Objects in the scan area.
Source Check X-ray Source
Assembly Assembly
Failing QC Performing None Phantom Aperture
System Test Daily QC positioning High-voltage Power Supply
Aperture Issue output,
High-voltage X-ray Source Assembly
power supply Wrong phantom positioning
System Cold environment
temperature
Failing Whole Uniformity None Phantom Aperture
Body QC positioning High-voltage Power Supply
Aperture Issue output,
High-voltage X-ray Source Assembly
power supply Wrong phantom positioning
System Cold environment
temperature Table alignment
Table alignment

Troubleshooting
Table 114 QC Errors (Continued)

Hi-Low Air During Scan Standard Damaged Table Check Table Pad
Readings Deviation Hi or Pad Aperture alignment
Low Air Failed Aperture Loose or sticking hardware
with some alignment Loose
number greater or sticking
than 2 hardware
Table 115 Calibration Errors

When Error Message Issue Check
Intermittent CSF Stream CSF Stream Error Mechanical Hardware
Error Electronic Electronics
X-ray Source Assembly
High-voltage power supply
Table 116 Radiographic Uniformity Failure

When Error Message Issue Check
During Radiographic None Table not level Aperture Calibrations
Uniformity Test Bad Aperture Aperture Motor
Motor Table hardware
Table is level
Aperture Stepper Motor
Flattening
Vertical Lines Aperture Energy output
Appear Mechanical Aperture alignment
Alignment Calibration
Energy Output
During Testing None Table not Level Level Table
Check X-ray Source Assembly
Intermittent None Aperture Use scan file plot in the application
alignment to evaluate radiographic image
Aperture Alignment and
Calibration
After Heavy Patient None Table Crooked Realign and tighten tabletop
hardware

Troubleshooting
Table 117 Typical Software Issues

Blank Screen After AP None Software Verify database integrity
Acquisition Back up system
Reload software (potential
antivirus problem)
Error Message AP IVA Scan Unsupported Corrupt Scans Reload software as and
Unsupported Acquisition Application Was update
Attempted
Application
Attempted
Error Message Intermittent Resource File Software issue. Software.
Resource File could not be Bad Distribution Distribution Board
Found Board ComCon Board
could not be
Comcon Board
Found
Motion Error Positioning Local Motion Software Issue Latest APEX revision
Active
Reports Won’t N/A None Needed Check Network
Transfer Software was DICOM Connectivity
Deleted Report Destinations
Reinstall Software
Software Crash During Scan Scan Ending Due Software Issue Reload Software
to Error Third-party software
Condition installed (e.g., antivirus)
Scanning after Scan Ending Due Software issue Latest APEX revision
System is Idle to Error
Condition
Table Shutdown During Archive None Antivirus Set Antivirus Exclusions for
Software the QDR Application
External media
Unable to Accessing Maximum Hits Bad Worklist Corrupt database
Access Worklist Worklist per Query Settings Worklist Parameters
Query Retrieve Performing Internal PACS Issue Connectivity Configurations

Issue Query Retrieve Processing Error with C-ECHO (to verify
connectivity to PACS server)
Performing None Patient Scan is PACS Configuration at the
Query Retrieve not returned facility

Troubleshooting
15.2 System Index Errors

This list of Error Messages is intended to help identify errors and point to potential causes of the problem.
Note This is a partial list of index errors and possible causes
15.2.1 How to Read QDR Error Messages

QDR software will sometimes return an error message indicating a failure with a specific task and index
number. These values can be a useful tool in determining where an error has occurred on the system. QDR
software will make a copy of the currently selected scan protocol to a file called scanprot.log.
When an error occurs the FE can look at this log file to determine what task the QDR was attempting to do
perform at the time of failure. A timeout or bad data returned can cause a failure, but by being able to
determining what the QDR was attempting to do will aid in troubleshooting.
Log File Example

A customer is performing an AP Lumbar Spine Scan on a patient in the Array Mode. Software will
commands the hardware to go to starting positions and then verify the correct start positions prior to the
start of the scan beginning. However the customer receives an error and looking at the details button
software has returned an error encountered in Task 0, Index 258.
The Field Engineer can open the scanprot.log and scroll down through the file until Index 258 is found. By
reading the lines of text just above the Index 258 the FE can determine what software was trying to do
when the problem occurred was encountered. In the example below software was waiting for verification
that the aperture was in the correct position for imaging. The software may have timed out waiting for a
response, or the response was not the correct information for the position of the aperture. So the error was
posted to the screen and the imaging aborted.
The Index numbers are indented in to the right and start approximately a quarter of the way down the file.
The Index is highlighted in blue in the Figure 493. The cause of the problem in this example was an
aperture that was not moving smoothly and took too much time to reach position, causing a timeout
condition.
Figure 493 Sample from scanprot.log
Note The numbers on the left (in red) in Figure 493 are line numbers, not Index
numbers.
Index Error 32, 40, 42, 50, or 605

Can either be an indication of one of the following:
• An overweight patient. Check the error log and find out when the error occurred and the name of
the patient. Print a Filing report of the AP Spine for that patient. Look at the TH = XX.X value under
the table with the L1 - L4 results. TH is the patient thickness and an average patient should be around
6.5 in. A TH of 10.0 indicates the table was overloaded causing the error.

Troubleshooting
• A defective part: Pedestal, TZ Motor Controller, String Encoder problem, or a loose cable from the
Distribution board to the AR/TZ Motor Controller (if constant or very often).
• An improperly leveled table. Incorrect calibration of the AR Motor. Check the table for level at both
the head and foot end of the table from front to back of the table. The value you must have is 0.0
degrees front to back. If it is not, adjust it and then re-calibrate the AR Motor.
• Upgrade Required: This error code may also be an indication of the need for the TZ fix which
changes an EPROM on the TZ Controller board (P/N ASY-00549).
Index Error 184

Can be caused by an obstruction preventing the C-arm from moving. Check for carpeting, stools, sand bag,
etc.
Index Error 194 or 195

Can be caused by table movement is being blocked by a chair, wall, or other mechanical interference like a
screw that is sticking up or too long. Can also be caused by a defective motor or gear box.

This is usually an erroneous error code. Both the 201 and the 202 errors indicate that there is a problem with
the first or last detector in the array. In fact, if the Detector Assembly is correctly aligned, then this error is
caused by the incoming power frequency being incorrect. (59.8 Hz – 60.2 Hz or 49.8 Hz – 50.2 Hz). Also, the
first and last detectors in an array may not be bad. The detector numbers which MUST BE GOOD are: 64/
128 Detector array: 44 and 171, 215 Detector array: 3, 44, 171, and 212 (slots 7 and 10). If any of these are bad
you will get an error 201 or 202 (first detector/last detector) bad.
Index Error 204

This is caused by a defective A/D board or Detector Assembly. You should Check the cable from the C- Arm
Interface to the A/D or Detector at the same time.
Index Error 215

A collision alert error that occurs During Daily QC with the message Table and Arm Outside Safe
Operating Limits. Check for obstructions, check calibration, and check the pedestals.
Index Error 218

An index error that occurs during QC Scans. The error message QC Error Protocol File Dcalprot Device
Timeout Waiting for Requested Action indicates that the Filter Drum needs calibration.
Index Error 258, 297 or 418

Can be caused by a defective Aperture Assembly. The usual cause is that the lead screw is bound so that the
plate does not move or does not move smoothly or the motor itself is bad.
Index Error 260

This is typically caused by a defective filter drum (belts, pulleys, alignment, etc.) or an XRC problem. In one
case, however, the hospital sent an hourly timing pulse to all clocks on one phase of the AC line.
Concurrent with this pulse, X-rays On fails with a Filter Drum Timing error.
Index Error 272 Can be caused by:

Belts over-tightened on the filter drum. Defective filter drum motor.
Defective C-arm Interface board.

Troubleshooting
Index Error 275

This error occurs during QC scan, on the first scan after 30 minutes of machine inactivity, or on the first
scan immediately after an IVA scan. The error is caused by the inability of the filter drum to spin up to
speed as fast as the software expects. The two principal reasons for the slow startup are: Filter drum belts
over-tightened and Defective filter drum motor.
Index Error 278 can be caused by

Filter drum belts are too tight or missing teeth
Loose pulley set screws Poor filter drum alignment A defective Filter Drum.
Index Error 294

DICOM files may be held in DICOM Send queue. If this occurs when changing the aperture, it may
indicate that the aperture needs calibration.
Index Error 298

If the X-ray stops intermittently with the message Scan Ending Due to Error Condition, check the Filter
Drum Control Board.

An error code 307 or 309 is typically a Filter Drum maintenance issue. Check the filter drum belts, Check
belt pulley set screws. Check belt tension/Idler Pulley. Blow out the optical detectors at the rear of the filter
drum. Also check the X-ray Source Assembly for a 307 error.
However, If the a 309 error has the message X-ray control error. Please call Hologic. Application will exit
on OK. on a QDR-4500 running QDR V12.6.6, APEX 2.3.2, or APEX 2.4.2, then you should call Tech
Support for further instructions.
Index Error 313 on Whole Body Scans

This is usually a C-arm movement issue where the C-arm cannot reach either the head or foot end limit
during the scan. Check for screws blocking C-arm movement. Check for carpeting catching the C-arm
covers. Check AY Encoder (not at limit).
Error Code Index 318 during QC. X-ray Hi/lo Does Not Match Filter Drum Position.
This error message can occur in two scenarios: Software setup during an upgrade or Filter Drum problems
(loose belts, pulleys, etc.).
Scenario 1
When upgrading to Horizon or APEX, the HOLOGIC.INI is rewritten to read APER=False. The Horizon
Upgrade Tools Disk should change this line to True for a movable aperture. If it remains =False and you
will get either an Index 309 and/or an Index 318 error message. Check HOLOGIC.INI and modify the line if
necessary.
Scenario 2
The other time when you can get this error message is when the filter drum position encoders at the rear of
the filter drum are dirty and read the filter drum position inconsistently. Normally, the drum reads as
follows:
(Clean Detectors) Air-Lo, Air-High, Tissue-Lo, Tissue-Hi, Bone-Lo, Bone-Hi (Dirty Detectors) Air-Lo, Air-
Lo, Tissue-Lo, Tissue-Hi, Bone-Lo, Bone-Lo
It has also been reported that this error can also be caused by a sticky aperture assembly.
In the example above, the dirty detector caused you to miss the Air-Hi and Bone-Hi pulses. But, because of
the intermittent nature of the error, you will get Index 318 errors. If you had a completely dead detector(s),
you would be more likely to get X-rays do not match filter drum position.
To fix this problem, use compressed air to clean out the photo detectors. Index Error 323

Troubleshooting
This is usually caused by either a bad C-arm Interface board, P/N 140-0090 a defective Filter Drum, or X-ray
Source Assembly/XRC.
Index Error Code 347 or Code 184 during Hip Scans

This is usually caused by improper positioning for a hip scan. Rebooting will cure the message but, proper
patient positioning will eliminate it.
The 184 error code will usually be an AY calibration issue, something obstructing the C-arm, or a loose belt.
The backlash from the belt or the bad cal causes this C-arm positioning error during scan repositioning.
Index Error 349. X-ray firing order out of sequence.
This is typically a Filter Drum problem. It can, however, be caused by viruses or 3rd party software.
If the position detectors at the rear of the Filter Drum are dirty, you will not always detect the correct
position of the filter drum and will get occasional errors with the message X-ray firing order out of
sequence.
If the filter drum alignment is completely incorrect due to bad belts or a loose pulley, you will get the Index
349 error.
1. Check the filter drum belts.
2. Check the belt pulley set screws.
Figure 494 Close Program
3. Go to Start > Run > MSCONFIG and go to the Startup tab (Figure 495).
4. Deselect any that are not on this list.

Troubleshooting
Figure 495 System Configuration Utility
Index Error 358

Usually caused by either a defective AY Encoder or a defective C-arm Interface board, P/N 140-0090.
Index Error 360 Motor Reversed during Stepping

Can be caused by a loose coupling between the Encoder and the Idler Pulley shaft. While this error can
occur with any encoder position, it happens most frequently with AY due to the amount of usage.
Index Error 365 or 367 during QC

This is usually caused by improper positioning of the Detector Assembly from front to back.
The FE needs to check the waterfall in X-ray Survey to make sure that in Aperture 7, detectors 44 and 171
are of the same height.
• First detector (44) = Index error 365 (Detector too far back)
• Last detector (171) = Index error 367 (Detector too far forward)
Index Error 368

This is typically an AY error associated with a bad calibration, defective Encoder, or a belt tension problem.
Check the AY belt tension. Check AY Motor calibration. Check and recalibrate the AY Encoder.
Index Error Code 309 or 371

If you see a 371 error which has the error message text X-ray control error. Please call Hologic. Application
will exit on OK. and is on a QDR-4500 running QDR V12.6.2, APEX 2.3.2, or APEX 2.4.2, you should call
Tech Support for further instructions.

Troubleshooting
Index Error 373

Usually associated with an AY Encoder failure or AY calibration. Check the AY Encoder. Calibrate AY
Motor. Check AY belt tightness. Too tight will cause this error and usually results in a squeaking belt
during arm movement.
Index Error 389 Motor at Limit

Can be caused by a patient positioning error. If the patient is too far up on the table to be able to perform
the requested scan, you will get this error. This error most frequently occurs with new users with a
Discovery/Explorer C or a 4500 C upgraded to Discovery. It typically occurs when they are doing IVA scans
which are 18 in. long.
Index Error 413

If the software crashes during a scan with the message Task Error, diagnose and troubleshoot the files in
Msconfig Startup folder.
Index Error 472

Indicates a motion error during a Hip Scan often caused by the Lead Shield over the Aperture dropping.
Check the Filter Drum Assembly.
Index Error 548

Occurs when Moving To LAT or AP and produces a Device Timeout error Message. Check for loose
hardware, bolts on the Tz Motor.
Index Error 557

If the system locks up at the start of a scan, check the Spellman X-ray Source Assembly.
Index Error 585

Can be caused by improper positioning during a dual hip exam with auto-hip positioning. The picture on
the scan screen shows the laser crosshairs aligned to the skin at the hip. Doing this is fine for a thin patient
but, is incorrect for larger patients. The laser should be aligned to the outside tip of the greater trochanter.
The tech can feel for this point and position the laser accordingly.
Index Error 587

Can be caused by a defective Communications Controller board, Distribution board or a defective
Umbilical cable.
Index Error 599 No Motion Detected during Stepping

Can be caused by either a bad AY Encoder or a defective Motor Controller Board.

Index
Index
A Boards
Distribution ....................................................21
A/D Gain Control Adjustment 141, 296, 313, 362 Motor Controller ...........................................21
Activation PCIe Communication Controller ................19
APEX Reporting Engine ............................420
Adjustments C
A/D Gain Control ...............141, 296, 313, 362
Cables, Upper C-arm ...........................................70
Belts ...............................................................106
Calibration
C-arm Parallelism .......................................106
Cross-Calibration ............................... 168, 173
Encoders .......................................................109
Calibration Errors ...............................................498
Filter Drum Assembly Left to Right 129, 288,
Calibrations .........................................................108
..........................................................354
after FRU Replacement or Repair .............281
Front to Back T-Rail and Table Edge/Rail Gap
Aperture ............................. 134, 293, 326, 359
Adjustment ....................................105
AR (Horizon A) ...........................................117
Motor Drive Belts ........................................481
AY (Horizon A, W) .....................................110
Sled ............................................... 129, 288, 354
Field Service 157, 300, 316, 331, 366, 373, 411
Table Edge to T-Rail ...................................104
HVPS Assembly Replacement ..................282
Alignments
Motors ...........................................................107
after FRU Replacement or Repair .............281
Requirements, after FRU Replacement ....281
Checks ...........................................................481
Sequence .......................................................107
Cross-Table X-ray Beam ............ 130, 289, 355
TX ..................................................................115
Requirements, after FRU Replacement ....281
Tz Motor .......................................................108
Skew Filter Drum Base .............. 128, 287, 353
C-arm
Table ..............................................................103
Hardware .......................................................70
X-ray Beam, Cross-Table ........... 130, 289, 355
Installation
Amplitude, Voltage .......................... 130, 289, 355
Horizon A ........................................ 66, 69
Aperture Assembly ..............................................16
Horizon C, Ci, W and Wi ......................68
Aperture Calibration ................134, 293, 326, 359
Interface Board ........................................... 8–9
Aperture Motor
Parallelism Adjustment (Horizon A) .......106
Assembly ..........................................................9
Subsystem ........................................................9
APEX 5.6 or later, installation ..........................208
Central DICOM Server Installation .................439
APEX Reporting Engine ....................................418
Checklists
APEX Reporting Engine Activation ................420
after Computer Replacement ....................201
AR Motor Cover, remove ..................................119
prior to Computer Replacement ...............199
B Replace DXA CPU before Software Upgrade
..........................................................199
Balance Detectors .............................. 132, 291, 357 Circuit Board Function, System .........................10
Base Frame Level .......................................... 71–72 Circuit Breaker ......................................................77
Beam Filter ..............................................................4 Clearances
Beam Filtration .....................................................16 Horizon A .......................................................53
Beam Quality .................................................16 Horizon C,Ci ..................................................54
Beam Quality ........................................................16 Horizon W,Wi ...............................................55
Belt Adjustment ..................................................106 Components
Belt Tension .........................................................106 C-arm Interface Board ............................... 8–9
Block Diagram C-arm Subsystem ............................................9
Distribution and Motor Control .................10 Detector Board ...............................................10
Distribution Board Distribution Board ................................... 7, 10
Interconnection ......................................19 Interconnection Diagram ......................21
Horizon C-arm Block Diagram .....................9 Interface .....................................................7
Horizon Operator Console ............................7 Routing ......................................................8
Horizon System ...............................................6 Motor Control Subsystem ..............................8
PCIe Communication Controller Board ....19 Pentium PC ......................................................7
BMC, BMD, AND AREA Gold Standard System Configuration
Averages ..............................................................169 Hologic Connect ................................. 446–447

Index
Configurations E
CentralDICOMServer .................................444
DICOM .........................................................213 Emergency Motion .............................................479
IP Address and Subnet Mask ....................217 EMI Cables, replace ...........................................274
Network .............................................. 198, 206 Encoder, adjust ...................................................109
Connectivity Survey Form ................................203 Error Messages, QDR ........................................500
Control Panel Board ............................................10 Exam Mode Performance ....................................13
Corrective Service Procedures .........................198
Counterweights, C-arm .......................................67 F
Cross-Calibration ...................................... 168, 173 Field Replacement Units .......................... 275–280
Cross-Table X-ray Beam Alignment 130, 289, 355 Cables ............................................................279
D Computer and Isolation Module ..............278
Electronics Tray ...........................................275
Daily Calibration Internal Reference System .....4 Internal Computer Assemblies .................278
Destination Path Measurement ..........................58 Lower C-arm ................................................277
Detector Assembly Miscellaneous ..............................................279
Screw Locations ......................... 133, 292, 358 Mobile ...........................................................280
Detector Flattening ..142, 298, 314, 330, 364, 409 Special Tools ................................................280
Detector Signal Levels Check .......... 130, 289, 355 Table X ..........................................................276
Detectors, balance ............................. 132, 291, 357 Table Y ..........................................................276
Determining Alignment and Calibration Re- Upper C-arm ................................................278
quirements ..........................................................281 Field Service Calibrations 157, 300, 316, 331, 366,
Deviation from Indicated Values, Maximum ..16 ....................................................................... 373, 411
Diagram, Wiring Filter Drum Assembly ...............4–5, 8–9, 16, 241
Horizon C,Ci DIN Rail AC Input/Output .82 Aperture Controller ......................................11
Horizon W,Wi DIN Rail AC Input/Output ... Aperture replacement ................................242
82 Interface ..........................................................11
Diagrams, see Block Diagrams Left to Right Adjustment ..........129, 288, 354
DICOM Flattening, Detector ..142, 298, 314, 330, 364, 409
Configuration ..............................................213 Free and Public DNS Servers ................... 437–438
Host Configuration .....................................213 Front to Back T-Rail and Table Edge/Rail Gap
Server Configuration ..................................444 Adjustment ..........................................................105
Testing ..........................................................218 FRU, see Field Replacement Unit
Dimensions ...........................................................13
Horizon A ......................................................53 G
Horizon C,Ci ..................................................54 Gold Standard Phantom Label .........................170
Horizon W,Wi ...............................................55 Gold Standard Phantom Scan ..........................174
DIN Rail Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance .............485
AC Input/Output Wiring Diagram ............82
Horizon ...........................................................74 H
Horizon C, Ci .................................................75
W, Wi ..............................................................75 Hardware
Distribution & Motor Control Block Diagram .10 C-arm ..............................................................70
Distribution Board ......................... 7–8, 10, 20–21 Filter Drum Assembly ....................................4
Interconnection Diagram .............................21 Hologic Connect
Interface ............................................................7 Service Verification .....................................448
Interface Connections ...................................20 Hologic Connect Configuration .............. 446–447
Power ..............................................................20 Hologic Connect Installation ................... 446–447
Routing .............................................................8 Horizon C-arm
DNS Servers ............................................... 437–439 Block Diagram .................................................9
Documentation, required ....................................48 Hardware .......................................................70
Doorway Size, minimum ....................................49 Installation
Drive and Monitor Issues .................................497 Horizon A ........................................ 66, 69
Duty Cycle .............................................................15 Horizon C, Ci, W and Wi ......................68
Interface Board ........................................... 8–9
Parallelism Adjustment (Horizon A) .......106
Subsystem ........................................................9

Index
Horizon DIN Rail AC Wiring Diagram M

Horizon C,Ci Rail AC Input/Output ..........82
Horizon Models ......................................................3 Measurement Criteria for Technique Factors ..16
Horizon Scan Options ...........................................3 Microsoft Word Installation .............................418
HVPS, see X-ray Source Assembly Motion Errors ......................................................492
Motor Calibration ...............................................107
I Motor Control Subsystem .....................................8
Move System .........................................................61
Index Errors ............................................... 500–505
Movement, Table
Initial Leakage Survey .......................................122
Horizon A System ...........................................2
InRush Limiter ......................................................77
Horizon C System ...........................................1
Inspection
Horizon Ci System ..........................................1
Damage ...........................................................57
Horizon W System ..........................................2
System .............................................................56
Horizon Wi System .........................................2
Installation .............................................................48
APEX 5.6 or later .........................................208 N
APEX Reporting Engine ............................418
C-arm Network Configuration ............................ 198, 213
Horizon A ........................................ 66, 69 New System Cross-Calibration ........................173
Horizon C, Ci, W and Wi ......................68
Central DICOM Server ...............................439 O
Hologic Connect ................................. 446–447 Operating Parameters, System ...........................13
Microsoft Word ...........................................418 Operator Console .............................................. 6–7
Preparation ....................................................48
Replacement PC Assembly ............... 198, 206 P
Required Documentation ............................48
Room and Doorway Size, minimum .........49 PACS Setup .........................................................219
Site Considerations .......................................48 Panel, Strain Relief ...............................................78
SQL Server 2012 Express ...........................208 Parallelism Adjustment, C-arm (Horizon A Sys-
Tools ................................................................48 tems Only) ...........................................................106
Upper C-arm, Horizon A .............................69 Patient Positioning .................................................3
Interface ...................................................................7 PC Components ......................................................7
Inventory ...............................................................57 PC Re-image ........................................................198
IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuration .217 PC Replacement .................................................198
Isolation Transformer Input Taps ......................80 PCB Summary .....................................................488
64-Channel Detector Array Assembly .....489
J ADC ..............................................................490
C-arm Interface ............................................491
Jumpers, power connection ................................77 PCIe Communications Command Board
L Communications Controller .......488
Stepper Motor Controller ...........................489
Label TZ Drive .......................................................489
Gold Standard Phantom ............................170 PCIe Communication Controller Board ...........19
Lateral Aperture Beam Alignment 122, 282, 307, PCIe Communications Command Board Com-
347 munications Controller ......................................488
Setup ....................................122, 282, 307, 347 PCS Summary
Leakage Technique Factors ......................... 15–16 128-Channel Detector Assembly ...............490
Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current 16 Performance
Maximum Deviation ....................................16 Exam Mode ....................................................13
Technique Factors Measurement Criteria .16 Power Cables ........................................................77
Level Power Connection Jumpers ................................77
Base Frame .............................................. 71–72 Power Requirements ............................................73
Table ......................................................... 72–73 Preventive Maintenance ....................................480
Level Placement Alignment Checks .......................................481
X-ray Source Assembly ..............................118 Guide Rail and Bearing ..............................485
Line Voltage and Maximum Line Current .......16 Motor Drive Belt Adjustment ....................481
Local Test Network Setup .................................219 Virus Check ..................................................482
Product Specifications .........................................12

Index
Q System Shutdown Errors ..................................495

System Weights ....................................................56
QC Errors ............................................................497
QDR Error Messages, how to read ..................500 T
R Table
Level ......................................................... 72–73
Radiographic Uniformity Failure ....................498 Movement
Re-image PC .......................................................198 Horizon A System ....................................2
Remove AR Motor Cover .................................119 Horizon C System ....................................1
Remove Horizon A Lower C-arm Assembly ...59 Horizon Ci System ...................................1
Removing Tabletop during Move .....................58 Horizon W System ...................................2
Reports Horizon Wi System ..................................2
Installation Samples ...................................194 Table Alignment .................................................103
Reports, Technical Support ..............................172 Table Edge to T-Rail Adjustment .....................104
Room Size, minimum ..........................................49 Tank, see X-ray Source Assembly
Routing ....................................................................8 Taps, Isolation Transformer Input .....................80
Technical Support Reports ................................172
S Technique Factors Measurement Criteria ........16
Scan Averaging, cross-calibration ...................172 Tool Kit ..................................................................48
Scan Options, Horizon ..........................................3 Toroid A/C Input Wiring ....................................73
Scanning Issues ..................................................496 Troubleshooting
Set the System in Place ........................................65 Calibration Errors .......................................498
Setup Drive and Monitor Issues ..........................497
Local Test Network ....................................219 Motion Errors ..............................................492
PACS .............................................................219 QC Errors .....................................................497
Shielding ..................................................................4 Radiographic Uniformity Failure .............498
Shipping Bracket Location Scanning Issues ...........................................496
Horizon A ......................................................60 System Index Errors ...................................500
Horizon C, Ci, W, Wi ....................................60 System Shutdown Errors ...........................495
Shipping Damage, ................................................57 Typical Software Issues ..............................499
Skew Filter Drum Base Alignment . 128, 287, 353 Typical Software Issues .....................................499
Sled Adjustment ................................ 129, 288, 354 TZ Drive ..............................................................489
Sled Adjustment Screws .................. 129, 288, 354 Tz Motor Calibration .........................................108
Space Requirements U
Horizon A ......................................................49
Horizon A External Console .......................50 Uncrating the System ..........................................57
Horizon C, Ci .................................................51 Upper C-arm Cables ............................................70
Horizon W, Wi ..............................................52
Spellman Tank, see X-ray Source Assembly V
SQL Server 2012 Express Installation ..............208
Virus Check .........................................................482
Stand system up on foot end ..............................64
Voltage Amplitude ...........................130, 289, 355
Stepper Motor Controller ..................................489
Strain Relief Panel ................................................78 W
Survey Form, Connectivity ...............................203
Survey, X-ray ............................................. 464–472 Weights,System ....................................................56
System Wiring
Installation .....................................................48 Toroid A/C Input ..........................................73
Operation .........................................................3 Wiring Diagram
Preparation ....................................................48 Horizon C,Ci DIN Rail AC Input/Output .82
System Backup .......................................... 198, 204 Horizon W,Wi DIN Rail AC Input/Output ...
Cross-Calibrated System ............................196 82
System Circuit Board Function ..........................10 Worklist Provider Test ......................................220
System Dimensions ..............................................13
System Index Errors ...........................................500 X
System Inspection ................................................56 X-ray Controller ......................................................9
System Operating Parameters ............................13 X-ray

Index
Scanning Principles ........................................4

X-Ray Beam
Alignment ...........................122, 282, 307, 347
X-ray Source Assembly 4, 8, 11, 32, 35, 38, 112–
113, .. 117–119, 236, 240, 242–243, 493, 495–498,
502– .............................................................. 503, 505
level placement ............................................118
removal .........................................................240
replacement .................................................242

Hologic, Inc.
36 Apple Ridge Road
Danbury, CT 06810 USA
Made in Mexico
www.hologic.com | info@hologic.com

Horizon Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Horizon Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Artwork consists of:

 Five Hundred Fifty-four (554) 8½ x 5½ inch pages

REV AUTHORED BY DATE Osteoporosis Assessment

2 Functional Description ..........................................................................................................18

MAN-03310 Revision 004 i

2.3.2 Interface Connections ............................................................................................................................20

ii MAN-03310 Revision 004

2.12 Analog To Digital Board (A Model Only) ...................................................................................................45

3 System Installation .................................................................................................................48

MAN-03310 Revision 004 iii

Measure Line Voltage ...............................................................................................................................73

iv MAN-03310 Revision 004

3.7.4 Perform X-axis (Front-to-Back) X-ray Beam Alignment.................................................................130

MAN-03310 Revision 004 v

3.21 Perform Fan-Beam Cross Calibration if Required....................................................................................168

4 Corrective Service Procedures ............................................................................................198

vi MAN-03310 Revision 004

DICOM Host Configuration ..................................................................................................................213

MAN-03310 Revision 004 vii

(C, W and A Systems) ...........................................................................................................249

5 Alignments and Calibrations After FRU Replacement or System Repair.................281

6 Calibrations after HVPS Assembly Replacement ..........................................................282

viii MAN-03310 Revision 004

6.1.6 A/D Gain Control Adjustment ...........................................................................................................296

7 Calibrations after Detector Assembly or Laser Assembly Replacement ...................307

MAN-03310 Revision 004 ix

7.6 Performing the IVA Scan QC Procedure ...................................................................................................323

8 Calibrations after Aperture Assembly Replacement .....................................................326

x MAN-03310 Revision 004

8.12 Calibrations after Filter Drum Assembly Replacement...........................................................................341

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xi

9 Calibrations after Motor Replacement .............................................................................380

10 Calibrations after Table TZ Pedestals Replacement....................................................394

11 Software Installation and Upgrades ...............................................................................418

xii MAN-03310 Revision 004

11.2.1 Install APEX 5.6.0.x or Later .............................................................................................................422

12 Software Tools — System Diagnostics ...........................................................................451

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xiii

Filter Wheel button OFF/ON .................................................................................................................467

13 Preventive Maintenance ....................................................................................................480

xiv MAN-03310 Revision 004

13.2.2 Guide Rail and Bearing Maintenance..............................................................................................485

14 PCB Summary Information...............................................................................................488

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xv

xvi MAN-03310 Revision 004

Figure 36: Ramps Installed at End of Skid....................................................................................................... 63

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xvii

Figure 73: Attaching the Base to the Right Frame .......................................................................................... 92

xviii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Figure 111: Table IN/OUT.................................................................................................................................. 119

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xix

Figure 148: Select Array (a)................................................................................................................................ 146

xx MAN-03310 Revision 004

Figure 185: Conditions Range Diagram........................................................................................................... 177

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxi

Figure 222: Select Horizon Machine Type ...................................................................................................... 211

xxii MAN-03310 Revision 004

Figure 259: Aperture Motor Jumper, J12 ........................................................................................................ 250

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxiii

Figure 296: Use Needle-nose Pliers to Start Screws ....................................................................................... 272

xxiv MAN-03310 Revision 004

Figure 333: Check Voltage Output ................................................................................................................... 310

MAN-03310 Revision 004 xxv

Figure 370: Voltage Amplitude on Device Control Screen ........................................................................... 355